Simplex MINIPLEX 4100ES Series Installation Manual
Simplex MINIPLEX 4100ES Series is a fire alarm system that offers reliable fire protection for a wide range of applications. It features advanced detection technology, flexible configuration options, and user-friendly operation. With its modular design, the 4100ES Series can be customized to meet the specific needs of your facility, providing comprehensive fire protection for years to come.
Advertisement
Advertisement
4100ES
Fire Alarm System
FIRE ALARM
Installation
Guide
574-848
Rev. BD
Cautions, Warnings, and Regulatory Information
Cautions and
Warnings
READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS - Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depend upon proper installation.
DO NOT INSTALL ANY SIMPLEX® PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED - Upon unpacking your Simplex product, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim with the carrier and notify an authorized Simplex product supplier.
ELECTRICAL HAZARD - Disconnect electrical field power when making any internal adjustments or repairs. All repairs should be performed by a representative or authorized agent of your local Simplex product supplier.
STATIC HAZARD - Static electricity can damage components. Handle as follows:
• Ground yourself before opening or installing components.
• Prior to installation, keep components wrapped in anti-static material at all times.
EYE SAFETY HAZARD - Under certain fiber optic application conditions, the optical output of this device may exceed eye safety limits. Do not use magnification (such as a microscope or other focusing equipment) when viewing the output of this device.
SULFURIC ACID WARNING Battery contains sulfuric acid, which can cause severe burns to the skin and eyes and can destroy fabric. Replace any leaking or damaged battery while wearing appropriate protective gear. If you come in contact with sulfuric acid, immediately flush skin or eyes with water for 15 minutes and seek immediate medical attention.
FCC RULES AND REGULATIONS - PART 15 - This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
IMPORTANT: Verify FACP System Programmer, Executive, and Slave Software compatibility when installing, or replacing system components. Refer to the Technical
Support Information and Downloads website for compatibility information.
Copyright and
Trademarks
© 2017 Johnson Controls. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision and are subject to change without notice. Additional listings may be applicable, contact your local Simplex® product supplier for the latest status.
Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. Simplex, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm Code are registered trademarks of the National
Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
VESDA is a trademark of Xtralis Pty Ltd.
NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code are registered trademarks of the
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
i
Emissions Compliance, Radio Frequency Immunity, Safety and Agency Approvals
EMC Emissions
• FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Class A Emission Requirements (USA)
EMC Immunity
• EN50130-4: 1996, Electromagnetic compatibility- Product family standard: Immunity requirements for components of fire, intruder, and social alarm systems.
System Type:
Fire Alarm Control Panels
4100-9111, 4100-9112, 4100-9113, 4100-9121, 4100-9131, 4100-4100-9132,
4100-9133, 4100-9211, 4100-9230, 4100-9311, 4100-9314, 400-9331, 4100-9312, 4100-
9313, 4100-9315, 4100-9316, 4100-9332, 4100-9511, 4100-9512, 4100-9513, 4100-9531,
4100-9532, 4100-9533, 4100-9534.
Transponders and Remote Annunciators
4100-9600, 4100-9601, 4100-9610
Analog and Digital Audio Options
4100-9620, 4100-9621
Network Display Units
4100-9141, 4100-9142, 4100-9143, 4100-9144, 4100-9145, 4100-9146, 4100-9241, 4100-
9242, 4100-9342, 4100-9352, 4100-9355, 4100-9542.
Manufacturer’s Name: Simplex Time Recorder Co., D/B/A TEPG-US
Manufacturer’s Address: 50 Technology Drive
Westiminster MA 01441-0001
United States of America.
ii
Listings, Approvals, Codes, and Standards
Listings and
Approvals
This equipment meets the requirements of the following agencies.
• UL (UL 864)
• ULC (S527)
• FM (Class No. 3010)
• CSFM
• MEA
Codes and
Standards
If the notification appliances and accessories referenced in Table I are installed in accordance with either NFPA 12A or NFPA 2001, the system must employ an additional mechanicallyoperated manual release mechanism.
The installer should be familiar with the relevant codes listed below, as well as any other applicable local codes and standards, when installing a fire alarm system.
NFPA 72
NFPA 11
NFPA 11A
NFPA 12
NFPA 12A
NFPA 13
NFPA 14
NFPA 15
NFPA 16
NFPA 16A
NFPA 17
NFPA 17A
NFPA 25
NFPA 70
NFPA 72
NFPA 101
NFPA 750
NFPA 2001
ULC S524
UL 1076
National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code
Standard for Low-Expansion Foam and Combined Agent Systems
Standard for Medium- and High-Expansion Foam Systems
Standard for Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems
Standard on Halon 1301 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Standard for Installation of Sprinkler Systems
Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems
Standard for Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire Protection
Standard for the Installation of Deluge Foam-Water Sprinkler and Foam-
Water Spray Systems
Standard for the Installation of Closed-Head Foam-Water Sprinkler Systems
Standard for Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems
Standard for Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems
Standard for Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire
Protection Systems
National Electric Code
National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code
Life Safety Code
Standard on Water Mist Fire Protection Systems
Standard on Clean Agent Fire Protection Systems
Standard for Installation of Fire Alarm Systems (Canadian Systems)
Standard for Safety for Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems
Environmental
Operating Range
The 4100ES and all modules are rated to operate at ambient temperatures from 32 o
F - 120 o
F
(0 o
C - 49 o
C).
The 4100ES and all modules are rated for operation at 90 o
F (32 o
C), 93% RH
(non-condensing).
iii
Table of Contents
Emissions Compliance, Radio Frequency Immunity, Safety and Agency Approvals ii
Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System ............................. 1-1
7
Table of Contents
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components ......................................................... 2-1
8
Table of Contents
Mixed 4100 Motherboard/4100ES 4”x5” Card Placement Guidelines ...............................2-28
Step 10. System Power Up and Power Down Procedures ......................................... 2-43
9
Table of Contents
Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components .................................... 3-1
10
Table of Contents
Chapter 5 The System Power Supply (SPS) .................................................... 5-1
11
Table of Contents
12
Table of Contents
13
Table of Contents
Application of 4100ES as a UL2572 Mass Notification System ................................. 10-2
Appendix A The Device Configuration DIP Switch .........................................A-1
Chapter B Installing 4100 FACP Components (Non-4100ES/4100U) ............B-1
14
Table of Contents
Chapter C Installing 4100 MINIPLEX Components (Non-4100ES/4100U) ....C-1
Appendix D Checking System Wiring ..............................................................D-1
Appendix E References to 4100ES Module Installation Instructions ...........E-1
15
Table of Contents
Appendix H Special Application NAC-Compatible Notification Appliances and
Appendix I EPS Compatible Appliances and Devices ..................................... I-1
Appendix J Cooper Wheelock Appliances Compatible With 4100ES Wheelock
Appendix K Audio Equipment Compatible with 520 Hz Low Frequency Alarm K-1
16
List of Figures
Figure 2-7. Master Controller Daughter Card (566-719) ..................................................... 2-8
Figure 2-15. Back Box side views (plastic and metal doors).............................................. 2-17
Figure 2-34. FACP Power Supply Assembly Connector (EPS shown)............................. 2-32
Figure 3-4. Loop Wire Through Ferrite Bead as Shown ................................................... 3-11
Figure 4-4. The 4100/4120-0143/ 4100-6057 Fiber-Optic Media Card............................... 4-5
Figure 4-6. The 4100-6055 Modem Media Card (565-279 or 566-338).............................. 4-6
17
List of Figures
Figure 4-12. Wired Media Interconnections Between 4100ES Motherboards .................. 4-16
Figure 4-17. Modem Media Wiring (Non-4100ES/4100U Only)........................................ 4-21
Figure 4-20. Digital Audio Interconnections (4100-1311 Digital Audio Controller)............ 4-25
Figure B-17. Power and Communication Wiring for Motherboards................................... B-20
18
List of Figures
Figure C-6. Power and Communication Wiring for the Transponder Cabinet (4100) ....... C-10
19
List of Tables
Table 4-3. Dual Fiber Optic Cable Communications Distance Examples .......................... 4-14
Table 4-4. Single Fiber Optic Cable Communications Distance Examples* ...................... 4-14
Table 8-4. UTP Wiring Limit for Speakers and Speaker/Visible devices based on Communication
Table H-1. Special Application NAC-Compatible Notification Appliances and Accessories H-1
Table K-3. Audio Options That May Be Configured Alongside Compatible Equipment ..... K-3
20
Chapter 1
Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System
Introduction
In this chapter
The 4100ES is an expandable fire alarm system that can be used as a standalone system with one host panel, or as a wide-ranging system with several remote back boxes, with or without multiple host panels. This chapter is an overview of standalone, MINIPLEX®, and network
4100ES system concepts.
Two types of 4100ES Fire Alarm Control Panels (FACP) configurations are described in this manual:
• The “SPS configuration”, which refers to FACPS that use a System Power Supply (SPS) card as the FACP’s Central Processing Unit’s (CPU) powers supply.
• The “EPS configuration”, which refers to FACPS that have an Extended Power Supply
(EPS) module fitted with an IDNET 2 card as the CPU FACP power supply
References to “non-4100ES/4100U”, “Legacy 4100”, “4120”, or “4020” throughout the manual are for retrofit applications only.
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic Page
1-1
Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System
System configurations
Overview The 4100ES is available as a standalone system with one host panel, or as an expansive system with several remote back boxes, with or without multiple host panels. The type of
configuration used depends on the size of the site into which it is being installed.
The following types of configurations are offered:
Standalone. Comprised of one FACP and its assorted notification appliances, initiating devices, and signaling line circuit devices.
MINIPLEX. A standalone system plus remote transponder cabinets, which allow for additional slave modules to be used. Typically used for multi-level buildings and small
multi-building applications.
Network. A multi-FACP system connected by network cards. Each panel maintains the status and control of its own circuit points while monitoring and controlling activity at other locations. Network nodes may perform similar tasks, or may be dedicated to specific functions.
This chapter outlines the fundamental concepts of each configuration
1-2
Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System
Standalone configuration
Overview
System design
The standalone version of the 4100ES is used for smaller or single-building applications. A standalone system is ideally placed into a small building that requires a limited number of notification appliances and initiating devices.
.
If a small building is being expanded, or if other buildings are being constructed in the same general area (as in a campus application), the standalone 4100ES can be expanded into one of the larger systems described later.
The standalone 4100ES uses one FACP (one, two, or three bays) containing the following:
• Central Processing Unit (CPU)
• System Power Supply for the 4100ES FACP (Universal Power Supply for 4100 Legacy
Upgrade)
• Optional slave cards
All appliances and devices are connected to that one FACP, as shown in Figure 1-1.
To additional IDNet devices, up to 250 total to Device
- IDNET IN +
+IDNET IN -
Supervised IAM
TrueAlarm smoke sensor with base
Remote line powered isolator
FIRE ALARM
PULL DOWN
Addressable station 1
2
3
4
+ 24V
0V
+IDNET
- IDNET
ZONE PWR +
ZONE PWR -
IDC +
IDC -
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
SIMPLEX TIME RECORDER CO.
4090-9101
MONITOR ZAM, CLASS B
INSTAL. INSTR. 574-183
DATE CODE:
1
7
8
5
6 to Device(s)
Monitor, signal, and
Relay IAMs
TrueAlarm thermal sensor with base
SYSTEM IS NORMAL
08:23:43 am MON 11-DEC-00
Fire Alarm
ALARMS
Priority 2 Alarm
SYST EM WARNINGS
Su pervisory Trouble Alarm Silenced
AC Po wer
Fire Alarm
Ack
Priority 2
Ack
Su pv
Ack
Alarm
Silence
System
Reset
More
In fo
Trou ble
Ack
Event
Time
Enable
Disable
On
Arm
Off
Disarm
Au to L amp
Test
Menu
P revi ous
Next
Emergency Operating Instructions
Alarm or Warning Condition
System indi cator flashing. Tone On.
How to Acknowledge / View Events
Press ACK located und er flashing indicator.
Repeat operation until all events are acknowledged.
A B C
ZONE 1
J K L
D E F
S T U
NET
7
'SP' ( )
M N O
5
V W X
8
, 0 :
ADDR
0
G H I
P Q R
Y Z /
9
DE L
Enter C/Exit
Press
How t o Silence Building Signals
Alarm Silence.
How t o Reset System
System Reset.
Press to silence tone device.
Fire Control
Figure 1-1. Standalone 4100ES system
1-3
Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System
MINIPLEX configuration
Overview The MINIPLEX version of the 4100ES Fire Alarm System, which is designed for moderately larger applications than the standalone configuration, allows up to 2000 monitor and/or control points and 2000 annunciator points to be controlled by a single FACP.
Like the standalone system, only one CPU is used. Remote Unit Interface (RUI) data and power is distributed from the host panel to remote boxes called transponder cabinets. The exact system design varies, depending on whether the system is a 4100 or a 4100ES:
• 4100ES: Transponder interface cards (TICs), located in transponder cabinets, take the RUI data and power directly from the CPU motherboard and distribute it to modules nearby, thereby expanding the system’s status from standalone to MINIPLEX.
• 4100: Remote interface cards (RICs), located in transponder cabinets, take the RUI data and power from the remote unit interface (RUI) card in the host panel and distribute it to modules nearby, thereby expanding the system’s status from standalone to MINIPLEX.
System design The MINIPLEX 4100ES FACP must contain the following:
• CPU
• System Power Supply for the 4100ES (Universal Power Supply for 4100 Legacy Upgrade)
• 4100 only (non-4100ES/4100U): Remote unit interface (RUI) Card
• Optional slave cards
Each transponder cabinet, meanwhile, must contain a Transponder Interface Card (TIC) and any number of optional slave cards.
1-4
Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System
MINIPLEX configuration (continued)
RUI communication 4100ES power and data from the CPU may have to be routed over long distances in a
MINIPLEX system. An RUI line, routed from either the CPU in the 4100ES or the RUI card in the 4100ES, allows the power and data to travel longer distances. Once the RUI line terminates at a remote box, the TIC (4100ES) or RIC (4100) at that box distributes the CPU’s power and data to the remote modules.
Figure 1-2 outlines this process in a typical 4100ES MINIPLEX setup.
Risers from 4100ES to
Remote Transponders
RUI
Analog Audio
Digital Audio (DAR)
FF Telephone
Shown wired as Style 7
(Style 4 also supported)
RUI I/F
Slave
Slave
Slave
9th Floor
Transponder
Unit
RUI I/F
Slave
Slave
Slave
6th Floor
Transponder
Unit
Transponders may be located further apart (within the 2500' limit) as called for by the application requirements.
RUI I/F
Slave
Slave
Slave
3rd Floor
Transponder
Unit
4100ES
RUI Risers - 4 MAX (same channel)
(from CPU Motherboard or Remote
Unit Interface Card)
Digital Audio Riser
(from Digital Audio Controller)
Analog Audio Risers - 2MAX
(from Analog Audio Controller)
FF Telephone Riser
(from Phone Controller)
Note:
Although not shown, nested
RUI is supported up to one level deep.
Figure 1-2. MINIPLEX 4100ES system
1-5
Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System
Network configuration
Overview The 4100ES can be expanded to a network system by using network interface cards (NICs).
When a NIC is installed into a 4100ES host panel, it is used to connect to up to 98 other network nodes. Nodes may consist of other host 4100ES panels, or they may be completely different: 4010 FACPs, TrueSite ® Workstation, and Voice Command Centers (VCCs) are all examples of what could be used as nodes. A node is a self-sufficient CPU that controls appliances and devices, which also has the capability of controlling and communicating with other nodes.
The network configuration supports two prevalent architectures, or wiring configurations: hub or ring, or star. A networked system can also use a combination of the two.
Hub and star configurations
The hub configuration consists of a main loop with nodes connected in a radial manner. The star configuration consists of several nodes connected directly to one common node. Physical bridge cards are used for the star configuration. Physical bridges reduce the amount of wire that would otherwise be needed to connect all nodes in a loop, and therefore cut down on system
response time. A combination of the two styles is illustrated in Figure 1-3.
4100U Panel
Fire Control
Ring Topology
Network,
Style 7/Class A
Hub Node, 4100ES
TrueSite Workstation Star Topology
Connections
4100/4120 Panel
Fire Control
Figure 1-3. Hub/Ring configuration
1-6
Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System
Network configuration (continued)
Connection loops Network loops can be joined via physical bridge cards. There may be no more than two Style 7 network loops (two hub configurations) connected in tandem. For every two loops that are interconnected (using one physical bridge), there can be a maximum of three physical bridges
used in a star configuration. See Figure 1-4.
Remote Node
Physical Bridge Link
Fire Control Fire Control
TrueSite Workstation
Physical Bridge Links
Local Loop
Hub Node
Fire Control
Physical Bridge Link
Fire Control
Hub
Node
Remote Loop
TrueSite Workstation
Physical Bridging
(Star Configuration)
Fire Control
Fire Control
Loop 1
1
Loop 2 Loop 3
2
Up to Four Network Loops can be connected using 3 Physical Bridges
3
Loop 4
System design
Network communication
Figure 1-4. Interconnected loop configuration
To be used as a network node, a 4100ES panel must contain the following:
• CPU
• System Power Supply
• 4100 Network Interface Card
• Optional slave cards
Network communication is achieved via the 4100-6014 Network Interface Card (NIC). Each network node requires a NIC. Once the FACP is a network node, it may be programmed to be fully in control of other nodes, or to be fully passive, or anywhere in between.
Overview
This section lists all back box PIDS for the 4100ES Fire Alarm System.
1-7
Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System
4100ES Back Box PIDs
This section lists all back box PIDS for the 4100ES Fire Alarm System.
Overview
4100ES Back
Boxes
The 4100ES Back Boxes are shipped as follows:
Box and door enclosures:
2975-9441 One Bay Back Box, Glass Door and Dress Panels – Red (743-934)
2975-9442 Two-Bay Back Box, Glass Door and Dress Panel – Red (743-935)
2975-9443 Three-Bay Back Box, Glass Door and Dress Panel – Red (743-936)
2975-9444 One-Bay Back Box, Glass Door and Dress Panel – Platinum (743-937)
2975-9445 Two-Bay Back Box, Glass Door and Dress Panel – Platinum (743-938)
2975-9446 Three-Bay Back Box, Glass Door and Dress Panel – Platinum (743-939)
2975-9447 One-Bay Back Box, Solid Door and Dress Panel – Red (743-940)
2975-9448 Two-Bay Back Box, Solid Door and Dress Panel – Red (743-941)
2975-9449 Three-Bay Back Box, Solid Door and Dress Panel – Red (743-942)
2975-9450 One-Bay Back Box, Solid Door and Dress Panel – Platinum (743-943)
2975-9451 Two-Bay Back Box, Solid Door and Dress Panel – Platinum (743-944)
2975-9452 Three-Bay Back Box, Solid Door and Dress Panel – Platinum (743-945)
Doors and Dress Panels:
4100-2104 One-Bay Glass Door and Dress Panel - Platinum (743-950)
4100-2105 Two-Bay Glass Door and Dress Panel - Platinum (743-951)
4100-2106 Three-Bay Glass Door and Dress Panel - Platinum (743-952)
4100-2114 One-Bay Solid Door and Dress Panel - Platinum (743-953)
4100-2115 Two-Bay Solid Door and Dress Panel - Platinum (743-954)
4100-2116 Three-Bay Solid Door and Dress Panel - Platinum (743-955)
4100-2124 One-Bay Glass Door and Dress Panel - Red (743-956)
4100-2125 Two-Bay Glass Door and Dress Panel - Red (743-957)
4100-2126 Three-Bay Glass Door and Dress Panel - Red (743-958)
4100-2134 One-Bay Solid Door and Dress Panel - Red (743-959)
4100-2135 Two-Bay Solid Door and Dress Panel - Red (743-960)
4100-2136 Three-Bay Solid Door and Dress Panel - Red (743-961)
Back Boxes by themselves:
2975-9407 One-Bay Red Box (742-414)
2975-9408 Two-Bay Red Box (742-416)
2975-9409 Three-Bay Red Box (742-418)
2975-9438 One-Bay Back Box - Platinum (743-946)
2975-9439 Two-Bay Back Box - Platinum (743-947)
2975-9440 Three-Bay Back Box - Platinum (743-948)
Accessories:
2975-9812 Red Trim Band (742-638)
2975-9813 Semi-Flush Trim Band – Platinum (743-949)
1-8
Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System
4100ES PIDs
Overview
Basic Control
Panels (United
States)
This section lists the PIDs (model numbers) that are supported by the 4100ES Fire Alarm
System. There are two basic types of PIDs listed here:
• PIDs denoting standard installations, such as host panels containing multiple, already functioning modules
• PIDs denoting individual modules or back boxes
- offered as an after-market product for standard installations
- offered as options or aftermarket product for configured installations
The 4100ES features either a 2x40 alphanumeric display, or the multi-line LCD of the Flexible
User Interface.
Note: Software-related PIDs, such as vertical market software packages and programmer options, are not listed in this manual.
Control panels available in the U.S. that use the SPS:
• 4100-9111 2x40 Master Controller – Domestic (742-830)
4100-9114 Flexible User Interface Master Controller – Domestic (743-201)
(120 VAC 60 HZ), Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes
250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux.
Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger and 9 A Total Signal/Card
Power.
• 4100-9121 2x40 Redundant Master Controller – Domestic (742-729)
(120 VAC 60 HZ), Displays (2), CPU Cards (2), System Power Supply that includes
250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux.
Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger and 9 A Total Signal/Card
Power. Occupies two bays.
• 4100-9122 Flexible User Interface Redundant Master Controller – Domestic (743-239)
(120 VAC 60 HZ), Display, CPU Cards (2), System Power Supply that includes
250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux.
Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger and 9 A Total Signal/Card
Power. Occupies two bays.
• 4100-9131 Master Controller – Domestic (742-844)
(120 VAC 60 HZ), No Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes
250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux.
Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger and 9 A Total Signal/Card
Power.
Control panels available in the U.S. that use the EPS:
• 4100-9311 Master Controller – Domestic (743-1026)
(120VAC 50/60HZ) 2x40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel (RUI+), Power
Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points,
1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC
(127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger
(ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power,
207 Watts Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power
(6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.
Continued on the next page
1-9
Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System
4100ES PIDs (continued)
Basic Control
Panels (United
States)
• 4100-9314 Master Controller – Domestic (743-1027)
(120VAC 50/60HZ) InfoAlarm (English) Display with raised keys, CPU Card, Isolated
RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250
Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points,
3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah
Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/
Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.
• 4100-9331 Master Controller– Domestic (743-1028)
(120VAC 50/60HZ) No Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution
Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated
IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per
IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts
Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A),
System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.
Basic Control
Panels(Canada)
Control panels available in Canada that use the SPS:
• 4100-9112 2x40 Master Controller – Canadian English (742-831)/
4100-9115 Flexible User Interface Master Controller – Canadian English (743-202)
(120 VAC 60 HZ), Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes
250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux.
Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger, Battery Cutout Circuit, and 9 A Total Signal/Card Power.
• 4100-9113 2x40 Redundant Master Controller – Canadian French (742-832)/
4100-9116 Flexible User Interface Redundant Master Controller –
Canadian French (743-203)
(120 VAC 60 HZ), Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes
250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux.
Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger, Battery Cutout Circuit, and 9 A Total Signal/Card Power.
• 4100-9132 Master Controller – Canadian English (742-845)
(120 VAC 60 HZ), No Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes 250
Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux. Relay, 24
VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger, Battery Cutout Circuit, and 9 A
Total Signal/Card Power.
• 4100-9133 Master Controller – Canadian French (742-846)
(120 VAC 60 HZ), No Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes 250
Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux. Relay, 24
VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger, Battery Cutout Circuit, and 9 A
Total Signal/Card Power.
Continued on the next page
1-10
Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System
4100ES PIDs (continued)
Basic Control
Panels (Canada)
Control panels available in Canada that use the EPS:
• 4100-9312 Master Controller – Canadian English (743-1029)
(120VAC 50/60HZ) 2x40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution
Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated
IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per
IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts
Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A),
System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.
• 4100-9313 Master Controller – Canadian French (743-1030)
(120VAC 50/60HZ) 2x40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution
Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated
IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per
IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts
Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A),
System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.
• 4100-9315 Master Controller – Canadian English (743-1031)
(120VAC 50/60HZ) InfoAlarm Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power
Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points,
1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC
Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts
Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A),
System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.
• 4100-9316 Master Controller – Canadian French (743-1032)
(120VAC 50/60HZ) InfoAlarm Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power
Distribution Interface Board, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable
TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/
Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V),
54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault
Detection.
• 4100-9332 Master Controller – Canadian English (743-1033)
(120VAC 50/60HZ) No Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution
Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated
IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per
IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts
Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A),
System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.
1-11
Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System
4100ES PIDs (continued)
Basic Control
Panels
(International)
International control panels that use the SPS:
• 4100-9211 2x40 Master Controller – International (742-848)/
4100-9212 Master Controller – 220/240 V (743-204)
4100-9214 Master Controller – China 220/240V (743-765) (220/230/240 VAC 50/60 HZ),
Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3
Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux. Relay,
24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger, and 9 A Total Signal/Card Power.
• 4100-9213 Flexible User Interface Master Controller – 220/240 V (743-333)
(120 VAC 60 HZ) Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes
250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 V Aux. Relay,
24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger, and 9 A Total Signal/Card Power
• 4100-9230 Master Controller – International (742-849)
(220/230/240 VAC 50/60 HZ), No Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes
250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux.
Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger, and 9 A Total Signal/Card
Power.
International control panels that use the EPS:
• 4100-9511 Master Controller – International (743-1034)
(220/230/240VAC 50/60HZ) 2x40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power
Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points,
1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC
Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts
Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A),
System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.
• 4100-9512 Master Controller – International (743-1035)
(220/230/240VAC 50/60HZ) InfoAlarm Display (with Slide-in Labels for Language
Customization), CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board,
Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel,
189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux.
Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50
Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power
(9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth
Fault Detection.
• 4100-9513 Master Controller – International (743-1036)
(120VAC 50/60HZ) InfoAlarm Display (with Slide-in Labels for Language
Customization), CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board,
Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel,
189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux.
Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50
Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power
(9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth
Fault Detection.
• 4100-9531 Master Controller 250PTS (1 Loop) – International (743-1037)
(220/230/240VAC 50/60HZ) 2 X 40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power
Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points,
1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC
Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts
Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A),
System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection, Power Distribution Module.
1-12
Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System
4100ES PIDs (continued)
Basic Control
Panels
(International)
• 4100-9532 Master Controller 500PTS (2 Loops) - International 743-1038)
(220/230/240VAC 50/60HZ) 2 X 40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power
Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points,
1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC
Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts
Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A),
System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection, Power Distribution Module, IDNet
(4 X 5) Module.
• 4100-9533 Master Controller 750PTS (3 Loops)- International (743-1039)
(220/230/240VAC 50/60HZ) 2 X 40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power
Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points,
1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC
Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts
Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A),
System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection, Power Distribution Module, 2 IDNet
(4 X 5) Modules.
• 4100-9534 Master Controller 500PTS (5 Loops)- International (743-1040)
(220/230/240VAC 50/60HZ) 2 x 40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power
Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points,
1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC
Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts
Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A),
System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection, Power Distribution Module, IDNet
Module 250 points (4100-3107).
Transponders
Remote
Annunciator
This section lists the two transponder cabinets, both of which include an expansion bay with a power distribution interface (PDI) and a transponder interface card (TIC):
• 4100-9600 Basic Transponder (742-866). Includes a basic TIC.
• 4100-9601 Local Mode Transponder (742-867). Includes a local mode TIC.
• 4100-9610 Remote Annunciator (742-868). Includes an expansion bay with a power distribution interface (PDI) and a transponder interface card (TIC).
• 4100-9611 Remote Annunciator (743-081). Includes an expansion bay with a power distribution interface (PDI) and a transponder interface card (TIC).
1-13
Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System
4100ES PIDs (continued)
Remote Display
Assemblies
• 4100-9401 Red Flexible User Interface Remote Display Assembly - Domestic
(743-187). Includes a remote box with a Flexible User Interface display and a TIC
(566-692).
• 4100-9402 Beige Flexible User Interface Remote Display Assembly - Domestic
(743-188). Includes a remote box with a Flexible User Interface display and a TIC (566-692).
• 4100-9421 Red Flexible User Interface Remote Display Assembly – Canadian French
(743-189). Includes a remote box with a Flexible User Interface display and a TIC (566-692).
• 4100-9422 Beige Flexible User Interface Remote Display Assembly – Canadian French
(743-190). Includes a remote box with a Flexible User Interface display and a TIC
(566-692).
• 4100-9441 Red Flexible User Interface Remote Display Assembly – International
(743-191). Includes a remote box with a Flexible User Interface display and a TIC (566-692).
• 4100-9442 Beige Flexible User Interface Remote Display Assembly – International
(743-192). Includes a remote box with a Flexible User Interface display and a TIC (566-692).
Basic Audio
Selections
Utility Cabinets
This section lists the two audio cabinets, both of which include an audio expansion bay with a power distribution interface (PDI), audio controller board, and a microphone module.
• 4100-9620 Basic Audio with Microphone – Analog (742-869)
• 4100-9601 Basic Audio with Microphone – Digital (742-870)
Note: Refer to Appendix K for information about 520 Hz compatible audio components.
This section lists the two utility cabinets, which contain mounting rails for bays and mounting plates for 2120 modules.
• 4100-9642 Two-Bay Utility Cabinet Kit (for 2120 Equipment) (742-871). Includes
two-bay mounting rails and two 4100 (non-4100ES/4100U) expansion bays.
• 4100-9643 Three-Bay Utility Cabinet Kit (for 2120 Equipment) (742-872). Includes
three-bay mounting rails and three 4100 (non-4100ES/4100U) expansion bays.
Note: The rack-mount option is not Listed for security applications and cannot be used to
provide monitoring of security parts.
Master Controller
Upgrade Kits
Upgrade kits are used for retrofitting newer modules into old-style systems.
• 4100-7150 Master Controller Upgrade with 2x40 Display (old 4100 to Rev 10 or higher)
(742-592)
• 4100-7151 Master Controller Upgrade with No Display (old 4100 to Rev 10 or higher)
(742-394)
• 4100-7152 Master Controller Upgrade with 2X40 Display, operator interface and power supply (old 4100 to Rev 10 or higher) (742-922)
• 4100-7153 Flexible User Interface Display Upgrade (4100ES with 2x40 display to
Flexible User Interface display) (743-240)
• 4100-7154 Master Controller Upgrade with Flexible User Interface Display (old 4100 to
Rev 10 or higher) (743-241)
• 4100-7158 NXP Master Controller Upgrade w/o Display (Legacy 4100 to Rev 13 or higher) (743-777
• 4100-9833 Master Controller Upgrade with 2x40 Display in One-Bay Beige Enclosure
(4020) (742-804)
Note: The rack-mount option is not Listed for security applications and cannot be used to
provide monitoring of security parts.
1-14
Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System
4100ES PIDs (continued)
Rack Mount Kits • 4100-2140 Bay Mounting Kit (742-741)
• 4100-2144 PDM Mounting Kit (742-547)
Note: The rack-mount option is not Listed for security applications and cannot be used to
provide monitoring of security parts.
• 4100-0634 Power Distribution Module 120 V (742-396)
• 4100-0635 Power Distribution Module 220/230/240 V (742-513)
Power
Distribution
Modules
Expansion Bays • 4100-2300 Non-Audio Expansion Bay (742-839)
• 4100-2301 Expansion Bay Upgrade Kit (742-602)
• 4100-2320 Audio Expansion Bay (742-873)
Expansion
Battery Chargers for Basic FACPs
The expansion battery chargers listed here are used with the standard control panels listed above.
• 4081-9306 External 120 V Battery Cabinet with Charger for 110 Ah Batteries; Red (637-029)
• 4081-9308 External 220-240 V Battery Cabinet with Charger for 110 Ah Batteries; Red
(637-030)
Communication
Modules
The following communication modules can be added on to 4100ES systems.
• 4100-3102 MAPNET II Interface Module (742-696)
• 4100-3103 MAPNET Isolator Module (742-725)
• 4100-3109 IDNet 2 Card, 2 Loops (743-1442)
• 4100-3110 IDNet 2+2 Card, 4 Loops (743-1441)
• 4100-6014 Network Interface Card (NIC) (742-701)
• 4100-6030 Service Modem Module (742-584)
• 4100-6031 City Card with Disconnect (742-403)
• 4100-6032 City Card without Disconnect (742-404)
• 4100-6033 Alarm Relay Card (742-402)
• 4100-6034 Tamper Switch with IDNet IAM (742-648)
• 4100-6036 Physical Bridge (Style 4) (742-702)
• 4100-6037 Physical Bridge (Style 7) (742-703)
• 4100-6038 Dual RS-232 Interface Card (742-704)
• 4100-6039 Modem Bridge (2120) (742-705)
• 4100-6041 DC Powered FSK Modem (2120) (742-707)
• 4100-6042 Communication Line Repeater (2120) (742-708)
• 4100-6043 RS-232/ DC Comm Converter (2120) (742-709)
• 4100-6044 DC Comm/ RS-232 Converter (2120) (742-710)
• 4100-6045 Decoder Module (742-711)
• 4100-6047 Building Interface Card (743-872)
• 4100-6048 VESDA Interface Kit (742-714)
• 4100-6052 DACT (742-700)
• 4100-6054 Fiber-Optic Line Driver (2120) (742-715)
• 4100-6055 Modem Media Card (742-841)
• 4100-6056 Wired Media Card (742-619)
• 4100-6057 Fiber-Optic Media Card (742-620)
• 4100-6058 Style 7 Interface Module (DC Comm – 2120) (742-604)
• 4100-6059 Decoder Module (2120) (742-596)
• 4100-6062 TFX Interface (743-278)
Continued on the next page
1-15
Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System
4100ES PIDs (continued)
Communication
Modules
• 4100-6065 BMUX Communication Module (743-645)
• 4100-6069 BACpac Ethernet (743-747)
• 4100-6080 DACT Side Mounted (743-1041)
Power Supplies
Signaling
Modules
The power supplies listed below can be used with 4100ES systems.
• 4100-5101 Expansion Power Supply (XPS) (120 VAC) (60 Hz) (742-383)
• 4100-5102 Expansion Power Supply (XPS) (220/230/240 VAC) (50/60 Hz) (742-384)
• 4100-5103 Expansion Power Supply (XPS) (120 VAC) (60 Hz) (Canada) (742-385)
• 4100-5111 System Power Supply (SPS) (120 VAC) (60 Hz) (742-631)
• 4100-5112 System Power Supply (SPS) (220/230/240 VAC) (50/60 Hz) (742-632)
• 4100-5113 System Power Supply (SPS) (120 VAC) (60 Hz) (Canada) (742-633)
• 4100-5115 Expansion NAC Module (XNAC) (742-386)
• 4100-5120 TrueAlert Power Supply (TPS) (120 VAC) (742-659)
• 4100-5121 TrueAlert Power Supply (TPS) (120 VAC) (Canada) (742-660)
• 4100-5122 TrueAlert Power Supply (TPS) (220/230/240 VAC) (742-661)
• 4100-5124 TrueAlert Class A Adapter Module (742-662)
• 4100-5125 Remote Power Supply (RPS) (120 VAC) (742-628)
• 4100-5126 Remote Power Supply (RPS) (120 VAC) (Canada) (742-629)
• 4100-5127 Remote Power Supply (RPS) (220/230/240 VAC) (742-300)
• 4100-5152 12 V, 2 A Power Option (742-718)
• 4100-5153 13 A Utility Power Supply (24 VDC/120 VAC) (2120) (742-719)
• 4100-5154 13 A Utility Power Supply (24 VDC/240 VAC) (2120) (742-720)
• 4100-5155 8 A Expansion Power Supply with 4 A Charger 120/240 VAC (2120) (742-517)
• 4100-0156 8 VDC Converter (742-816)
• 4100-5311 120 V 50/60 Hz EPS with IDNet 2 Card
• 4100-5313 220/230/240 V 50/60 Hz EPS with IDNet 2 Card
• 4100-5325 120 V 50/60 Hz EPS
• 4100-5327 220/230/240 V 50/60Hz EPS
The signaling modules listed below can be used with 4100ES systems.
• 4100-5005 8-Zone Module (Class B) (742-655)
• 4100-5015 8-Zone Module (Class A) (742-721)
• 4100-3201 4-Relay Module (2 A) (742-722)
• 4100-3202 4-Relay Module (10 A) (742-723)
• 4100-3203 8-Relay Module (3 A) (742-724)
• 4100-3204 4-Point Relay Module (2 A) (742-948)
• 4100-3206 8-Point Relay Module (3 A) (742-949)
1-16
Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System
4100ES PIDs (continued)
Annunciator
Modules
The following annunciator modules are available for the 4100ES.
• 4100-1279 2-inch (51-mm) Blank Display Module (742-519)
• 4100-1280 8-Switch/8-LED Display Card (Red LEDs) (742-509)
• 4100-1281 8-Switch/8-LED Display Card (Yellow LEDs) (742-508)
• 4100-1282 8-Switch/16-LED Display Card (1 red / 1 yellow LED per switch) (742-408)
• 4100-1283 8-Switch/16-LED Display Card (2 yellow LEDs per switch) (742-409)
• 4100-1284 8-Switch/16-LED Display Card (1 red / 1 green LED per switch) (742-407)
• 4100-1285 16-Switch/16-LED Display Card (Red LEDs) (742-507)
• 4100-1286 Hands Off Auto (HOA) Switch Display Card (742-514)
• 4100-1287 24-Switch/24-LED Display Card (Red LEDs) (742-506)
• 4100-1288 LED/Switch Controller Card (742-410)
• 4100-1289 Expansion LED/Switch Controller Card (No mounting plate) (742-626)
• 4100-1290 24-Point Graphic I/O Module (742-726)
• 4100-1291 Remote Unit Interface Card (742-727)
• 4100-1292 Remote Command Center (742-737)
• 4100-1293 Panel-Mounted Printer (742-739)
• 4100-1294 LED/Switch Slide-In Label Kit (for up to 3 Bays) (742-863)
• 4100-1295 HOA Module (No Text) with 24 Switches and 24 Red LEDs (742-874)
Transponders and
Transponder
Components
The following is a list of transponder cabinets and components for the 4100ES.
• 4100-9600 Basic Transponder (Expansion Bay with PDI and Basic TIC) (742-866)
• 4100-9601 Local Mode Transponder (Expansion Bay with PDI and Local Mode TIC)
(742-867)
• 4100-0620 Basic Transponder Interface Card (TIC) (742-520)
• 4100-0621 Analog Audio Riser Module (742-534)
• 4100-0622 Digital Audio Riser Module (742-535)
• 4100-0625 Local Mode TIC (742-521)
• 4100-0632 Terminal Block Utility Module (742-695)
• 4100-0633 Transponder Cabinet Tamper Switch (742-738)
• 4100-1341 MCC Digital Audio Riser Module (743-850)
Audio Operator
Interfaces
The following modules are used only with the 4100U and 4100ES systems.
• 4100-1252 Audio Operator Interface – 1 Channel (742-798)
• 4100-1253 Audio Operator Interface – 1.5 Channel (742-801)
• 4100-1254 Audio Operator Interface – 2 Channel (742-799)
• 4100-1255 Audio Operator Interface – 3-8 Channel (742-800)
Audio Controller
Boards
The following audio controller boards are used with the audio operator interface.
• 4100-1210 Audio Controller Board – Analog, 1.5 Channels (742-517)
• 4100-1211 Audio Controller Board – Digital (742-387)
• 4100-1311 Audio Controller Board – Digital (743-446)
1-17
Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System
4100ES PIDs (continued)
Telephones/
Microphones
The following phone and microphone assemblies are used with audio operator interfaces.
• 4100-1270 Master Telephone with Phone Card and 3 NACs (742-865)
• 4100-1271 Remote Master Telephone (742-597)
• 4100-1243 Microphone (742-523)
• 4100-1244 Remote Microphone (742-821)
• 4100-1265 Degraded Fail-Safe Mode Microphone Pre-Amp (Master – 743-238)
• 4100-1269 Degraded Fail-Safe Mode Microphone Pre-Amp (Slave – 743-306)
Additional Audio
Modules
Optional modules for the 4100ES audio system are listed below.
Common Audio
Options
• 4100-0623 Network Audio Interface Module (742-522)
• 4100-1240 Aux Audio Input Board (742-388)
• 4100-1241 Audio Message Memory Expansion Module, 8 Minute (742-518)
• 4100-1242 Audio Message Memory Expansion Module, 32 Minute (742-393)
• 4100-1272 Telephone Expansion Card (742-600)
• 4100-1273 Class A Telephone Adapter Module (742-599)
• 4100-1274 Microphone Mux Module (743-808)
• 4100-1245 Flex 50 Expansion NAC Board with 3 Class B NACs (742-540)
• 4100-1246 Flex 50 Class A Adapter (Converts 3 on-board NACs to Class A) (742-539)
• 4100-1248 100 Watt Expansion NAC Board with 6 Class B NACs (742-524)
• 4100-1249 100 Watt Class A Adapter (Converts 6 on-board NACs to Class A) (742-543)
• 4100-1259 Constant Supervision NAC 25 VRMS with 3 Class A/B Constant Supervision
NACs (Converts 3 on-board NACs to Constant Supervision) (743-163)
• 4100-1260 Constant Supervision NAC 70 VRMS with 3 Class A/B Constant Supervision
NACs (Converts 3 on-board NACs to Constant Supervision) (743-164)
• 4100-1266 Expansion Signal Card Expansion NAC Board with 3 Class B NACs
(743-302)
• 4100-1267 Expansion Signal Card Class A Adapter (Converts 3 on-board NACs to
Class A (743-303)
• 4100-1268 Expansion Signal Card Constant Supervision NAC Adapter, 25 or 70 VRMS with 3 Class A/B Constant Supervision NACs (Converts 3 on-board NACs to Constant
Supervision) (743-304)
• 4100-5116 Expansion Signal Card with 3 Class B NACs (743-159)
Amplifiers
Note: The following amplifiers are used only in the 4100U and 4100ES systems, and are not compatible with the Constant Supervision NAC (CSNAC) option.
100 W Analog Amplifiers:
• 4100-1214 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-550)
• 4100-1215 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-551)
• 4100-1216 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (742-552)
• 4100-1217 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (742-553)
• 4100-1218 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-554)
• 4100-1219 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-555)
• 4100-1220 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-550)
• 4100-1221 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-551)
Continued on the next page
1-18
Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System
4100ES PIDs (continued)
Amplifiers • 4100-1222 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (742-552)
• 4100-1223 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (742-553)
• 4100-1224 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-554)
• 4100-1225 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-555)
100 W Digital Amplifiers (except for 4100-1230 and -1236 [95 W]):
• 4100-1228 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-544)
• 4100-1229 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-545)
• 4100-1230 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (742-546)
• 4100-1231 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (742-547)
• 4100-1232 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-548)
• 4100-1233 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-549)
• 4100-1234 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-544)
• 4100-1235 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-545)
• 4100-1236 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (742-546)
• 4100-1237 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (742-547)
• 4100-1238 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-548)
• 4100-1239 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-549)
Analog Flex Amplifiers:
• 4100-1212 Analog Flex 50 W Amp – 25 VRMS (742-794)
• 4100-1213 Analog Flex 50 W Amp – 70 VRMS (742-795)
• 4100-1261 Analog Flex 35 W Amp – 25 VRMS (743-001)
• 4100-1262 Analog Flex 35 W Amp – 70 VRMS (742-002)
Digital Flex Amplifiers:
• 4100-1226 Digital Flex 50 W Amp – 25 VRMS (742-796)
• 4100-1227 Digital Flex 50 W Amp – 70 VRMS (742-797)
• 4100-1263 Digital Flex 35 W Amp – 25 VRMS (743-003)
• 4100-1264 Digital Flex 35 W Amp – 70 VRMS (743-004)
Note: The following amplifiers are only used in the 4100U and 4100ES systems, and are compatible with the Constant Supervision NAC (CSNAC) option and 4100U Master Firmware Revision 11.08 or later.
100 W Analog Amplifiers:
• 4100-1314 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-438)
• 4100-1315 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-439)
• 4100-1316 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (743-440)
• 4100-1317 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (743-441)
• 4100-1318 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-442)
• 4100-1319 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-443)
• 4100-1320 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-438)
• 4100-1321 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-439)
• 4100-1322 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (743-440)
• 4100-1323 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (743-441)
• 4100-1324 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-442)
• 4100-1325 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-443)
Continued on the next page
1-19
Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System
4100ES PIDs (continued)
Amplifiers 100 W Digital Amplifiers:
• 4100-1328 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-449)
• 4100-1329 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-450)
• 4100-1330 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (743-451)
• 4100-1331 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (743-452)
• 4100-1332 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-453)
• 4100-1333 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-454)
• 4100-1334 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-449)
• 4100-1335 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-450)
• 4100-1336 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (743-451)
• 4100-1337 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (743-452)
• 4100-1338 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-453)
• 4100-1339 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-454)
Analog Flex Amplifiers:
• 4100-1312 Analog Flex 50 W Amp – 25 VRMS (743-436)
• 4100-1313 Analog Flex 50 W Amp – 70 VRMS (743-437)
• 4100-1361 Analog Flex 35 W Amp – 25 VRMS (743-444)
• 4100-1362 Analog Flex 35 W Amp – 70 VRMS (743-445)
Digital Flex Amplifiers:
• 4100-1326 Digital Flex 50 W Amp – 25 VRMS (743-447)
• 4100-1327 Digital Flex 50 W Amp – 70 VRMS (743-448)
• 4100-1363 Digital Flex 35 W Amp – 25 VRMS (743-455)
• 4100-1364 Digital Flex 35 W Amp – 70 VRMS (743-456)
Miscellaneous
Modules
The following modules are for 4100ES systems:
• 4100-0650 Battery Shelf (for 50 Ah batteries) (742-840)
• 4100-0640 Memory Add-On Module for Flexible User Interface (743-279)
• 4100-5128 Battery Distribution Terminal Module (742-843)
• 4100-9854 4100U/4100ES Module Legacy Bay Mounting Kit (743-856)
1-20
Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System
4100 PIDs (non-4100ES/4100U)
Overview This section lists the 4100, non-4100ES/4100U, PIDs that are supported by the 4100ES Fire
Alarm System (in retrofit applications). There are two basic types of PIDs listed here:
• PIDs denoting standard installations, such as host panels containing multiple, already functioning modules
• PIDs denoting individual modules or back boxes:
- offered as after-market product for standard installations
- offered as options or aftermarket product for configured installations
Note: Software-related PIDs, such as vertical market software packages and programmer options, are not listed in this book.
System Types and Options
There are six standard types of 4100 control panels used with the 4100. A PID identifies each system type. These PIDs are combined with the more specific PIDs listed after this topic to meet the requirements of custom installations:
• 4100-8001 Fire Alarm Control Panel
• 4100-8002 Remote Annunciator Panel
• 4100-8010 MINIPLEX Fire Alarm Control Panel
• 4100-8019 MINIPLEX Fire Alarm Control Panel with Transponder
• 4100-8201 Fire Alarm Control Panel with Audio
• 4100-8210 MINIPLEX Fire Alarm Control Panel with Audio
• 4100-8901/8909 Add-On to Existing System or Annunciator
• 4100-6050/6051 Power Limited Panel/Non-Power Limited Panel
Master Controller
Option Module
4100-6001 240 VAC Controller Power Input
1-21
4100 PIDs (Non-4100ES/4100U) (continued)
Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System
NAC Modules Notification appliance circuit (NAC) modules are listed below.
• 4100-4001 2-Circuit (Style Y)
• 4100-4011 2-Circuit (Style Z)
• 4100-4321 6-Circuit (Style Y)
• 4100-4331 6-Circuit (Style Z)
IDC Modules Initiating device circuit (IDC) modules are listed below.
See 579-832 for 2-Wire Detector Compatibility Chart.
• 4100-5004 8-Zone (Style B)
• 4100-5014 8-Zone (Style D)
Optional Modules Miscellaneous optional modules are listed below.
• 4100-0104 Additional Battery Charger (120 V)
• 4100-0105 5 A Power Supply (120 V; Non-Power Limited)
• 4100-0108 Expansion 8 A Power Supply (Non-Power Limited)
• 4100-0110 MAPNET II Addressable Module
• 4100-0111 MAPNET II Isolator Module
• 4100-0113 Dual RS-232 Module
• 4100-0114 Additional Battery Charger (240 V)
• 4100-0115 5 A Power Supply (240 V; Non-Power Limited)
• 4100-0117 MINIPLEX 8 A Remote Power Supply (Power Limited)
• 4100-0118 8 A Power Supply (240 V; Non-Power Limited)
• 4100-0119 2 A Converter (12 VDC; Non-Power Limited)
• 4100-0123 2120 Communications Module (Style 7)
• 4100-0124 Enhanced Charger Package
• 4100-0129 25.5 V Limiter Module
• 4100-0136 Decoder Module
• 4100-0137 RS-232 Module for 2120 Communications (Style 7)
• 4100-0139 Service Modem
• 4100-0153 Contact Closure DACT
• 4100-0154 VESDA Interface (Aftermarket Only)
• 4100-0155 Serial DACT
• 4100-0304 Remote Unit Interface (RUI) Module (Style 7)
• 4100-0451 Panel-Mounted Printer
• 4100-0540 4-20 mA ZAM Modules (2 per plate)
• 4100-1108 8 A Power Supply (120 VAC; Power Limited)
Auxiliary Relay
Controls
The following modules are auxiliary relay controls.
• 4100-3001 4-Relay, 2 A (with feedback)
• 4100-3002 4-Relay, 10 A (with feedback)
• 4100-3003 8-Relay, 3 A (with feedback)
1-22
4100 PIDs (Non-4100ES/4100U) (continued)
Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System
Audio Controllers and Amplifiers
The following modules can be used in 4100ES Upgrade/Retrofit applications, but cannot be used with 4100ES audio modules.
• 4100-0210 Single-Channel Audio Controller Board
• 4100-0211 Dual-Channel Audio Controller Board
• 4100-0212 Triple-Channel Audio Controller Board
• 4100-0201 25 VRMS/25 W Audio Amplifier (no Power Supply; Power Limited)
• 4100-0202 25 VRMS/Dual 25 W Audio Amplifier (with Power Supply; Power Limited)
• 4100-1203 25 VRMS/100 W Audio Amplifier (120 VAC; Power Limited)
• 4100-0203 25 VRMS/100 W Audio Amplifier (120 VAC; Non-Power Limited)
• 4100-0213 25 VRMS/100 W Audio Amplifier (240 VAC; Non-Power Limited)
• 4100-0207 70 VRMS/100 W Audio Amplifier (120 VAC; Non-Power Limited)
• 4100-0217 70 VRMS/100 W Audio Amplifier (240 VAC; Non-Power Limited)
• 4100-1207 70 VRMS/90 W Audio Amplifier (120 VAC; Power Limited)
Audio Options The following options can be used in 4100ES Retrofit/Upgrade systems with 4100 Back
Boxes.
• 4100-0204 Microphone and Enclosure
• 4100-0205 Master Telephone
• 4100-0206 Redundant Tone Generator
• 4100-0215 Phone Riser Terminal Block
Annunciation
Modules
• 4100-0301 64/64 LED/Switch Controller
• 4100-0302 24-Point I/O Graphic Interface
• 4100-0401 8-LED Display Card (Red Led)
• 4100-0402 16-Point Display Card (Red/Yellow LEDs)
• 4100-0403 8-Switch/8-LED Display Card (Momentary switches; red LEDs)
• 4100-0404 8-Switch/16-LED Display Card (Maintained switches; one red and one green
LED per switch)
• 4100-0405 8-Switch/16-LED Display Card (Maintained switches; one red and one yellow
LED per switch)
• 4100-0408 8-Switch/8-LED Annunciator Control Switch Module
• 4100-0450 Remote Panel LCD
1-23
4100 PIDs (Non-4100ES/4100U) (continued)
Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System
Miscellaneous
Modules
• 4100-0133 Tamper Switch
• 4100-1010 External Battery Power and Charger
Network Modules The following modules are intended to be used in a networked 4100 system.
• 4120-6014 Modular Interface Board
• 4120-6023 Physical Bridge (Style 4)
• 4120-6024 Physical Bridge (Style 7)
• 4120-0142 Wired Media Card
• 4120-0143 Fiber-Optic Media Card
• 4120-0144 Modem Media Card
• 4120-0156 8 VDC Module (provides 3 A from 28 V tap)
System
Accessories
• 2080-9047 DACT Communication Cable (14 feet [4 meters]) (733-913)
• 2081-9031 Potted Module for PVCS (740-688)
• 2081-9272 Batteries (6.2 Ah) (112-112)*
• 2081-9274 Batteries (10 Ah) (112-113)*
• 2081-9275 Batteries (18.8 Ah) (112-046)*
• 2081-9276 Batteries (33 Ah) (112-053)*
• 2081-9279 Batteries (110 Ah) (112-123)*
• 2081-9287 Batteries (25 Ah) (112-134)*
• 2081-9288 Batteries (12.7 Ah) (112-133)*
• 2081-9296 Batteries (50 Ah) (112-136)*
• 4190-9803 Replacement Paper for 4100-0451 Panel-Mounted Printer (473-019)
*Or the equivalent.
1-24
Introduction
Chapter 2
Installing FACP Components
This chapter describes installation procedures that apply directly to the Fire Alarm Control
Panel (FACP) as well as each step of the host panel installation for both the FACP SPS and the
EPS CPU configurations. Before beginning the installation, review the next few pages to get a sense of the types of bays and modules that make up the FACP.
IMPORTANT : Verify FACP System Programmer, Executive, and Slave
Software compatibility when installing, or replacing system components. Refer to the Technical Support Information and
Downloads website for compatibility information.
In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic
Step 2. Mounting the System Electronics
Step 3. Trim Kit Application (optional)
Step 5. Installing Motherboards into the CPU Bay
Step 6. Installing Modules into Expansion Bays
Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays
Step 9. Installing and Removing Batteries
Step 10. System Power Up and Power Down Procedures
The Terminal Block Utility Module
Page
2-1
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Introduction to the FACP
Overview 4100 FACPs are back boxes that contain the CPU, operator interface, FACP power supply, the power distribution module, the power distribution interface, backup batteries, and any additional modules that the panel requires.
The FACP is the central hub (often referred to as a host panel) of a standalone or MINIPLEX fire alarm system. In a networked system, the FACP can be connected to other system FACPs, so that each host panel is a node on the network.
CPU Bay Every FACP contains a CPU bay. The CPU bay is equipped with:
• 1 FACP power supply module.
• 1 RUI+ CPU Master Motherboard:
- In a standalone or MINIPLEX system the CPU motherboard is supplied with a master controller daughter card attached to it.
- In a networked system a network interface card (NIC) is attached as a second daughter card to the master motherboard
• 1 Power Distribution Interface (PDI) (EPS configuration only):
- There are eight 2-inch slots on the PDI. Slots 1 and 2 are used for aftermarket boards. Slots 3 to 8 are taken up by the FACP Power Supply and the CPU Master
Motherboard.
Table 2-1. CPU Components
Configuration
SPS CPU
EPS CPU
PDI Card
-
8 slots
Master Motherboard Card
RUI+ CPU Master
Motherboard 566-938
FACP Power
Supply
SPS
EPS
D i s a s s e m b l e d C P U B a y S i d e - V i e w
CPU M s r
M o h e b o a d
C P U B a y F r o n t - V i e w w i t h O p t i o n a l 2 ” M o t h e r b o a r d C a r d s
S l o t 1 S l o t 2 S l o t 3 S l o t 4 S o t 5 S o t 6 S o t 7 S l o t 8
P 6
1 2 3
P o r 1
L E D 1
L E D 2
L E D 3
L E D 4
P D I
CPU Master
Daughter Card
F C P w r S p p y
(EPS with IDNet 2 card depicted)
P
I w e r r a
D s i b t o
P D )
(EPS Configuration only)
1 2 3
X
L +
M T
R S R V D
S
L
R C V
G N D
C T S
0 V 2
G N D
E Z O 2 C R S V D p o a l
2 M o h r o r d
CPU Master
M t e r a r
C a s s
P w r S p p y
Figure 2-1. The CPU Bay
2-2
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
SPS CPU Bay Overview
RUI+ Master
Motherboard
The 4100 Master motherboard has two slots, one is dedicated for the system CPU and The other slot is typically used for 4120 Network or RS232 cards. The first RUI channel in the system is the master motherboard. The RUI+ feature on this card provides electrically-isolated power for the RUI channel, giving it greater immunity to crosstalk from other channels.
The card is installed on the PDI, occupying the space next to the power supply.
Network Wired
Media/RS-232
Terminal Block
RUI Terminal
Block
RS-232/Network
Switch Card Port 1
Earth Fault connection to power supply
(EPS only)
RUI Trouble LEDs
RUI Earth
Fault LEDs
10POS female
COMM
10POS female
PDI Connector
(on back)
Power
Network/RS232 Slot
J5 J7
CPU Slot
RUI Isolation
Jumpers - See Note
Power/COMMS to
Adjacent Bay
RS-232/Network
Switch
Card Port 2
Network Wired
Media/RS-232
Terminal Block
Figure 2-2. RUI+ CPU Master Motherboard (566-938)
Note: If the RUI+ Master Motherboard is used to connect to a 4602-6001 (SCU) or 4602-7001 (RCU) move the P5 and P6 jumpers to the RUI NON ISO position.
2-3
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
SPS CPU Bay Overview (continued)
Master Controller
Daughter Card
(566-719)
The master controller daughter card mounts onto the master motherboard. The master controller daughter card contains a service port, a direct drive user interface connection, and a port for a service modem.
COMM JUMPER (P1)
SERVICE PORT
SERVICE MODEM
CONNECTOR (P4)
MODEM
2
COMPACT FLASH
Used for alternative job/ exec storage (card does not “run” out of compact flash)
CPU BOOTLOADER
LEDs (LED A – LED D)
CONNECTOR TO CPU
MOTHERBOARD (P9)
RESET LED (LED1)
ON: CPU is in reset. If LED is flashing, board is unable to come out of reset.
Possibly corrupt CFIG or board needs to be replaced.
OFF: CPU is running normally.
SERVICE PORT (P5)
BATTERY BACKUP
ON/ OFF JUMPER (P3)
ETHERNET CONNECTOR
(J1) RJ45 TYPE
RESET (WARM START)
SWITCH (SW1)
Battery
DIRECT-DRIVE
DISPLAY PORT (P6)
SWAP CFIG JUMPER (P15)
INSERT JUMPER DURING
BOOT FOR CFIG SWAP
COLD START SWITCH (SW2)
HOLD DURING BOOT FOR
COLD START
Figure 2-3. Master Controller Daughter Card (566-719)
2-4
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
SPS CPU Bay Overview (continued)
Master Controller
Daughter Card
LEDs
The master controller daughter card LEDs indicate the card status as shown in Table 2-2.
These LEDs show diagnostic status for internal RandD use.
Table 2-2. Master Controller Bootloader LEDs
Status Condition LED D LED C LED B
Bootloader Initialization On (0.25s), On (0.25s), On (0.25s),
Off (0.25s) Off (0.25s)
On Off
Off (0.25s)
Off Bad Master CRC or No
Master Present
Diagnostic Fail - RAM
Diagnostic Fail -Bootloader
CRC
Downloading Master
Downloading CFIG
On
On
Downloading MsgLib
Downloading Bootloader
Download Successful
On
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
LED A
On (0.25s),
Off (0.25s)
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Master Controller
Switches
Switch
Reset (Warm Start)
(0566-719 only)
Table 2-3. Master Controller Switches
Description
Short press (< 3 seconds) to activate a software controlled reset (warm start).
Press and hold (> 3 seconds) to force a hardware reset (also a warm start).
Generally unless the CPU card appears to be locked up you should always use the software controlled reset.
Reset (Warm Start)
(other than 0566-719
Cards)
CFIG Swap
(0566-719 only)
Cold Start
(0566-719 only)
A warm start preserves the logs and the disabled status of any points that are in the disabled state.
Press (any duration) to cause a warm start. A warm start preserves the logs and the disabled status of any points that are in the disabled state.
During startup, insert a jumper to revert to the alternate
(previous) CFIG. Remove the jumper after the system reboots and CFIG swap are complete. If you are using an older revision of the CPU card, press and hold this button.
This is used if the current CFIG is corrupt or for troubleshooting the system.
Note: You will get a "Using previous CFIG" trouble in the system.
This trouble will not clear until a new CFIG is downloaded or you swap back to the original CFIG.
During startup, press and hold this button to clear all history logs and enable any points that were previously disabled.
2-5
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
SPS CPU Bay Overview (continued)
System Power
Supply (SPS)
The SPS is the power source for the CPU. The SPS provides 24 VDC card power to the CPU motherboard, which is distributed to other bays up to 2A capacity.
The SPS provides voltage and current information to the CPU card, which can then be displayed at the user interface. The SPS provides an IDNet channel that supports initiating devices and some notification appliances, such as the 4009-9201/9301 Audio NAC Extender.
The SPS also has three on-board NACs that support reverse polarity or SmartSync supervision.
Auxiliary power, relay, and city circuit/relay module functions are also supported.
The SPS performs standard fire alarm functions, such as brownout detect, battery transfer, battery recharge, earth fault detection, and power limiting per UL 864.
Figure 2-4 is an illustration of the SPS.
IDNET TERMINAL BLOCK (TB1) NAC TERMINAL BLOCK (TB2)
POWER/COMM TO
CPU MOTHERBOARD (P6)
IDNET SHIELD SWITCH
(P2)
CITY/RELAY CARD
TROUBLE INDICATION
SWITCH (P3)
LEGACY POWER/COMM TO
CPU
MOTHERBOARD
(P8)
DEVICE ADDRESS
SWITCH (SW1)
AUXILIARY RELAY
TERMINAL BLOCK
(TB4)
AUXILIARY POWER
TERMINAL BLOCK
(TB3)
BATTERY
CONNECTORS:
P4
P5
CITY CARD
CONNECTOR (P7)
CITY / RELAY CARD
MOUNTING AREA
EARTH
FAULT
MONITOR
SWITCH (P1)
AC
CONNECTOR
(bulkhead connector on steel plate)
Figure 2-4. System Power Supply (566-071)
2-6
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
EPS CPU Bay Overview
The Power
Distribution
Interface
In the CPU bay and the expansion bays, power and data are distributed via the PDI. The PDI is a wiring board with eight card slots, each of which can accommodate a 4 x 5 slave card. If legacy motherboards are used, they must be mounted above the PDI using metal standoffs.
Note: Power source jumpers P4 and P5 must be placed in position 2-3 (to the right) for proper operation of an EPS CPU bay.
POWER/COMMS
CONNECTORS
(P1-P3)
POWER SOURCE
JUMPERS
(P4, P5)
4100 POWER DISTRIBUTION INTERFACE
ASSY 566-084
AUDIO INTERFACE CONNECTORS (P6, P7)
Figure 2-5. The Power Distribution Interface (PDI)
RUI+ Master
Motherboard
The 4100 Master motherboard has two slots, one is dedicated for the system CPU and The other slot is typically used for 4120 Network or RS232 cards. The first RUI channel in the system is the master motherboard. The RUI+ feature on this card provides electrically-isolated power for the RUI channel, giving it greater immunity to crosstalk from other channels.
The card is installed on the PDI, occupying the space next to the power supply.
Network Wired
Media/RS-232
Terminal Block
RUI Terminal
Block
RS-232/Network
Switch Card Port 1
Earth Fault connection to power supply
(EPS only)
RUI Trouble LEDs
RUI Earth
Fault LEDs
10POS female
COMM
10POS female
PDI Connector
(on back)
Power
Network/RS232 Slot
J5 J7
CPU Slot
RUI Isolation
Jumpers - See Note
Power/COMMS to
Adjacent Bay
RS-232/Network
Switch
Card Port 2
Network Wired
Media/RS-232
Terminal Block
Figure 2-6. RUI+ CPU Master Motherboard (566-938)
Note: If the RUI+ Master Motherboard is used to connect to a 4602-6001 (SCU) or 4602-7001 (RCU) move the P5 and P6 jumpers to the RUI NON ISO position.
2-7
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Master Controller
Daughter Card
(566-719)
The master controller daughter card mounts onto the master motherboard. The master controller daughter card contains a service port, a direct drive user interface connection, and a port for a service modem.
COMM JUMPER (P1)
SERVICE PORT
SERVICE MODEM
CONNECTOR (P4)
MODEM
2
COMPACT FLASH
Used for alternative job/ exec storage (card does not “run” out of compact flash)
CPU BOOTLOADER
LEDs (LED A – LED D)
CONNECTOR TO CPU
MOTHERBOARD (P9)
RESET LED (LED1)
ON: CPU is in reset. If LED is flashing, board is unable to come out of reset.
Possibly corrupt CFIG or board needs to be replaced.
OFF: CPU is running normally.
SERVICE PORT (P5)
BATTERY BACKUP
ON/ OFF JUMPER (P3)
ETHERNET CONNECTOR
(J1) RJ45 TYPE
RESET (WARM START)
SWITCH (SW1)
Battery
DIRECT-DRIVE
DISPLAY PORT (P6)
SWAP CFIG JUMPER (P15)
INSERT JUMPER DURING
BOOT FOR CFIG SWAP
COLD START SWITCH (SW2)
HOLD DURING BOOT FOR
COLD START
Figure 2-7. Master Controller Daughter Card (566-719)
2-8
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
EPS CPU Bay Overview (continued)
Master Controller
Daughter Card
LEDs
The master controller daughter card LEDs indicate the card status as shown in Table 2-4.
These LEDs show diagnostic status for internal RandD use.
Table 2-4. Master Controller Bootloader LEDs
Status Condition LED D LED C LED B
Bootloader Initialization On (0.25s), On (0.25s), On (0.25s),
Off (0.25s) Off (0.25s)
On Off
Off (0.25s)
Off Bad Master CRC or No
Master Present
Diagnostic Fail - RAM
Diagnostic Fail -Bootloader
CRC
Downloading Master
Downloading CFIG
On
On
Downloading MsgLib
Downloading Bootloader
Download Successful
On
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
LED A
On (0.25s),
Off (0.25s)
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Master Controller
Daughter Card
Switches
Switch
Reset (Warm Start)
(0566-719 only)
Table 2-5. Master Controller Switches
Description
Short press (< 3 seconds) to activate a software controlled reset (warm start).
Press and hold (> 3 seconds) to force a hardware reset (also a warm start).
Generally unless the CPU card appears to be locked up you should always use the software controlled reset.
Reset (Warm Start)
(other than 0566-719
Cards)
CFIG Swap
(0566-719 only)
A warm start preserves the logs and the disabled status of any points that are in the disabled state.
Press (any duration) to cause a warm start. A warm start preserves the logs and the disabled status of any points that are in the disabled state.
During startup, insert a jumper to revert to the alternate
(previous) CFIG. Remove the jumper after the system reboots and CFIG swap are complete. If you are using an older revision of the CPU card, press and hold this button.
This is used if the current CFIG is corrupt or for troubleshooting the system.
Cold Start
(0566-719 only)
Note: You will get a "Using previous CFIG" trouble in the system.
This trouble will not clear until a new CFIG is downloaded or you swap back to the original CFIG.
During startup, press and hold this button to clear all history logs and enable any points that were previously disabled.
2-9
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
EPS CPU Bay Overview (continued)
Extended Power
Supply with
IDNet 2
The EPS with IDNet 2 is the power source for the CPU and the host cabinet. The EPS provides
24 VDC card power to the CPU motherboard.
The EPS provides voltage and current information to the CPU card, which can then be displayed at the user interface. The IDNet 2 card on the EPS provides one IDNet channel that supports initiating devices and some notification appliances, such as the 4009-9201/9301
Audio NAC Extender.
Auxiliary power, relay, and city circuit/relay module functions are also supported.
The EPS performs standard fire alarm functions, such as brownout detect, battery transfer, battery recharge, earth fault detection, and power limiting in accordance with UL 864.
Figure 2-8 is an illustration of the EPS. See Figure 2-9 for the IDNet 2 card.
)$.!# )$.!# )$.!# !58
Auxiliary/
NAC
IDNAC
Terminals
LEDs
Trouble Scroll
Button
Address
Switch
RUI+ Earth
Detect
A
B
C
D
E
CH1
CH2
CH3
COM
IDNET 2
4 Pin Harness
Card Power /
Comms
Connection to PDI
IDNet 2
Card
Battery Disconect
Jumper
Connection to Bridge
Connection to
Batterries
AA+ B-
LOOP 2
B+ AA+ B-
LOOP 1
B+
City Card Connection Earth Detect Jumper
Figure 2-8. EPS with IDNet 2 (566-872)
Continued on the next page
2-10
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
EPS CPU Bay Overview (continued)
Extended Power
Supply with
IDNet 2
The 4100-3109 IDNet 2 is a slave card that provides the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) with an isolated IDNet channel which contains two isolated loops.
This card is compatible with IDNet communicating initiating devices and allows the system
CPU to communicate with up to 250 peripheral devices, such as smoke detectors and pull stations.
PDI Connector (P5)
IDNET 2
LEDs
Address
Dip Switch
(SW1)
Loop 2
Class A/B
Jumper (P2)
AA+ B-
LOOP 2
B+ AA+ B-
LOOP 1
B+
IDNet Terminal Block (TB1)
Figure 2-9. IDNet 2 Card
Loop 1
Class A/B
Jumper (P1)
2-11
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
FACP Operator Interface
Operator Interface The following images show the two operator interfaces which are available with the 4100ES.
The Operator Interface is used to obtain alarm, supervisory, trouble and other status via the
Liquid Crystal Display and LEDs. Control functions are accessed using dedicated and
user-programmable keys.
includes a multi-line Liquid Crystal Display, which can display more information
simultaneously.
Figure 2-10. Operator Interface
Figure 2-11. Flexible User Interface
2-12
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
FACP Expansion Bays
Additional CPU
Bay Modules
4100-6030 Service Modem Card. CPU mezzanine card. Provides a connection to remote PCs for diagnostics and programming purposes.
4100-6031 City Card with Disconnect. FACP power supply mezzanine card. Provides two
UL-listed city connections to the municipal fire department or other remote supervising station.
Contains a hardware disconnect switch to allow for testing without alerting the remote station.
4100-6032 City Card. FACP power supply mezzanine card. Same as the 4100-6031, but without the disconnect and testing option.
4100-6033 Alarm Relay Card. FACP power supply mezzanine card.
4100-6014 Modular Network Interface Card (NIC). A daughter card that mounts to the
CPU motherboard. Performs 4100 networking operations. May be installed with the 4100-6056
Wired Media Card, the 4100-6057 Fiber Media Card, and/or the 4100-6055 Modem Media
Card.
Expansion Bays An FACP always has one CPU bay, but it may have one or two expansion bays as well.
Expansion bays contain a variety of additional modules that the system might require.
MASTER
CONTROLLER BAY
(always on top)
TWO-BAY
CABINET
Figure 2-12. Expansion Bays
EXPANSION
BAY
2-13
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
FACP Power Requirements
System Power The FACP is powered primarily by the FACP power supply, which in turn gets its power from the power distribution module (PDM). The AC branch circuit and the standby battery connect to the PDM. AC and battery power are then distributed to power modules from the PDM via harness.
In expansion bays, the PDM may connect to the following: a secondary system power supply
(SPS)*, an extended power supply (EPS) a remote power supply (RPS), an expansion power supply (XPS), or a 100 W Amplifier.
Note: *The 4100-5111/5112/5113 SPS is available for expansion bays only.
SPS
INCOMING
AC POWER
AC
BTRY
XPS
BTRY
AC
XPS
BTRY
AC
PDM
SPS = System Power Supply
XPS = Expansion Power Supply
PDM = Power Distribution Module
BATTERY BATTERY
Figure 2-13 System Power
IMPORTANT: AC power must be provided to the 4100ES from a dedicated branch circuit.
Power
Requirements
EPS
SPS/XPS/RPS/TPS/
100W Amplifier
Table 2-6. Power Requirements
120V, 50/60 Hz, 4.6A each
220/230/240 V, 50/60 Hz, 2.3 A each
120V, 60 Hz, 4A each
220/230/240V, 50/60 Hz, 2A each
2-14
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 1. Mounting Back Boxes
Overview Three different sizes of system back boxes are available, accommodating one, two, or three electronics bays. These back boxes are shipped in large containers separate from the system electronics. If system electronics containers are shipped with the back box containers, store the system electronics containers in a safe, clean, and dry location until the back box installation is completed, and you are ready to install the system electronic bays.
Note:
• Conductor entrance and routing restrictions apply to power-limited systems only.
•
All back box PIDs are listed in Chapter 1.
Specifications Table 2-7 lists the specifications for the back boxes.
Table 2-7. Back Box Specifications
PID
Number
Description
Size Weight
2975-9410/9407/
9438
2975-9411/9408/
9439
2975-9412/9409/
9440
1 Bay 55 lb.
(25 kg)
2 Bay 125 lb.
(57 kg)
3 Bay 185 lb.
(84 kg)
Height
Box
20-¾ in.
(527 mm)
36-¼ in.
(921 mm)
52-
1
/
8 in.
(1,324 mm)
Trim
23-½ in.
(597 mm)
39-
1
/
8 in.
(994 mm)
55 in.
(1,397 mm)
Door
26-
3
/
8 in.
(670 mm)
26-
3
/
8 in.
(670 mm)
26-
3
/
8 in.
(670 mm)
Width
Box
26-
3
/
8 in.
(670 mm)
25-¾ in.
(654 mm)
25-¾ in.
(654 mm)
Rough Opening
Height
21-¼ in.
(540 mm)
36-¾ in.
(933 mm)
52
5
/
8 in.
(1,337 mm)
Width
26 ¼ in.
(667 mm)
26 ¼ in.
(667 mm)
26 ¼ in.
(667 mm)
Make sure that you have the necessary hardware before you begin the installation procedure.
The Back Box Bay Mounting Hardware Kit should have all of the items listed in Table 2-8.
Part Number
268-010
490-011
426-033
Table 2-8. Contents of the Back Box Bay Mounting Hardware Kit
Description
Lockwasher (No. 8)
Washer
Screw (No. 8 Torx, 5/16 in.)
Quantity Per Back Box
4
4
4
1-Bay Box 2-Bay Box
8
8
8
3-Bay Box
12
12
12
2-15
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 1. Mounting Back Boxes (continued)
Mounting the
Back Boxes
Mount the back box as shown in Figure 2-14. Use the holes in the back box to secure it to the
wall.
• For mounting to a wooden wall structure, the back box must be attached with
four 3/8-inch-diameter x 1-½-inch-long (9.5 mm x 38 mm) fasteners and four 3/8-inchdiameter (9.5 mm) washers.
• For surface mounting, secure the box to the wall using the tear-drop mounting holes on the back surface.
• For semi-flush mounting, secure the box to the wall studs using the knockouts on the sides of the box. Note that the front surface of the back box must protrude at least ½ inch
(sheet metal door) or 3 inches (plastic door) from the finished wall surface.
IMPORTANT: Power-limited systems have back box entrance and routing restrictions for field wiring. Do not locate power-limited wiring in
the shaded areas of the back box shown in Figure 2-14. These
areas are reserved for non power-limited circuitry such as AC power, batteries, and the city connection.
ALIGNMENT MARKERS
FOR WALL STUDS:
6” (152 mm)
4” (102 mm)
6 29/32”
(175 mm)
PANEL
FRONT
24”
(610 mm)
T O P
16”
(406 mm)
T O P
22”
(559 mm)
(ONE
BAY)
USE 4 HOLES TO
SECURE BACKBOX
TO THE WALL
USE 4 HOLES TO
SECURE BACKBOX
TO THE WALL
3 17/32”
(90 mm)
5 17/32”
(140 mm)
RESERVED
FOR
BATTERIES
(SEE NOTE 6)
ADDITIONAL
BACK BOX
See Notes 3 and 5
Figure 2-14. Back Box Installation Diagram
1. Dimensions shown are typical for all surface and semi-flush installations.
2. Use suitable punch when conduit is required.
Knockouts are not provided. Locate and create
on-site as required during installation.
3. A minimum clearance of 5 inches (127mm) from the hinge side is required to provide a maximum door opening of 90 degrees.
4. Do not install any power-limited wiring in the shaded area of the back box as shown in
Figure 2-14. This area is reserved for non power-
limited devices and circuits (for example, AC power, batteries, and city circuits). The non powerlimited area is determined by the internal barriers, but is always below and to the right of these barriers.
5. Minimum distance between boxes is 3 ¼ inches
(83 mm). Maximum distance between boxes is
10 inches (254 mm).
2-16
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 1. Mounting Back Boxes (continued)
Back Box side views
Side view with plastic door attached Side view with metal door attached
11-11/16"
(297 mm)
8 - 5 /16"
(211 mm)
Figure 2-15. Height off the wall for Back Box and doors (plastic and metal)
2-17
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 2. Mounting the System Electronics
Overview This section describes the process for removing the CPU and equipment bays that come with the system modules from their shipping container and installing them into the mounted back boxes.
Mounting guidelines:
• The CPU bay must be installed in the top bay of the enclosure.
• Expansion bays mount in any bay area within an enclosure.
• Expansion bays mount in a 19” E.I.A rack console using an adapter kit.
Mounting the
System Electronics
Bays
Perform the following procedure to install the system electronics bays:
1. Disconnect the 734-008 Harness from P1 on the Power Distribution Interface (PDI).
2. Remove everything from the electronics shipping container, and set the screws aside.
3. Remove the shipping studs that secure the bays to the shipping container.
Figure 2-16. Removing the Shipping Studs
Continued on the next page
2-18
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 2. Mounting the System Electronics (continued)
Mounting the
System Electronics
Bay
4. Mount the power distribution module (PDM) to the back box as shown in Figure 2-17.
Securely tighten all mounting screws. Refer to Table 2-9 for the recommended torque.
Table 2-9. Recommended Torque for Mounting Hardware
Screw / Nut Size Recommended Torque
No. 6
No. 8
No. 10
7.9 to 8.7 inch/ounces (569 to 626 cm/grams)
16.1 to 17.8 inch/ounces (1 159 to 1 282 cm/grams)
26.8 to 29.7 inch/ounces (1 930 to 2 139 cm/grams)
CABINET
STANDOFF
Use spacers to secure
PDM to cabinet
PDM
COVER
TAMPER SWITCH
MOUNTING STUDS
PDM
MOUNTING
AREA
INSULATOR
PDM
CONNECTORS
Figure 2-17. Mounting the PDM Bracket (2-Bay Box Shown)
5. If provided, mount the tamper switch assembly to the mounting studs as shown in
Figure 2-17. Refer to 4100-Series Tamper Switch Installation Instructions (579-195).
6. Using the hardware provided with the back box, insert the required number of mounting
screws to the right and left support holes in the back box as shown in Figure 2-18.
7. Tighten the mounting screws.
Note: Install the mounting screws to within 1/8" from the seated position.
Continued on the next page
2-19
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 2. Mounting the System Electronics (continued)
Mounting the
System Electronic
Bay
8. Mount the system electronics bay assemblies in the back box by carefully placing the
assembly onto the four extended screws in the back box, allowing the electronics bay
assembly to hang from the screws.
9. Securely tighten all mounting screws. Refer to Table 2-9 for the recommended torque.
Figure 2-18. Installing the System Electronics Bay Assembly
At this point, the system is ready for system card installation. For information on card installation, refer to the Panels’ installation manual .
IMPORTANT: Do not apply power to the system at this time.
2-20
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 3. Trim Kit Application (optional)
Trim Kit Content Trim Kits are used to cosmetically cover wall openings when boxes are mounted semi-flush into the wall. The kit includes:
• Two top trim bands (shorter)
• Two side trim bands (longer)
• Four corner pieces.
Top Trim Bands (x2)
Corner Pieces (x4)
Side Trim Bands (x2)
Figure 2-19. Semi-Flush Trim Kit
Trim Application After the back box is mounted to the wall, attach the trim in accordance with the following procedure:
1. Hold the top strip against the top of the back box.
2. Centered the strip on the box width, and mark the end locations (the top bands are approximately
1" (25 mm) shorter than the box width). Peel off the adhesive tape release, align it with the marks and press down to assure adhesion.
3. Place the second top strip beneath the back box and repeat step 2.
4. The side bands are sized for the 3-bay box, they must be re-sized for use with 1 and 2 bay boxes.
• For use with a 3-bay box: align, mark, and attach as was done for the top and bottom bands.
Semi-Flush
Mounted
BACK BOX
• For use with a 1-bay or 2-bay boxes, cut the bands approximately 1" (25mm) shorter than the box height (1-bay boxes are 22" (559 mm) high,
2-bay boxes are 40" (1016 mm) high). Carefully cut them to length using a hacksaw or sharp utility knife.
5. Attach the cut bands using the same procedure as the top and bottom bands.
6. Each corner piece overlaps the trim strip slightly less than 3/4" (19mm). Align the corner pieces tight to the box corner and attach with a drywall or similar screw, suitable for the wall material (screws are not supplied).
Figure 2-20. Applying the Trim
2-21
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 4. Mounting the Door
Overview This section describes how to hang and attach glass and solid doors to the back box.
Additionally, this section describes how to reverse doors so that their hinges are on the right and locks are on the left.
Grounding
Wires
Door
Hinges
Lock
Front View of a 1 Bay Enclosure Door
Back View of a 1 Bay Enclosure Door
Figure 2-21. Front and Back View of a Glass Door
Grounding
Wires
Door
Hinges
Lock
Front View of a 1 Bay Enclosure Door Back View of a 1 Bay Enclosure Door
Figure 2-22. Front and Back view of a Solid Door
2-22
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 4. Mounting the Door (continued)
Attaching Doors Read the following instructions to attach glass or solid doors to the back box. Note that the hinges and lock catch should already be attached.
Note: A 5/16 hex nut driver is required to complete the following steps.
1. Unscrew the lock catch from the back box and retain the hardware.
2. Flip the lock catch over, and re-attach it to the back box so that the slot now protrudes to the
outside of the back box. See Figure 2-23.
Figure 2-23. Reversing the Lock Catch
3. Remove the door from the packaging.
4. For glass doors:
• Fit the dress panel onto the back box using the grooves on the dress panel as guides.
• Secure the dress panel to the back box using
the #6 torx screw provided. See Figure 2-24.
5. Align the door hinges with the hinge pins on the back box, and slide the door down onto the hinge pins.
Secure with
#6 Screw
Figure 2-24. Securing the Dress Panel
Door Hinge
Cabinet Hinge Pin
Figure 2-25. Hinge Pin Alignment
Continued on the next page
2-23 reception position upon
Lock Catch installed once properly
Lock catch
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 4. Mounting the Door (continued)
Attaching Doors 6. Attach the two ground wires to the back box with the # 6 hex flange nuts in the shipping
group (the grounding straps should already be attached to the door). See Figure 2-26.
Door
Back Box
Ground Wire
Reversing the
Door
Figure 2-26. The Ground Wire
7. Remove the B-key that is attached to the door and keep it in a safe place.
Read the following instructions to reverse doors so that their hinges are on the right and locks are on the left. Be sure to retain all hardware.
Note: A 5/16 hex nut driver is required to complete the following steps.
1. Disconnect the ground wires from the back box and set them aside.
2. Remove the door (if attached) by lifting it up off the back box’s hinge pins. Set the door aside.
3. Remove the lock catch and its screws from the right side of the back box.
4. Attach the lock catch to the left side of the back box so that the slot protrudes through the outside of the back box.
5. Use a 1/8 (3mm) punch and hammer to remove the hinge pins from the hinge leaves on the back box.
6. Reinsert the hinge pins so that they face lengthwise toward the bottom of the back box.
7. Remove all hinge hardware from the left side of the back box.
8. Attach the hinge hardware to the right side of the back box, so that the hinge pins are facing toward the top of the back box.
9. Turn the door upside down, align its hinges to the back box hinge pins, and then slide the door down onto the hinge pins.
10. Re-attach the ground-wire and flange nut to the back box and door.
11. Remove the B-key that is attached to the door, and keep it in a safe place.
2-24
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 5. Installing Motherboards into the CPU Bay
Overview This section contains placement guidelines and physical installation instructions on installing traditional aftermarket motherboards into the 4100ES CPU bay.
Notes: • If you do not need to install individual motherboards into the CPU bay, but need to install aftermarket modules into expansion bays, skip to Step 7.
• If you do not need to install any aftermarket modules at all, and if you have followed Steps 1 through 5, you have completed the panel installation and can apply power using the power-up and power-down procedures.
4100ES CPU Bay
Placement
Guidelines
Refer to the following guidelines before mounting a motherboard into a CPU bay.
• There are eight 2” (51 mm) slots on the CPU bay. Slots 1 and 2 are the only available slots for aftermarket boards.
• If there are more old style 4100 modules than a CPU bay can accommodate, they should be placed into the next expansion bay.
• For SPS Configuration only: CPU bays do not include a power distribution interface (PDI) board, so this bay is reserved for motherboard/daughter card modules only.
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8
Chassis
2“ Motherboards
CPU Master
Motherboard
Power Supply
Figure 2-27. CPU Bay Card Placement
2-25
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 6. Installing Modules into Expansion Bays
Overview This section contains placement guidelines and physical installation instructions on installing
4” X 5” cards and traditional motherboards into 4100ES electronics bays.
4100ES
Placement
Guidelines
IMPORTANT: This section applies to aftermarket modules for expansion bays only. If you do not need to install any aftermarket modules at all, and if you have followed Steps 1 through 6, you have completed the panel installation and can apply AC power.
Refer to the following guidelines before mounting 4” X 5” cards and/or motherboards to an expansion bay.
• Each expansion bay assembly includes a chassis, two end supports, one LED/switch frame, and a power distribution interface (PDI) board.
• An expansion bay holds up to eight 4” X 5” modules. A double-size module, such as the expansion power supply (XPS), takes up two blocks of space as shown below.
• Cards must be added from right to left.
Figure 2-28. Expansion Bay 4” X 5” Card Placement
2-26
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 6. Installing Modules into Expansion Bays (continued)
Motherboard
Placement
Guidelines for a
4100ES bay
• Motherboards can be installed on top of the PDI in expansion bays. The data and power that would normally be bussed via the PDI is instead routed across the boards by a connector from one board to the next.
• Up to eight 2” x 11 ½” motherboards can be installed in an expansion bay if no 4” x 5” modules are installed in the bay, and if the pins on the left connector (usually P1) on the leftmost motherboard are removed.
• Motherboards must be added from left to right.
• Relay motherboards must be the rightmost motherboards.
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8
This Slot
Must
Remain
Empty
Power Distribution
Interface
This slot cannot contain a motherboard unless the pins on P1 (or leftmost pin connector) are removed.
Up to eight 2” x 11 ½” motherboards can be mounted in an expansion bay. Seven motherboards fit into Slots 2 through 8; the eighth can be added in Slot 1 if its leftpost pins are removed.
Figure 2-29. Expansion Bay Motherboard Placement
2-27
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 6. Installing Modules into Expansion Bays (continued)
Mixed 4100
Motherboard/
4100ES 4”x5”
Card Placement
Guidelines
•
As shown in Figure 2-30, motherboards can be installed alongside 4” X 5” cards, if
necessary.
Figure 2-30. Mixed Module Placement
2-28
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 6. Installing Modules into Expansion Bays (continued)
Installing 4 X 5
Cards
The power distribution interface (PDI) is mounted to the back of each expansion cabinet. The
PDI contains slots for up to eight 4 x 5 slave cards. Since the PDI carries power and data across the entire bay, it solves most interconnection issues, especially between 4 x 5 cards.
Use the following instructions and Figure 2-31 to mount slave cards to an expansion cabinet.
1. Screw two standoffs and washers to the appropriate holes in the back of the cabinet. These holes must line up with the screw holes in the card.
2. Plug the card into the appropriate blind mating connector. Seat the card firmly onto the PDI when installing to ensure complete insertion of the power connector into the PDI.
3. Secure the top of the card to the standoffs with two #6 torx screws and washers.
4” X 5” CARD
STANDOFFS
SCREW
RETAINERS
WASHERS
#6 SCREWS
PDI CONNECTOR
(reverse side)
PDI
Figure 2-31. Slave Card/PDI Connection
2-29
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 6. Installing Modules into Expansion Bays (continued)
Installing
Motherboards into a 4100ES
Expansion Bay
Use the following procedure when installing motherboards in an expansion bay. Start with the second slot from the left and fill to the right.
1. Orient the motherboard with the connector labeled J1 on the right and the header labeled P1 on the left.
2. Attach four metal threaded standoffs and lockwashers into the screw holes on the chassis.
3. Attach two grey plastic standoffs to the motherboard socket mounting screws.
4. Secure the motherboard to the standoffs using four #6 torx screws as shown below.
METAL
STANDOFFS
SCREW HOLES
PLASTIC STANDOFFS
#6 SCREWS
SCREW HOLES
LOCKWASHERS
Figure 2-32. Installing the Motherboard in a 4100ES Expansion Bay
2-30
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays
Overview Each card has to be interconnected with every other card in its bay. At the same time, bays in the FACP also have to be connected together. Read this section to ensure that cards and bays are interconnected.
Guidelines Review the following guidelines before interconnecting modules and bays.
• The FACP power supply provides 24 VDC power to the CPU motherboard.
• The CPU motherboard provides 8 V (3 A capacity) for use by Legacy 4100 slave cards. 24
VDC card power is routed through the motherboard for slave card use.
• 4100 internal comms and power are harnessed to other bays. Do not connect the 8 V at P7 to an 8 V converter on a Goldwing or remote interface card.
• 24 VDC card power from the FACP power supply is rated at 2 A.
• Additional harnesses are provided with the shipping group, but may not be used at the time of installation. These harnesses should remain with control equipment for future use when necessary.
Power
Distribution
Module
Connections
The power distribution module (PDM) connects to the EPS, SPS, RPS, or XPS in each bay.
One PDM is used per back box. Use the instructions below to properly connect the PDM to each bay.
1. Route the black and white AC power wires to the supplied ferrite bead. Loop the wires twice
through the bead as shown in Figure 2-33.
TO AC BREAKER
TO PDM
Figure 2-33. Wiring Looped Through Ferrite Bead
2. Wire 120 VAC to the PDM, keeping AC wires at least 1 inch away from all other wires. AC power must stay in the right side of the cabinet, in the non-power-limited area.
3. Connect batteries to P5 on the PDM using Harness 734-015. Bend the wire near the PDM so that it occupies the back of the cabinet.
Continued on the next page
2-31
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays (continued)
Power
Distribution
Module
Connections
4. Connect the PDM to the power supply using Harness 734-012 for 120 V systems (734-013 for 220/230/240 V versions).
• Feed red and black wires through the side rail to the front of the power supply to prevent wire damage when the front panel is inserted.
• Connect the separate red and black wires (with yellow female terminations) to plugs P2
(black) and P3 (red) on the EPS and plugs P5 (black) and P4 (red) on the SPS or RPS.
• Connect the white and black wires, which terminate together in a white snap-on connector, to the bulkhead connector at the bottom of the EPS, SPS or RPS assembly, as shown in
Bottom view of the EPS assembly
*220/230/240 V PART NUMBERS
APPEAR IN ITALICS.
Bulkhead connector
FERRITE
BEAD
120 VAC
50, 60 Hz, 4.6 A
120 V
NEUTRAL
HARNESS
(734-257)
(734-258)*
BATTERY
HARNESS
FUSED AT 20 A
GROUND
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
BACK BOX
GROUND
SCREW
PDM
(566-246)
(or 566-248; see below)*
EPS
P2
P3
BLACK WIRE
RED WIRE
Second bulkhead connector here in
220/ 230/240 V version
120 V TO TRANSFORMER
THROUGH BULKHEAD
CONNECTOR
HARNESS 733-015
TO 24 V BATTERY
566-248
PDM TERMINAL
BLOCK
50/60 Hz
2.3 A
Figure 2-34. FACP Power Supply Assembly Connector (EPS shown)
Continued on the next page
2-32
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays (continued)
Power
Distribution
Module
Connections
5. Connect the 734-012 Harness (734-013 for 220/230/240 V versions) from the next connector on the PDM to the first XPS or EPS.
• Connect the separate red and black wires (with yellow female terminations) to the battery plugs on the respective power supplies.
• Connect the white and black wires, which terminate together in a white snap-on connector, to the connector at the bottom of the power supply assembly, as shown below. The black wire must be closer to the wall at the power supply connection point.
6. Repeat step 5 for the second power supply, if applicable.
Note: AC wiring is supervised.
*220/230/240 V PART NUMBERS
APPEAR IN ITALICS.
FERRITE
BEAD
120 VAC
60 Hz, 4 A
120 V
NEUTRAL
BATTERY
HARNESS
FUSED AT 15 A
HARNESS
(734-012)
(734-013)*
Bulkhead connector
P5
P4
RED WIRE
BLACK WIRE
Additional bulkhead connector supplied here with 220/230/240 V systems
XPS
ASSEMBLY
GROUND
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
BACK BOX
GROUND
SCREW
PDM
(566-246)
(or 566-248; see below)*
566-248
PDM TERMINAL
BLOCK
50/60 Hz
2 A
HARNESS 734-015
TO 24 V BATTERY
Figure 2-35. XPS/PDM Connection
2-33
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays (continued)
SPS CPU Card
Interconnections in the CPU Bay
Use the following directions to connect the CPU to the SPS and other motherboards (refer to
1. Connect P8 on the SPS to P1 on the CPU motherboard using the eight-position Molex minifit connector (provided).
2. Make sure connector P3 on the CPU is secured to J1 on the next motherboard to the left.
Repeat this for the third (leftmost) motherboard, if applicable.
SPS CPU Card
Interconnections in Expansion
Bays
Expansion bays comprise all bays other than the CPU bay. If you are installing a two- or
three-bay FACP, you will be using expansion bays (refer to Figure 2-38).
The power distribution interface (PDI) is mounted to the back of each expansion cabinet. The
PDI contains slots for up to eight 4” X 5” slave cards. Since the PDI carries power and data across the entire bay, it solves most interconnection issues, especially between 4” X 5” cards.
Refer to “Step 5: Installing Modules into Expansion Bays ” for instructions on mounting 4” X
5” cards to the PDI. Also bear in mind the following variations:
• In a remote expansion cabinet, a transponder interface card (TIC) requires additional interconnections. This occurs in MINIPLEX systems. Refer to Chapter 3.
• Regular motherboards require non-PDI interconnections to each other and to the CPU.
Refer to “Step 5: Installing Modules into Expansion Bays.”
SPS CPU Basic
Bay-To-Bay
Interconnections
Panels with two or three bays must be interconnected properly so that they function together as the central point of a standalone or MINIPLEX system, or as a node on a network.
Generally, the CPU bay connects to a local expansion bay using a circuit from CPU to the expansion bay’s PDI. If there is a second expansion bay, the PDI on the first expansion bay connects to the PDI on the second.
Note: Interconnections can become more involved if regular motherboards are used. Refer to “Step 5:
Installing Modules into Expansion Bays” if this is the case.
• To connect from the CPU bay to an expansion bay, route the 734-008 Harness from P2, P3, or P4 on the CPU motherboard to P1 on the PDI in the adjacent bay.
• To connect two adjacent expansion bays, route the 734-008 Harness from P2 or P3 on the first PDI to P1 on the PDI in the next bay. Jumpers P4 and P5 are set to positions 2 and 3
(right) to provide card power to the bay from a power supply (SPS, XPS, or RPS) located in the same bay. Jumpers P4 and P5 are set to positions 1 and 2 (left) to provide card power to the bay from P1 on the PDI.
2-34
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays (continued)
SPS Basic Bay-
To-Bay
Interconnections
Figure 2-36 shows the interconnections between three bays in a host panel.
J1/P3
P1 733-996
HARNESS
(LEGACY SYSTEMS)
P6
P8
HARNESS
734-008
P10
P2
P3
P4
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
4100 POWER DISTRIBUTION INTERFACE
ASSY 566-084
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
4100 POWER DISTRIBUTION INTERFACE
ASSY 566-084
Figure 2-36. Bay-to-Bay Interconnections
For information on remote expansion bays, refer to Appendix B.
2-35
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays (continued)
EPS CPU Bay
Interconnections
For the New Configuration:
• The FACP power supply and the CPU master motherboard are connected through the PDI board.
• Connect the power supply’s “RUI+ Earth Detect” (P9 on the EPS card) to the Earth Fault
(P1) on the RUI+ CPU Motherboard card.
• To connect the RUI+ CPU Motherboard to adjacent cards that do not communicate through the PDI (2” motherboards for example), insert a male-male 10 pin header into the
Motherboards’s female ten pin header (J8) and insert the other end into the adjacent card.
EPS CPU
Interconnections in Expansion
Bays
Expansion bays comprise all bays other than the CPU bay. If you are installing a two- or
three-bay FACP, you will be using expansion bays (refer to Figure 2-38).
The power distribution interface (PDI) is mounted to the back of each expansion cabinet. The
PDI contains slots for up to eight 4” X 5” slave cards. Since the PDI carries power and data across the entire bay, it solves most interconnection issues, especially between 4” X 5” cards.
Refer to “Step 5: Installing Modules into Expansion Bays ” for instructions on mounting 4” X
5” cards to the PDI. Also bear in mind the following variations:
• In a remote expansion cabinet, a transponder interface card (TIC) requires additional
interconnections. This occurs in MINIPLEX systems. Refer to Chapter3.
• Regular motherboards require non-PDI interconnections to each other and to the CPU.
Refer to “Step 5: Installing Modules into Expansion Bays.”
EPS CPU Basic
Bay-To-Bay
Interconnections
Panels with two or three bays must be interconnected properly so that they function together as the central point of a standalone or MINIPLEX system, or as a node on a network.
• The CPU bay can be connected to a local expansion bay by connecting the P2 or P3 connector on the left end of the CPU PDI card to the expansion bay’s PDI P1 connector.
Figure 2-37 shows a typical interconnect using P2 on the CPU PDI to P1 of the first
expansion bay.
• To connect two adjacent expansion bays, route the 734-008 Harness from P2 or P3 on the first PDI to P1 on the PDI in the next bay. Jumpers P4 and P5 are set to positions 2 and 3
(right) to provide card power to the bay from a power supply (EPS, SPS, XPS, or RPS) located in the same bay. Jumpers P4 and P5 are set to positions 1 and 2 (left) to provide card power to the bay from P1 on the PDI.
Note: Interconnections can become more involved if regular motherboards are used. Refer to “Installing
Modules into Expansion Bays” if this is the case.
Continued on the next page
2-36
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays (continued)
EPS CPU Basic
Bay-To-Bay
Interconnections
Figure 2-37 shows the basic CPU interconnections in a 4100ES EPS FACP.
RUI+ MOTHERBOARD
566-938
EPS PCB 566-873
P1
P2
P3
CPU BAY TO
EXPANSION BAY
HARNESS (734-008)
CPU BAY
P2
P3
P1
P2
P3
EXPANSION BAY PDIs
P1
P2
P3
Connecting to
4100
Motherboards
Figure 2-37. Basic CPU Interconnections
For information on remote expansion bays, refer to Appendix B.
Panels with motherboards on the left side of the expansion bays require some non-PDI
connections. If you need to connect a harness to a motherboard, refer to Figure 2-38 and follow
these steps. Make sure to route the power and communication wiring on the left side of the bay.
1. Connect one end of the 733-525 Harness to a motherboard in an adjacent bay. If the adjacent bay is a CPU bay with no additional motherboards, connect the harness to the P8 and P7 connectors of the CPU motherboard.
• Insert the harness connector with the blue wire into the P8 connector. Note that the P8 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
• Insert the harness connector with the white wire into the P7 connector. Note that the P7 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
Continued on the next page
2-37
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays (continued)
Connecting to
4100
Motherboards
If the adjacent bay is an expansion bay or a CPU bay with additional motherboards, connect the harness to the P2 and P3 connectors of the motherboard installed in the leftmost slot. (If
4100-6052 DACT occupies the leftmost slot, connect the harness to the motherboard in the second slot from the left.) Connect the harness as follows:
• Insert the harness connector with the blue wire into the P2 connector. Note that the P2 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
• Insert the harness connector with the white wire into the P3 connector. Note that the P3 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
2. Connect the other end of the harness to the leftmost motherboard in the next bay, as described below. Make sure to route the wiring on the left side of the bay.
• Insert the harness connector with the blue wire into the P2 connector. Note that the P2 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
• Insert the harness connector with the white wire into the P3 connector. Note that the P3 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
Blue
White
733-525 Harness
Chassis
Connector with
Blue Wire Goes to P2
Connector with
White Wire Goes to P3
Figure 2-38. Power and Communication Wiring for Motherboards
2-38
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 8. Configuring Cards
Overview The all cards and modules in the CPU FACP back box must be configured to operate correctly in the system via their DIP switch and jumper ports. This section describes the hardware configuration for the CPU components.
RUI+ Master
Motherboard
Configuration
The CPU motherboard must be jumpered as follows (refer to Figure 2-2):
P6 determines whether the RUI SHIELD signal is connected to 24 C or earth.
• Position 1 – 2: SHIELD to 24 C (default).
• Position 2 – 3: SHIELD to earth.
Note: Some devices that connect to RUI have inherently grounded shield terminals, in which case 24 C cannot be used. If 24 C is used, a Negative Ground Fault will occur.
RUI+ Isolation:
By default the RUI channel of the RUI+ Master motherboard is set to isolated mode. This provides better noise immunity in larger systems. If you are using an RUI+ Master
Motherboard to connect to a 4602-6001 (SCU) or 4602-4007 (RCU), move jumpers P5 and P6 to the RUI NON ISO position.
P5 and P6
Position 1-2: RUI is isolated (default)
Position 2-3: RUI is not isolated (use for RCU/SCU compatibility)
SW1 and SW2 are used to set the CPU motherboard up to be attached to either a network card or a RS-232/2120 card.
• On: Network card (NIC) attached to CPU motherboard (default).
• Off: RS-232/2120 card attached to CPU motherboard.
Master Controller
Daughter Card
Configuration
The master controller daughter card must be jumpered as follow (refer to Figure 2-6):
P1 is used for engineering diagnostics (COMLAB).
• Position 1 – 2: Download or no connection.
• Position 2 – 3: Diagnostic mode.
P3 configures the RAM battery as ON or OFF.
• Position 1 – 2: ON.
• Position 2 – 3: OFF.
2-39
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 8. Configuring Cards (continued)
SPS
Configuration
EPS
Configuration
SW1: Using DIP switch SW1, set the SPS device address. Use the address table in Appendix
P1: Earth connect jumper. Note that the P1 location is clearly designated on the PCB silk screen.
• Position 1 – 2: Enables Earth fault monitoring.
• Position 2 – 3: Disables Earth fault monitoring.
Only one power module should be set for earth fault monitoring for each location within a system. Normally, the SPS in the CPU bay is set to monitor for earth faults. If there is a second
SPS connected to the same set of batteries, that SPS should have earth fault monitoring disabled. Other power modules that can be set to monitor earth fault conditions are TPS, RPS and XBC. When located under common 0V with a TPS, the TPS should be set to monitor earth faults, and other co-located power modules should be set to disable earth fault monitoring.
P2: If the SPS IDNet outputs are being used, you may change P2 to configure the IDNet shield connection. Note that the P2 pin 1 location is towards P3.
• Position 1 – 2: Connects the shield to 0 V (default).
• Position 2 – 3: Connects the shield to earth ground.
P3: City Card and Relay Card operation. Note that the P3 pin 1 location is towards P2.
• Position 1-2: Install in pos. 1-2 only if a relay card 4100-6033 is installed and has relay 3 programmed for operation other than "Trouble"
• Position 2-3: (default) For City Card operation and for use with 4100-6033 if relay 3 is programmed for "activate on trouble" operation
Note: Refer to Chapter 5 for additional SPS configuration information.
Refer to chapter 8 for SPS wiring information.
SW2: Use this switch to set the EPS address as identified in the Panel Programmer job.Use the
P18: The Earth Fault Enable/Disable jumper allows you to enable or disable positive and
negative Earth Fault detection.
• To enable the function: Place the jumper block on pins 1 and 2
• To disable the function: Place the jumper block on pins 2 and 3
P16: The Battery Disconnect jumper can be set so that the FACP shuts down if the battery levels are too low, instead of letting the system run with diminished capacities. Enabling this function is mandatory for FACPs installed in Canada.
• To enable the function: Place the jumper block on pins 2 and 3
• To disable the function: Place the jumper block on pins 1 and 2
PDI Configuration P4/P5: The PDI can be configured to draw its power from different sources via P4 and P5.
• To provide power to the EPS CPU bay, set jumpers on P4 and P5 to position 2-3.
• To draw power from an XPS, SPS, RPS, TPS, or EPS on the PDI, set jumpers on P4 and
P5 to position 2 – 3.
• To draw power from P1 (from the XPS, TPS, EPS, SPS or RPS), set jumpers on P4 and P5 to position 1 – 2 (default).
• To remove power from the PDI, remove the jumper from P4.
Configuring Other
Cards
Refer to the appropriate installation instructions to configure other cards that are located in
CPU and expansion bays. Refer to Appendix E for a list of publications.
2-40
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 9. Installing and Removing Batteries
Installing and
Removing
Batteries in a One
Bay Cabinet
To install the batteries:
1. Remove the batteries from the packaging and inspect them for any damage.
2. Tilt the first battery towards you and insert it into the space at the bottom of the cabinet.
3. Once inside the cabinet, tilt the battery back to an upright position and slide it to the right of the cabinet.
4. Repeat the proceeding two steps with the second battery and make sure it is snugly positioned beside the first battery.
5. Once both batteries are in place remove the terminal protectors from the batteries.
6. Connect the batteries to the panel using the battery harness:
• Connect the positive terminal of the left battery to the positive battery input on the panel using the red cable.
• Connect the negative terminal of the right battery to the negative battery input on the panel using the black cable.
• Use the white jumper cable to connect the two remaining battery terminals, joining the two batteries.
7. Power up the panel following the
instructions in “Step 10. System
Positive
Jumper
Negative
To remove the batteries:
1. Power Down the Panel following
Figure 2-39. One Bay Battery Installation
2. Remove the harness from the batteries.
3. Fit the battery terminals with terminal protectors.
4. Remove the batteries from the cabinet by tilting them towards you, then taking them out of the cabinet.
5. Dispose of the old batteries properly.
2-41
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 9. Installing and Removing Batteries (continued)
Installing and
Removing
Batteries in a
Multi-Bay Cabinet
To install the batteries:
1. Remove the batteries from the packaging and inspect them for any damage.
2. Place the batteries at the bottom of the cabinet, center them and gently push them against the back wall.
3. Once the batteries are in place remove the terminal protectors from the batteries.
4. Connect the batteries to the panel using the battery harness:
• Connect the positive terminal of the left battery to the positive battery input on the panel using the red cable.
• Connect the negative terminal of the right battery to the negative battery input on the panel using the black cable.
• Use the white jumper cable to connect the two remaining battery terminals, joining the two batteries.
5. Power up the panel following the
instructions in “Step 10. System
To remove the batteries:
1. Power Down the Panel following
2. Remove the harness from the batteries.
3. Fit the battery terminals with terminal protectors.
4. Remove the batteries from the cabinet.
Dispose of the old batteries properly.
0OSITIVE
*UMPER
.EGATIVE
Figure 2-40. Multi-Bay Battery Installation
2-42
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Step 10. System Power Up and Power Down Procedures
System Power Up
Procedure
IMPORTANT:
• Never connect or disconnect power on a 4100ES by removing the connector from the PDM. This could cause an improper order of power disconnection which may shorten the product life.
• If this procedure is not followed, you may cause damage to the system and/or create a shock hazard.
Power-Up Procedure:
1. Connect only the negative (black) lead of the power supply/charger to the battery.
2. Close and lock the front panel door.
3. Have the appropriate personnel apply AC power to the system from the dedicated circuit breaker or fused disconnect.
4. Ensure the panel has started properly, observing all safety procedures appropriate for a
system with AC power applied.
5. Open the panel door and acknowledge all abnormal conditions including the battery
disconnected trouble condition.
6. Connect the positive (red) lead of the power supply/charger to the battery.
7. Ensure the battery trouble has cleared.
8. Install the panel cover plate (when present), close and lock the door.
System Power
Down Procedure
•
!
WARNING:
• Use caution when handling batteries - they can store significant energy and present a shock hazard. When transporting used batteries, be certain the terminals are removed and/or insulated so they cannot make contact with conductive objects and create a safety hazard.
• Use caution when AC power is present. The panel must have power removed while you are performing service on the system.
Power-Down Procedure:
1. Unlock and open the panel door and remove the cover plate (when present), observing appropriate safety procedures and warnings when the system has AC power present
2. Disconnect only the positive (red) lead of the power supply/charger from the battery
3. Have appropriate personnel remove AC power from the system from the dedicated circuit breaker or fused disconnect
4. Mark or tag the circuit breaker or fused disconnect indicating it is off for service
2-43
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
The Terminal Block Utility Module
Overview The 4100-0632 Terminal Block Utility Module is an all-purpose terminal block that mounts to an electronics bay, above or below the power distribution interface (PDI). Each module utilizes one block of mounting space.
The terminal block utility module has two 16-position terminal blocks that accept up to a maximum of 12 AWG wire.
Mounting to the
Electronics Bay
Follow the directions below to mount the terminal block utility module to the electronics bay.
1. Align the terminal block utility module to any two compatible screw holes on the electronics bay. Position the higher terminal block towards the middle of the bay. There are eight
possible locations: four above and four below the PDI. Refer to Figure 2-41.
2. Secure the terminal block utility module to the electronics bay with two #6 screws and
lockwashers.
3. The shorting strip may be removed or modified, depending on the application.
SCREW HOLES FOR
MODULE BRACKET
SCREW HOLES FOR
MODULE BRACKET
TERMINAL BLOCK UTILITY MODULE
#6 SCREW AND LOCKWASHER
Figure 2-41. Terminal Block Utility Module Mounting
2-44
2-45
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
2-46
Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components
Introduction
Chapter 3
Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components
MINIPLEX transponder interface cards (TICs) allow for data and power interconnections between the 4100 host panel and remote locations. This chapter describes the transponder installation procedure for 4100ES MINIPLEX systems.
In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic
Introduction to MINIPLEX Transponders
TIC/Motherboard Interconnections
Page
3-1
Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components
Introduction to MINIPLEX Transponders
Overview The 4100ES MINIPLEX system is comprised of a host panel containing everything required in
a standalone cabinet (see Chapter 3), plus:
• One or more remote MINIPLEX transponder cabinets
• A transponder interface card (TIC) in each transponder cabinet
This section describes each component.
Transponder
Cabinets
Transponder
Interface Cards
(TICs) and Audio
Riser Modules
The following TICs, audio risers, and audio riser controller modules are available for 4100ES
MINIPLEX ® systems:
• Basic Transponder Interface Card (TIC) Module
• Local Mode TIC Module
• Analog Audio Riser Module
• Digital Audio Riser Module
• Network Audio Riser Controller Module
Transponder Interface Cards (TICs) receive data from 4100ES host panels allowing remote locations to perform fire alarm functions. TIC modules are optionally available with local mode operation that provides basic (degraded mode) system functions in the event of a communication loss with the master panel. TICs receive communications from the 4100ES host panel using Remote Interface (RUI) communications with either Style 4 or Style 7 wiring.
For audio systems, audio riser modules are required and are connected directly to TIC modules via ribbon cable. Audio riser modules support Class A and Class B analog wiring, as well as
Style 4 and Style 7 digital audio wiring.
Basic TICs
RUI Communication wiring from the RUI module in the host panel extends to a transponder interface card (TIC) in a remote transponder cabinet. The transponder cabinet is simply a
2975-94xx Back Box with at least one TIC module in it, and can have one, two, or three bays.
The basic TIC is an addressable device that contains an RUI input, audio riser module interface, and a port for connecting to other transponder modules.
The basic TICs use the same board, with some variations:
• The basic TIC is an addressable device that contains RUI outputs, an audio riser output, a user interface output, and a port for connecting to motherboards.
• The only connectors on the addressable network audio interface module are the audio riser output and a user interface output.
3-2
Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components
Introduction to MINIPLEX Transponders (continued)
The Local Mode
TIC
The local mode TIC contains an RUI input, audio riser module interface, port for connecting to other transponder modules, and terminal block for connecting to an optional Local Mode
Controller. Local Mode Controllers are mounted remotely from the transponder and are available in red or beige (flush or surface mount). Model numbers are 4601-9108, -9109,
-9110, and -9111. Installation instructions are supplied with the controller.
Local mode operation allows a TIC to provide life safety operations in the event of a communication loss with the master controller. More specifically, this provision means that fire alarm inputs and outputs within the transponder cabinet can still work in a limited capacity to allow continued functioning of local initiating devices and notification appliances connected to the TIC. Local mode is considered a “degraded” mode of operation because full fire alarm system functionality is not guaranteed.
Because the TIC is a slave module that occupies an RUI address, it can indicate a trouble condition to the master controller in the event of a hardware failure. When local mode is initiated, all slave devices locally connected to the TIC are notified by the TIC that local mode is taking effect. From that point until communication is restored to the master controller, the
TIC “group-polls” all connected local slaves, and the slaves respond only in the event of an alarm input activation. Other status changes, including troubles, are not reported.
TIC Audio Risers Audio risers are used when digital or analog audio is being transmitted to the transponder cabinet. They are always mounted directly beneath the TIC, on the leftmost side of the transponder bay.
Refer to publication 574-844: Communication and audio interface modules installation
instructions to obtain configuration information for 4100-0621, -0622, and
-1341 Audio riser modules.
3-3
Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components
Introduction to MINIPLEX Transponders (continued)
TIC Illustrations
Figure 3-1 is an illustration of the various TIC and audio riser circuit boards.
0566-1166
BASIC TIC
0566-1167
LOCAL MODE TIC
Figure 3-1. Transponder Interface Cards
3-4
Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components
Introduction to MINIPLEX Transponders (continued)
Local Mode
Specifications
Local Mode is supported by the following:
• 4100-3101/3104/3105 IDNet Card
• 4100-3106 IDNet Quick Connect Card
• 4100-3109 IDNet 2 Card
• 4100-3110 IDNet 2+2 Card
• 4100-5101/5102/5103 Expansion Power Supply NACs (including TrueAlert
Non-Addressable SmartSync appliances)
• 4100-5111/5112/5113 System Power Supply NACs (including TrueAlert
Non-Addressable SmartSync appliances)
• 4100-5125/5126/5127 Remote Power Supply NACs (including TrueAlert
Non-Addressable SmartSync appliances)
• 4100-5120/5121/5122 TrueAlert Power Supply NACs
• 4100-1214 to -1225, 4100-1228 to -1239, 4100-1314 to -1325, 4100-1328 to -1339 100W
Amplifier NACs
• 4100-1212/1213/1226/1227/1312/1313/1326/1327 Flex 50 Amplifier NACs
• 4009-9401 TrueAlert Addressable Controller
• 4100-1270 Phone Controller and 4100-1272/1273 Phone NAC cards
• 4009-9201/9301 IDNet NAC Extender
• 4100-5116 Expansion Signal Card
• 4100-6077 MX Digital Loop Card
Local Mode is NOT supported by, but can co-exist with, the following:
• 4100 Legacy cards
• 4100-3101 to 3103 Auxiliary Relay cards
• 4100-6048 VESDA Interface Kit
• 4100-6043/6044 RS-232/2120 Interfaces
• 4100-1280 to 1287 LED/Switch Annunciators
• 4100-1290 24-Point Graphic I/O Module
• 4602-9101 SCU/ 4602-9102 RCU
• 4603-9101 LCD Annunciator
• 4100-1210/1211/1311 Audio Controller Board
• 4100-6014 Network Interface Card
• 4100-6052 DACT
• 4100-3115 XA Loop Interface Card
• 4100-6065 BMUX COMMs Module
• 4100-6066 TFX Loop Interface
Bear in mind the following limitations when local mode is in effect:
• If an alarm is already activated when local mode is initiated, the alarm remains activated in local mode.
• Software zones are not supported. Basic TrueAlert channels are supported.
• Alarm verification is not supported. All alarms are reported immediately.
• SMPL is not supported.
• TrueAlarm sensors have fixed thresholds.
3-5
Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components
Introduction to MINIPLEX Transponders (continued)
LEDs The TICs have the following LEDs:
LED1. Illuminates to indicate communication loss with the CPU.
LED2. Illuminates when an RUI ground fault search is active.
LED3. Illuminates when Local Mode is active.
LED4. Illuminates to indicate an RUI Style 7 primary trouble.
LED5. Illuminates to indicate an RUI Style 7 secondary trouble.
Note:
•
Refer to Figure 3-1 to see which LEDs are included on which TIC. Most TICs do not contain all LEDs.
• Refer to publication 574-844: Communication and audio interface modules installation instructions, to obtain LED information for 4100-0621, 4100-0622, and 4100-1341 audio riser modules
Card
Specifications
Table 3-1 lists the specifications for all TICs.
Table 3-1.TIC Specifications
Electrical Specifications
Input Voltage
Output Voltage
Input Current
18-33 VDC
8 V @ 1 A; 100 mV p-p ripple
36 mA for all TICs. 82 mA for a local mode TIC connected to a local mode controller.
Environmental Specifications
Operating Temperature
Humidity
32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C)
10% to 93% relative humidity at 90°F (32°C)
3-6
Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components
MINIPLEX System Guidelines
Overview The rules on this page apply exclusively to MINIPLEX systems. Review each guideline before installing a MINIPLEX 4100ES system.
Guidelines • All wiring is 18 AWG (minimum) and 12 AWG (maximum).
• All wiring is supervised and power-limited.
• All wiring that leaves the building requires overvoltage protection. Install module inside an UL-Listed electrical box wherever wire enters or exits the building. A maximum of four
2081-9044 Modules may be connected to one channel. The 2081-9044 is rated for 200 mA
(maximum).
• For Style 4 operation:
- The maximum distance to any device is 2,500 feet (762 m).
- “T” taps are allowed.
- The total maximum cable load (including all “T” taps) is 10,000 feet (3,048 m).
- Maximum allowed line-to-line capacitance (“+” to “-” terminals) is 0.58 uF. For
applications with shielded wire, be sure that the total capacitance from line to line plus the shield to either line is no more than 0.58 uF.
• For Style 6 or Style 7 operation, the maximum loop distance is 2,500 feet (762 m). “T” taps are not allowed.
• RUI comms are wired to remote cabinets from the CPU motherboard to one of the following transponder interface cards: 4100-0620 or 4100-0625.
• Annunciators and transponder interface cards support Style 7 operation when the system is wired Class A.
• The master control panel must be a 4100ES Fire Alarm Control Panel.
• The Style 4 RUI card supports MINIPLEX transponders and 4602/4603 serial
annunciators on the same signaling line circuit.
• Up to 4 RUI cards in the 4100ES Control Panel can be used for distributing transponder wiring in different directions or for supporting different wiring requirements (such as using a Style 7 RUI for serial annunciators).
• Up to 31 transponders can be controlled from the 4100ES Control Panel, and can be distributed as required among the RUI cards.
• A maximum of 30 RUI devices between each TIC is supported.
Note: Old legacy, basic, and local mode TICs have been replaced due to component obsolescence. The replacement boards listed below are functionally equivalent to the legacy boards.
Name
Basic Transponder Interface Card
Local Transponder Interface Card
Table 3-1
Legacy Card
0566-093
0566-094
New Card
0566-1166
0566-1167
3-7
Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components
Configuring Cards
Overview The TIC and all other cards to be mounted in the transponder cabinet and attached expansion bays must be configured to operate correctly in the system via their DIP switch and jumper ports. The CPU motherboard may have to be configured as well.
TIC Configuration
The TIC must be assigned a device address via DIP switch SW1. Refer to Appendix A for the
address switch table.
CPU Motherboard
DIP Switch (SPS
Configuration
Only)
P9 on the CPU motherboard determines whether the RUI SHIELD signal is connected to 24 C or earth.
• Position 1 – 2: SHIELD to 24 VDC (default).
• Position 2 – 3: SHIELD to Earth.
Some devices that connect to RUI have inherently grounded shield terminals, in which case 24
C cannot be used. If 24 C is used, a Negative Ground Fault will occur.
Configuring Other
Cards
Refer to the appropriate publication to configure other cards that are located in the transponder cabinet and attached expansion bays.
3-8
Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components
TIC/Riser Mounting
Overview All TICs and audio riser cards are mounted like any 4 x 5 card. This section describes the TIC/ audio riser card mounting procedure, which is identical to that of other 4 x 5 cards.
Mounting
Instructions
Use the following instructions and Figure 3-2 to mount 4 x 5 slave cards to an expansion
cabinet.
IMPORTANT:
• The TIC must be mounted in the upper left position of the bay.
• The audio riser card must be mounted directly below the TIC.
1. Screw two standoffs and washers to the appropriate holes in the back of the cabinet. These
holes must line up with the screw holes in the card. See Figure 3-2.
2. Plug the card into the top left PDI connector (P8).
3. Secure the top of the card to the standoffs with two #6 torx screws and washers.
SCREW
RETAINERS
STANDOFFS
TIC CARD
WASHERS
#6 SCREWS
PDI CONNECTOR
(reverse side)
PDI
Figure 3-2. TIC Mounting
3-9
Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components
TIC/Motherboard Interconnections
Interconnections
Use Figure 3-3 to connect the TIC to a motherboard in another bay.
HARNESS
734-078
TMPR SW
24C INPUT
PRI
RUI
SHLD
SEC
TB2
TB3
LED4 LED5
SW1
4100
COMM
LOSS
RUI
G.F.
SEARCH
LED1
LED2
TI C
P1
P1
P3
AUDIO RISER CARD
4100 POWER DISTRIBUTION INTERFACE
ASSY 566-084
PDI 1
HARNESS
734-008
SPS
OR
RPS
P6
POWER/
COMM
HARNESS 733-525
Connectors with
White Wire go to P3
Connectors with
Blue Wire go to P2
4100 POWER DISTRIBUTION INTERFACE
ASSY 566-084
PDI 2
PDI Jumpers
P4 and P5 on the PDI must be configured to provide power to the TIC.
--- If there is a Power Supply in Bay 1,
•
Set Jumpers P4 and P5 in Bay 1 to Positions 2 and 3.
--- If there is no Power Supply in Bay 1 with the TIC, you must obtain power from Bay 2 or Bay 3.
Option 1
• Set Jumpers P4 and P5 in Bay 1 to Positions 1 and 2.
•
Connect one end of Harness 734-008 to Power/Comm plug on the SPS or RPS (P6) (or P2 on XPS) located in
Bay 2 or Bay 3. Connect the other end of the harness to
P1 in Bay 1.
Option 2
• Set Jumpers P4 and P5 in Bay 1 to Positions 1 and 2.
•
Set Jumpers P4 and P5 to Positions 2 and 3 in bay with power supply that will provide power to the TIC in Bay 1.
• Connect one end of Harness 734-008 to P2 or P3 in bay that will provide power to the TIC in Bay 1. Connect the other end of the harness to P1 in Bay 1.
Figure 3-3. Transponder Cabinet Interconnections
3-10
Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components
RUI Wiring
Overview
RUI/RUI+
Specifications
Wiring
Configurations
The TIC connects to the CPU via the RUI interface. Wire from the RUI interface to each TIC.
The wiring may be Class A or Class B.
• Output: 24V @ 130mA (RUI), 500 mA (RUI+); 32V maximum (RUI); 25.2V max
(RUI+).
• Data Rate: 9,600 bits per second.
• 35.5 ohms maximum wiring impedance; 2500 feet maximum wiring distance.
Class A wiring allows transponder cabinets to communicate with the FACP even in the event of a single open circuit somewhere in the loop. Class A wiring requires that two wires are routed from the CPU motherboard to each TIC, and then back again to the CPU motherboard.
Class B wiring allows “T” tapping, and therefore requires less wiring distance per installation than Class A.
Figure 3-4 depicts both types of wiring.
Figure Notes:
1. Wire size must be between 18 AWG and 12 AWG.
2. The maximum wiring distance is 2,500 feet (762 m).
3. The maximum cable load is 10,000 feet (3,048 m).
4. Maintain correct polarity on terminal connections.
5. Do not loop wires under terminals.
6. Shield is optional if the RUI+ Master Motherboard is used.
7. Twisted wire is required for RUI. Twisted wire is recommended for improved noise immunity for
RUI+.
Figure 3-4. TIC Wiring to the Host Panel
3-11
Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components
MINIPLEX Audio Wiring
Overview This section describes the Class A and Class B connections from audio controllers to audio risers, as well as the TIC/riser interconnection. Class A and Class B wiring configurations are shown for both analog and digital controllers and risers.
Analog
Interconnections
Figure 3-5 is an illustration of Class A and Class B wiring from the analog audio controller to
analog audio risers that are in turn connected to TICs or the Network Audio Riser Controller
Module.
1
S A A S A A
RISER 1
TB1
RISER 2
4100-1210
ANALOG
AUDIO
CONTROLLER
10
Host Panel
DASHED
LINES ARE
FOR CLASS A
OPERATION
Node 1
Miniplex
Transponder
4100-0620
BASIC TIC
OR 4100-0625
LOCAL
MODE TIC
HARNESS
733-997
P3
P2
4100-0621
ANALOG
AUDIO
RISER
(566-242)
RISER 2 RISER 1
TB1
1
SEC PRI SEC PRI
S S
10
Node 2
Control Panel
4100-0623
AUDIO RISER
CONTROLLER
MODULE
HARNESS
733-997
P3
P2
4100-0621
ANALOG
AUDIO
RISER
(566-242)
RISER 2 RISER 1
TB1
1
SEC PRI SEC PRI
S S
10
Node 2
Miniplex
Transponder
4100-0620
BASIC TIC
OR 4100-0625
LOCAL
MODE TIC
HARNESS
733-997
P3
P2
4100-0621
ANALOG
AUDIO
RISER
(566-242)
TB1
1
RISER 2 RISER 1
SEC PRI SEC PRI
S S
1 0
Figure Notes:
1. Leave the 4.7 K, ½ W resistors (378-056; yellow/violet/red) on the “+” to “-” terminals of unused contacts.
2. All wiring is 18 AWG to 14 AWG twisted-shielded pair.
3. Audio wiring is not to be mixed in the same jacket with other wiring (including other audio wiring).
4. AC voltage rating: 10 VRMS (maximum).
5. DC voltage rating: 1 VDC (maximum).
6. Maximum number of analog interface cards per audio riser: 31.
7. All wiring that leaves the building requires the 2081-9044 Over voltage protector at each entry or exit to the building.
8. Maximum wire distance: 10,000 feet (3,048 meters).
9. Wiring must be free of all grounds.
10. Set audio input card jumpers as shown in Aux Audio Input Module Installation Instructions 579-160.
11. All riser wiring is supervised and power-limited.
Figure 3-5. Analog Audio Interconnections
3-12
Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components
MINIPLEX Audio Wiring (continued)
Digital
Interconnections
(4100-1311 Digital
Audio Controller)
Figure 3-6 is an illustration of Style 7 and Style 4 (Class B) digital wiring from the digital
audio controller to risers connected to TICs or the Network Audio Riser Controller Module.
PRIMARY
DAR
Transponder 1 Transponder 2
TB2
6 1
+ - S S + -
PRI SEC
FERRITE
BEAD
(required on primary and secondary
DAR)
4100-1311
DIGITAL
AUDIO
CONTROLLER
(566-409, -1028)
Host Panel
4100-0620
BASIC TIC
4100-0625
LOCAL
MODE TIC
HARNESS
733-997
P3 HARNESS
733-997
P3
P2 P2
Loop wires once through the supplied ferrite beads as shown
DASHED LINES ARE
FOR STYLE 7
OPERATION
4100-0622
DIGITAL
AUDIO
RISER
(566-407, -1000)
SEC PRI
TB1
- + S - +
1 6
4100-0622
DIGITAL
AUDIO
RISER
(566-407, -1000)
SEC PRI
TB1
- + S - +
1 6
Figure Notes:
1. All wiring is 24 AWG to 18 AWG, twisted-pair.
2. Maximum wire distance: 2,500 feet (762 meters) from digital audio controller primary to the digital audio riser card.
3. Maximum distance between subsequent nodes: 2,500 feet (762 meters)
4. Maximum line distance and capacitance between nodes:
18 AWG : 40 Ohms maximum, 0.055 µF maximum
24 AWG: 135 Ohms maximum, 0.055 µF maximum
5. All wiring that leaves the building requires the 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protector at each entry or exit to the building.
A maximum of four overvoltage protectors are allowed. Each 2081-9044 adds 6 Ohms and 0.006 µF.
6. Wiring must be free of all grounds.
7. Maximum number of digital interface cards per digital audio riser: 31.
8. All riser wiring is supervised and power-limited.
9. Audio wiring is not to be mixed in the same jacket with other wiring (including other audio wiring).
10. In applications where no Digital Audio Controller is connected to the field wiring (such as a synchronized audio application or a non-synchronized application with multiple network microphone s), all DAR interface cards are wired secondary to primary.
Figure 3-6. Digital Interconnections (4100-1311 Digital Audio Controller)
3-13
3-14
Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components
Introduction
In this chapter
Chapter 4
Networking
A standalone or MINIPLEX 4100 system becomes a network node when a 4100 Network
Interface Card (NIC) or other compatible network card is installed and connected to another network node.
This chapter describes each step of how to how to turn a standalone or MINIPLEX FACP into a network node.
Before beginning the installation, review the next few pages for a detailed description of network cards and the media cards that mount onto them.
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic
Introduction to the 4100 Network Interface Card
Step 1. Configuring Network Cards
Step 2. Mounting Media Cards to the NIC
Step 3. Mounting Network Cards
Digital Audio PDI Termination Plug
Page
4-1
Chapter 4 Networking
Introduction to the 4100 Network Interface Card
Overview The Network Interface Card (NIC) is a slave card that uses the standard 4100 serial bus to communicate with the master. The NIC connects FACPs in a network, allowing for communication between each panel via fiber, modem, or twisted shielded pair wire in a Style 7 wiring configuration.
The NIC is designed to be connected in a point-to-point arrangement, so that one wire fault does not cause the entire system to fail. The point-to-point arrangement provides the most secure and fault-tolerant wiring possible.
Two types of media boards can be used with the NIC card.
• The Fiber-Optic Media Card can be used for electrically noisy environments or for connecting externally to other buildings.
• Non-4100ES/4100U only: the Modem Media Card is typically used when a large
transmission distance is required.
• The Wired Media Card is used in all other types of applications.
Up to two media boards can be plugged into each NIC. The same NIC can use a combination of two types of media boards (for example, a NIC may have a wired media card connected to port
1 and a fiber-optic media card connected to port 2).
4-2
Introduction to the 4100 Network Interface Card (continued)
Network Module
Illustrations
Figure 4-1 depicts the 4100-6014 Network Interface Card.
Chapter 4 Networking
DATA TRANSMIT/
RECEIVE LEDs
(LED2 THROUGH
LED5)
MEDIA CARD
40-PIN
CONNECTORS
(P5, P6)
DATA RATE JUMPER
PORT (P3)
DATA
PROTOCOL
JUMPER PORT
(P3)
ADDRESS DIP
SWITCH (SW2)
YELLOW LED
(LED1)
RESET SWITCH
(SW1)
NIC Card LED
Indications
MOTHERBOARD
CONNECTOR (P4)
DIAL-UP
SERVICE
MODEM
CONNECTOR
(P2)
Figure 4-1. 4100-6014 Network Interface Card
The 4100-6014 NIC has the following LEDs:
LED1 (yellow). Illuminates when
• The host 4100 requests it to illuminate
• A transmission fails
• It is off-line with the 4100 host
• It needs to be configured
LED2 (red). Illuminates when a data ‘0’ is received at the right port.
LED3 (green). Illuminates when a data ‘0’ is transmitted at the right port.
LED4 (red). Illuminates when a data ‘0’ is received at the left port.
LED5 (green). Illuminates when a data ‘0’ is transmitted at the left port.
4-3
Chapter 4 Networking
Introduction to the 4100 Network Interface Card (continued)
4100 Motherboard
Options
The figures below are illustrations of two motherboards apart from the default CPU motherboard that can be used with the 4100 NIC.
• The 565-274 Master Motherboard holds two daughter cards: the 4100 master controller card and the 4100 NIC.
• The 565-275 Class B Motherboard holds the 4100 NIC by itself.
FIELD WIRING
TERMINAL
BLOCK (TB1)
UT MASTER
CONTROLLER
CONNECTOR (J2)
CITY CONNECT
JUMPERS (P4)
POWER/COMM BUS
CONNECTOR (J3)
2120 COMM/RS-232 CARD
CONNECTOR (J1)
P5
P6
INTERNAL COMMS
CONNECTOR (P2)
POWER/COMM BUS
CONNECTOR (P1)
SYSTEM POWER
CONNECTOR (P3)
FIELD WIRING
TERMINAL
BLOCK (TB2)
P7 P8
Figure 4-2. UT Motherboard with City Connection (565-274)
FIELD WIRING TERMINAL
BLOCK (TB1)
2120 COMM/RS-232 CARD
CONNECTOR (J1)
INTERNAL COMMS
CONNECTOR (P2)
POWER/COMM BUS
CONNECTOR (P1)
SYSTEM POWER
CONNECTOR (P3)
FIELD WIRING
TERMINAL
BLOCK (TB2)
Figure 4-3. UT Motherboard without City Connection (565-275)
4-4
Introduction to the 4100 Network Interface Card (continued)
NIC Card Modules There are three modules that can be plugged into the 4100-6014 NIC:
• 4100-6057 Fiber-Optic Media Card (565-261 or 566-376 or 746-109)
• 4100-6056 Wired Media Card (565-413)
• 4100-6055 Modem Media Card (565-279 or 566-338)
Each module is shown below.
FIBER-OPTIC DATA ASSEMBLY FOR
565-261 AND 566-376:
TRANSMIT (U1)
RECEIVE (U2)
FIBER-OPTIC DATA ASSEMBLY FOR
746-109:
TRANSMIT
RECEIVE
Chapter 4 Networking
JW1 LAUNCH POWER
SETTING
40-PIN NETWORK INTERFACE
CARD CONNECTOR (J1)
Figure 4-4. The 4100/4120-0143/ 4100-6057 Fiber-Optic Media Card
RESERVED (TB1)
R1 P2
40-PIN NETWORK
INTERFACE CARD
CONNECTOR (P1)
Figure 4-5. The 4100/4120-0142 Wired Media Card (565-413)
Continued on next page
4-5
Introduction to the 4100 Network Interface Card (continued)
NIC Card Modules
Chapter 4 Networking
MODEM TYPE
JUMPER PORT
(P5)
RJ-11
CONNECTOR
(P3)
40-PIN NETWORK
INTERFACE CARD
CONNECTOR (J1)
DATA
TRANSMISSION
JUMPER PORT
(P4)
Requirements and Limitations
RS-232
CONNECTOR
(P1) (USED FOR
PHYSICAL
BRIDGE)
STATUS LEDs (LED1, LED2)
Figure 4-6. The 4100-6055 Modem Media Card (565-279 or 566-338)
Refer to Table 4-1 for electrical environmental requirements for the 4100 NIC and media cards.
Table 4-1. Electrical and Environmental Specifications
Electrical Specifications
Network Interface Card
565-516
Network Interface Card 566-
793
Modem Media Card
Fiber
Media Card
Wired Media Card
Startup, no media cards: 8 VDC @ 110 mA
Nominal, no media cards: 20 to 32 VDC @ 0 mA
Nominal, no media cards: 20 to 32 VDC @ 46 mA
5 VDC @ 180 mA max.
Using 24 VDC power supply: 20 VDC @ 140 mA max.
Using 5 V power supply (GCC/NPU): 5 VDC @ 130 mA max.
4.75 to 5.25 VDC @ 170 mA max.
Environmental Specifications (All Modules)
Operating Temperature
Humidity
32 o
F to 120 o
F (0 o
C× to 49 o
C)
10% to 93% relative humidity at 90 o
F (32 o
C)
4-6
Chapter 4 Networking
Step 1. Configuring Network Cards
Overview The NIC card, along with the each media card, all have jumpers that must be set as shown below.
Motherboard
Jumper Settings
NIC-compatible jumper settings on CPU motherboards depend on which motherboards are used.
Motherboard 565-274 (Figure 4-2):
• JW1 and JW2 must be installed.
• Jumper plugs P5-P8 must not be installed.
Motherboard 566-227 (Figure 4-2):
P6: Port 1 settings.
P5: Port 2 settings.
• P6/P5 position 1 – 2: Network card (NIC) attached to CPU motherboard (default).
• P6/P5 position 2 – 3: RS-232/2120 card attached to CPU motherboard.
RUI+ Master Motherboard 566-938 (for figure see Chapter 2):
P10: Port 1 settings.
P11: Port 2 settings.
• P10/P11 position 1 – 2: Network card (NIC) attached to CPU motherboard (default).
• P10/P11 position 2 – 3: RS-232/2120 card attached to CPU motherboard.
NIC Card Address
Setting
NIC Card Jumper
Settings
Use SW2 to set the NIC card address. Refer to Appendix A for the address table.
There are two shunt jumper ports on the NIC card that need to be set: P3 and P4. (Figure 4-1)
P3: Determines the NIC data transmission rate, 57.6 kbits/second or 9600 bits/second.
• Position 1 – 2 (the right two pins) or no pins jumpered: 57.6 kbits/second.
• Position 2 – 3 (the left two pins): 9600 bits/second.
P4: Determines the data protocol, 8-bit or 9-bit, that the NIC card is using.
• Position 1 – 2 (the right two pins) or no pins jumpered: 9-bit.
• Position 2 – 3 (the left two pins): 8-bit.
All settings are labeled on the card.
Wired Media Card
Jumper Settings
P2: Tells the system which wire type is to be used. (Figure 4-5)
Positions 1 – 2, 5 – 6, and 7 – 8: 18 AWG shielded, twisted pair wiring.
Remove all jumpers to specify 24 AWG twisted pair telephone cable wiring.
IMPORTANT: When using the wired media card, the Earth fault detection is performed on the left port only. Remove R1
(1 Ohm resistor) from the media card on the right port.
4-7
Chapter 4 Networking
Step 1. Configuring Network Cards (continued)
Modem Media
Card Jumper
Settings
Non-4100ES/4100U only. P4 and P5 on the modem media card tell the system how the card is
P4: Sets the card up as a network media card or a standalone modem.
• Position 1 – 2 (required): Sets the card up as a network media card, a service modem, or a physical bridge.
• Position 2 – 3: Sets the card up as a stand-alone modem.
P5: Specifies which connector will be used for data transmission.
• Position 1 – 2: For modem media board or stand-alone modem. Specifies that the
transmission data comes from the 40-pin connector (J1).
• Position 2 – 3: For service modem or physical bridge. Specifies that the transmission data comes from the 10-pin RS-232 connector (P1).
Fiber Media
Jumper Settings
(746-109 only)
JW1 is used to adjust the link power budget. If communication problems are encountered, make sure that the fiber connections comply with ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B-3 industry standards.
The low power setting is preferred for all 62.5um fiber links less than 11dB and 50um fiber links less than 6.6.dB.
Link Power Budget Settings (62.5um fiber/50um fiber):
Low 11dB / 6.6 dB
Med 16 dB /11.6 dB
High 20.4dB / 17 dB
4-8
Chapter 4 Networking
Step 2. Mounting Media Cards to the NIC
Overview The 4100-6014 Network Interface Card (NIC) uses media cards to connect to other NICs. This section describes how the media cards are mounted onto NICs.
Media Card
Mounting
NICs connect to each other via the three types of media cards. The types of media cards in the right and left ports are determined by the type of wiring that is being used across cards.
Connect P1 on the wired media card, or J1 on the modem or fiber media cards, to P5 (the left port) on the NIC.
To connect a second media card to the same NIC, connect it as described above, but use P6 (the right port) on the NIC. Note that any two types of media cards can be connected to the same
NIC.
STANDOFFS FIT INTO HOLES
40-PIN
CONNECTION
(MEDIA CARD
P1 OR J1 TO
NIC P5)
MEDIA CARDS
40-PIN
CONNECTION
(MEDIA CARD
P1 OR J1 TO
NIC P6)
4100-6014 NETWORK
INTERFACE CARD
Figure 4-7. Media Card Mounting
4-9
Chapter 4 Networking
Step 3. Mounting Network Cards
Daughter Card
Installing
The 4100 NIC daughter card, shown in Figure 4-8, inserts into motherboards as follows:
• If the 565-274 Master Motherboard is being used, the NIC daughter card is inserted into connector J1.
• If the 566-227 Master Motherboard or 565-275 Motherboard is used, the NIC daughter card is inserted into connector J2.
• If the 566-938 RUI+ CPU Master Motherboard is used, the NIC daughter card is inserted into connector J6.
Figure 4-8. Installing the Daughter Card
4-10
Chapter 4 Networking
Step 4. Wiring Network Cards
Overview The nodes in the network now have to be wired together, so that the NIC in one host panel connects to the NIC in the next panel. This section contains guidelines and instructions for NIC wiring.
Wiring Guidelines Refer to the following guidelines whenever field wiring the NICs.
• Network nodes must be wired right to left port, regardless of the media type selected.
• Style 7 protection is achieved by wiring the nodes in a loop fashion. A single fault (except an Earth fault) will cause the network to reconfigure for degraded Style 7 (Style 4) operation. A second fault (except an Earth fault) will result in the network dividing into two separate networks.
• Style 4 is achieved by wiring the nodes in a linear fashion. Style 4 networks are not
fault-tolerant and a single fault (except an Earth fault) will result in the network dividing into two separate networks.
• Earth fault detection is performed on the left port only. When a network Earth fault occurs, the trouble is only reported on the node whose left port is connected to the span.
• All 18 AWG wiring used with 4100-6056 Wired Media Cards must be twisted-shielded pair. All 24 AWG (telephone cable) used with 4100-6056 must be twisted pair. When shielded cable is used, the shield must be terminated to chassis Earth on the left port only.
• It is permissible to use mixed media in a network. For example, some spans may be “wired media” while others are optical fiber or telephone modem.
• Each NIC has a jumper for selecting between network data rates of 57.6 kbps and
• 9.6 kbps. All cards in the network must be set for the same rate. (When modem media or physical bridging is used, the data rate must be set for 9.6 kbps).
• Each NIC has a jumper for selecting between 8- and 9-bit network protocols. All cards in the network must be set for the same network protocol. (When modem media or physical bridging is used, the protocol must be set for 8-bit).
• All network wiring except the shield is supervised and power limited.
• When wiring leaves the building, 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protectors are required. One overvoltage protector is installed where wiring leaves the building; another is installed where wiring enters the next building.
Continued on next page
4-11
Chapter 4 Networking
Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)
Wiring Guidelines A 655-158 Transient Suppressor (ordered as part of 748-599) is required for each modem-to-telephone line connection.
Transient Suppressor Assembly (655-158) added to RJ-31x as shown. If connecting to a terminal block, cut off one end of the cable.
Strip back the cable to connect the two center wires, normally red and green, to the red and green wires in the block.
7
8
6
Grn
5
1
2
4
3
Telephone Line
Figure 4-9. The Transient Suppressor
Wiring Distances
Maximum wiring distances are shown in Table 4-2.
Wired
Media Type
Optical Fiber
Modem (Physical Bridge)
RS-232
Table 4-2. Wiring Distances
Size
24 AWG
18 AWG
50/125 um
62.5/125 um
24 AWG (dry)
18 AWG
Data Rate
57.6 kbps
9.6 kbps
57.6 kbps
9.6 kbps
57.6 or 9.6 kbps
57.6 or 9.6 kbps
9.6 kbps
57.6 kbps
9.6 kbps
Max Distance
7,000 ft (2,134 m)
12,000 ft (3,658 m)
10,000 ft (3,048 m)
17,000 ft (5,182 m)
10,000 ft (3,048 m)
15,000 ft (4,572 m)
15,000 ft (4,572 m)
50 ft (15 m)
300 ft (91 m)
Related
Documentation
Note:
• 18 AWG fire-rated twisted, shielded pair must not exceed 58 pF per foot and be less than or equal to
•
6.385 Ohms per 1,000 feet (305 m).
24 AWG twisted, unshielded telephone cable must not exceed 22 pF per foot and be less than or equal to 25.6 Ohms per 1,000 feet (305 m).
Refer to the 900-242 Field Wiring Specifications for additional NIC wiring information.
4-12
Chapter 4 Networking
Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)
Fiber-Optic
Wiring
Connectors U1 (transmitter) and U2 (receiver) on the 4100-6057 Fiber-Optic Media Card are used to connect 4100-6014 NICs across parts of a network.
Note:
• ST connectors with long strain relief boots are to be used with the fiber optic cable.
• Fiber backbone components must meet or exceed standard EIA/TIA 568-B (Electronic Industries
Alliance/Telecommunications Industry Association) for maximum power losses; single-mode fiber is preferred; attenuation should be measured at 1310 nm.
Figure 4-10 shows how two network nodes are connected via fiber-optic cable.
Fiber-Optic Cable
U1 U2 U1 U2 U1 U2 U1 U2
FIBER MEDIA CARD
4100-6014
NETWORK
INTERFACE CARD
Figure 4-10. Fiber Wiring
Fiber Optic
Connection Types
Dual Fiber Optic Cable Connections. The standard fiber optic connection between network nodes uses two fiber optic cables, one for transmit, and the other for receive. This connection allows for optimum communications distance.
The available communications distance is determined by the properties of the specific fiber cable used. Distances can be determined using the information and examples shown in
Single Fiber Optic Cable Connections. For applications where a single fiber cable is available, or where use of a single cable is desired, using a model 4190 9010 Bi-Directional
Coupler at each node combines the separate transmit and receive signals into a single path
(refer to the requirements list).
This connection allows use of a single fiber cable, but it does reduce communications distance
as indicated in the information and examples shown in Table 4-4.
4-13
Chapter 4 Networking
Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)
4190-9010
Coupler
Requirements
The 4190-9010 Coupler (271-012) is used with the 565-261 Fiber Optic Media Board (revision
“C” or higher), the 566-376 or the 746-109. Two 4190-9010 Bi-Directional Couplers are required per connection, one at each node.
The 4190-9010 is equipped with type ST connectors. To make type ST to type ST connections, an ST to ST coupler, by others, is required. ST to ST Couplers are available from:
Black Box, part number FO200
Fiber Instrument Sales, part number F1-8101
Newark Electronics, part number 95F2097
(or the equivalent)
Table 4-3. Dual Fiber Optic Cable Communications Distance Examples
Fiber Type
1
* MIFL
4 dB/km
2
Power
Margin
4 dB
Distance
3
Budget
17 dB
3
50/125 numerical aperture = 0.2
62.5/125 numerical aperture = 0.275
3 dB/km
4 dB/km
3.75 dB/km
3 dB
4 dB
3 dB
10,000 ft
(3.05 km)
15,000 ft
(4.57 km)
13,000 ft
(3.96 km)
15,000 ft
(4.57 km)
20.4 dB
*See notes at bottom of page.
Table 4-4. Single Fiber Optic Cable Communications Distance Examples*
Fiber Type
1
MIFL
2
Power
Margin
Distance
3
Budget
50/125 numerical numerical = 0.2
62.5/125 numerical aperture = 0.275
3 dB/km
3.2 dB/km
2 dB
*Examples made using 4190 9010 Bi-Directional Couplers
7,650 ft(2.33 km)
8,200 ft (2.5 km)
21.4 dB
3
4190-9010
Coupler Loss
9.4 dB
ST to ST
Coupler Loss
3 dB
2 dB
Notes for Table 4-3 and Table 4-4:
1. Cable specifications are for 50 or 62.5 micron core with 125 micron cladding, multi-mode graded index fiber. Wavelength = 850 nm.
2. MIFL = Maximum Individual Fiber Loss. Numbers shown are for example reference only, refer to specific cable for exact specification.
3. Maximum cable length is determined by distance listed or by reaching budget value, whichever is shorter. Maximum distances listed for dual fiber cable are shorter than would be
calculated. Budget using 4190-9010 Bi-Directional Coupler is the same with either size cable because the coupler input cables are 62.5/125 fiber allowing launch power to be the same.
Continued on next page
4-14
Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)
Figure 4-11 shows coupler wiring.
4190-9010
Coupler
Requirements
Chapter 4 Networking
FD4-848-1
Figure 4-11. Coupler Wiring
Wiring with the
Wired Media Card
Refer to the guidelines and figures in this topic to use wired media cards.
IMPORTANT: TB1 on the wired media card must not be used when it is connected to the 4100-6014 NIC.
• When the 565-413 Interface Card is used with 565-516, -407, –409, or 566-793 Network
Card, TB1 on the 565-413 Interface Card cannot be used. Connection to the motherboard is required as shown.
• The shield should only be connected at one end of the line. The shield is connected to the left port.
• When wiring leaves the building, 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protectors are required. One overvoltage protector is installed where wiring leaves the building; another is installed where wiring enters the next building.
Continued on next page
4-15
Chapter 4 Networking
Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)
Wiring with the
Wired Media Card
Table 4-5, lists the 4100ES master motherboard connections for the wired media card.
Table 4-5. CPU Motherboard Wired Media Connections
566-227 CPU Master Motherboard RUI+ CPU Master Motherboard (566-938)
Motherboard Port for Media Card
Connected to P5
Wired Media Card
Connection
(Left Port)
TB1
TB1-4
TB1-5
TB1-6
TB1-7
TB1-8
Motherboard Port for Media Card
Connected to P6
TB3
TB3-1
TB3-2
TB3-3
TB3-4
TB3-5
0 V
Earth ground
INV (-)
None
NONINV (+)
Wired Media Card
Connection (Right
Port)
NONINV (+)
Reserved
INV (-)
Earth ground
0 V
Motherboard Port for
Media Card Connected to P5
TB2
TB3
TB2-4
TB2-5
TB2-6
TB2-7
TB2-8
Motherboard Port for
Media Card Connected to P6
TB3-1
TB3-2
TB3-3
TB3-4
TB3-5
Wired Media Card
Connection
(Left Port)
0 V
Earth ground
INV (-)
None
NONINV (+)
Wired Media Card
Connection (Right
Port)
NONINV (+)
Reserved
INV (-)
Earth ground
0 V
Figure 4-12, shows how two CPU motherboards with wired media network cards connect to
each other in the 4100ES.
18 AWG
1
R+ R-
TB3
5 1 5
8 TB1 1
L+ L-
Figure 4-12. Wired Media Interconnections Between 4100ES Motherboards
4-16
Chapter 4 Networking
Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)
Modem
Guidelines
Review the following guidelines before wiring a network with modem media boards.
• Modem media wiring for NICs applies to non-4100ES/4100U systems only.
• Phone Line Classification consists of the following:
- Private leased line for analog data communications
- No dial tone
- Full duplex operation
- No conditioning required
- No signaling required
- Two-wire line interface
- RJ-11 modular jack
• If a four-wire circuit is required, the line must include a data station termination (DST) device to provide the two-wire interface required by the 4120 network modem. The DST device should be located as close to the FACP as possible to minimize dry line signal losses.
• The modem is capable of full duplex V.32bis analog data communications. The transmit signal level is 10 dbm.
• Telecommunications device: Xecom Model XE1414 or XE1414C V.32bis Two-Wire
Analog Modem
• Modem FCC Registration Number: DWEUSA-75322-FA-E (565-279);
DWEUSA-35610-M5-E (566-338)
Modem Wiring
IMPORTANT: Modem media wiring for NICs applies to non-4100ES/4100U systems only.
The Modem Media Card uses RJ-11 connectors to connect 4100-6014 NIC Assemblies across parts of a network.
Use the RJ-11 connector (P2) to connect nodes that use the modem media card. Do not use connector P1 (P1 is reserved for when the daughter card is used as a physical bridge). Leased lines must be analog, full-duplex, private line (no dial tone), with a two-wire RJ-11 interface.
Style 4 requires one circuit; Style 7 requires two circuits.
Standard TELCO Cable
P3 P3 P3 P3
MODEM MEDIA
CARD
4100-6014
NETWORK
INTERFACE CARD
Figure 4-13. Modem Wiring
4-17
Chapter 4 Networking
Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)
Wiring
Illustrations
The following figures show how to wire the NIC. The illustrations use the 565-274 and
565-275 motherboards only. If you are using the 4100ES motherboard, refer to Figure 4-14
along with the figures below.
Wired Media Style
7 Wiring
SEE NOTE 3 SEE NOTE 3
OR
566-826
SEE NOTE 5
OR
566-825
Notes:
1. Refer to general wiring precautions in this chapter, as well as Field Wiring
Specifications: document 900-082 for
4100; 900-242 for 4100ES.
2. When the 565-413 Interface Card is used with 565-516, -407, –409, or 566-793
Network Card, TB1 on the 565-413
Interface Card cannot be used.
Connection to the motherboard is required as shown.
3. The shield should only be connected at one end of the line. The shield is connected to the left port.
4. On assembly 565-274, JW1 and JW2 must be installed. Jumper plugs must not be installed on P5-P8.
5.
Each “wired” media cable requires two ferrite beads, one at each end (included in the shipping group). Refer to installation instructions 574-041 for proper bead mounting.
Figure 4-14. Wired Media, Style 7 Wiring
4-18
Chapter 4 Networking
Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)
Fiber Optic Style
7 Wiring
OV2
L-
L+
EARTH
EARTH
OV1
R-
R+
TB2
4020
NETWORK
INTERFACE
ASSY
565-411
0R
566-826
FIBER
OPTION
ASSY*
SEE NOTE 5
XMT
RCV
LEFT PORT
TB1
FIBER
OPTION
ASSY*
XMT
RCV
RIGHT PORT
SEE NOTE 5
XMT RCV
FIBER
OPTION
ASSY*
LEFT
7
PORT
XMT RCV
+
R
8 7
-
R
6 5
I
V
0
4 3 2
TB1
FIBER
OPTION
ASSY*
RIGHT
1
MOTHERBOARD
ASSY
565-275
NETWORK INTERFACE
(DAUGHTER CARD)
ASSY 565-409 OR
566-793
4100
1
L
+
2 3
L
-
4 5
O
TB2
6 7
V
2
8
SEE NOTE 5
* FIBER OPTION ASSY
565-261, 566-376, or 746-109
CAN BE USED
XMT RCV
FIBER
OPTION
ASSY*
LEFT
PORT
XMT RCV
FIBER
OPTION
ASSY*
+
R
8 7
-
R
6 5
I
V
0
4 3 2 1
TB1
RIGHT
MOTHERBOARD
ASSY
565-274
NETWORK INTERFACE
(DAUGHTER CARD)
ASSY 565-409 OR
566-793
4100
TB2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
L
+
L
-
O
V
2
8
OV2
L-
L+
EARTH
EARTH
OV1
R-
R+
TB2
4002
NETWORK
INTERFACE
ASSY
565-432
0R
566-825
FIBER
OPTION
ASSY*
XMT
RCV
LEFT PORT
TB1
FIBER
OPTION
ASSY*
XMT
RCV
RIGHT PORT
FD4-848-2
Notes:
1. Refer to general wiring precautions in this chapter, as well as Field Wiring Specifications: document 900-082 for 4100;
900-242 for 4100ES. For specific information about fiber optic wiring, refer to the 900-143 Fiber Tutorial.
2. The maximum distance between nodes when using the fiber communication path is dependent upon the fiber’s multimode graded index: 10,000 feet (3,048 m) for 50/125 fiber; 15,000 feet (4,572 m) for 62.5/125 fiber. The maximum cable O.D. is 0.118 (3 mm). Reference document 900-143 for other fiber sizes.
3. ST connectors with long strain relief boots are to be used with the fiber optic cable.
4. On assembly 565-274, JW1 and JW2 must be installed. Jumper plugs must not be installed on P5-P8.
5. Cable clamps supplied with 748-531 are used to secure the fiber cable.
Figure 4-15. Fiber Optic, Style 7 Wiring
4-19
Chapter 4 Networking
Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)
Wired Media and
Fiber Optic Style
7 Wiring
FD4-848-3
SEE NOTE 6
SEE NOTES 7 and 8
4020
* FIBER OPTION ASSY
565-261, 566-376, or 746-109
CAN BE USED
OV2
L-
L+
EARTH
EARTH
OV1
R-
R+
TB2
NETWORK
INTERFACE
ASSY
565-411
0R
566-826
“WIRED”
MEDIA
OPTION
ASSY
565-413
LEFT
PORT
+
R
8 7
-
R
6 5
I
V
0
4 3 2
TB1
1
FIBER
OPTION
ASSY*
TB1
XMT
RCV
SEE NOTE 5
4100
XMT RCV
FIBER
OPTION
ASSY*
“WIRED”
MEDIA
OPTION
ASSY
565-413
PORT
LEFT RIGHT
MOTHERBOARD
ASSY
565-275
RIGHT PORT
4002
NETWORK INTERFACE
(DAUGHTER CARD)
ASSY 565-409 OR
566-793 1
L
2
+
3
L
-
4 5
O
V
2
TB2
6 7 8
OV2
L-
L+
EARTH
EARTH
OV1
R-
R+
FIBER
OPTION
ASSY*
XMT
NETWORK
INTERFACE
ASSY
565-432
0R
566-825
RCV
LEFT PORT
Notes:
TB2
“WIRED”
MEDIA
OPTION
ASSY
565-413
1. Refer to general wiring precautions in this chapter, as well as Field Wiring Specifications: document 900-082 for 4100; 900-242 for 4100ES.
For specific information about fiber optic wiring, refer to the 900-143 Fiber Tutorial.
TB1
RIGHT
PORT
2. The maximum distance between nodes when using the fiber communication path is dependent upon the fiber’s multimode graded index: 10,000 feet (3,048 m) for 50/125 fiber;
15,000 feet (4,572 m) for 62.5/125 fiber. The maximum cable O.D. is 0.118 (3 mm).
Reference document 900-143 for other fiber sizes.
“WIRED”
MEDIA
OPTION
ASSY
565-413
LEFT
PORT
XMT RCV
FIBER
OPTION
ASSY*
+
R
8 7
-
R
6 5
I
V
0
4 3 2 1
TB1
RIGHT
MOTHERBOARD
ASSY
565-274
NETWORK INTERFACE
(DAUGHTER CARD)
ASSY 565-409 OR
566-793
TB2
9 10 11
1 2
12 13 14 15 16
3 4 5 6 7
L
+
L
-
O
V
2
8
3. ST connectors with long strain relief boots are to be used with the fiber optic cable.
4. On assembly 565-274, JW1 and JW2 must be installed. Jumper plugs must not be installed on P5-P8.
5. Cable clamps supplied with 748-531 are used to secure the fiber cable.
6. When the 565-413 Interface Card is used with 565-516, -407, –409, or 566-793 Network Card, TB1 on the 565-413
Interface Card cannot be used. Connection to the motherboard is required as shown.
7.
The shield should only be connected at one end of the line. The shield is connected to the left port.
8. Each “wired” media cable requires two ferrite beads, one at each end (included in the shipping group). Refer to installation instructions 574-041 for proper bead mounting.
9. When wiring leaves the building, 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protectors are required. One overvoltage protector is installed where wiring leaves the building; another is installed where wiring enters the next building.
SEE
NOTES 7 and 8
Figure 4-16. Wired Media and Fiber Optic, Style 7 Wiring
4-20
Chapter 4 Networking
Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)
Modem Media
Wiring (Non-
4100ES/4100U
Only)
IMPORTANT:
Figure 4-17 applies only to non-4100ES/4100U systems.
0V 2
L -
L +
EARTH
EARTH
0V 1
R -
R +
TB2
4020
NETWORK
INTERFACE
ASSY
565-518
OR
566-826
MODEM
MEDIA
ASSY
LEFT PORT
MODEM
MEDIA
ASSY
RIGHT PORT
TB1
4100
+
R
8
-
R
0
7 6 5 4
1
V
3 2 1
TB1
"WIRED"
MEDIA
ASSY
565-413
MODEM
MEDIA
ASSY
LEFT
PORT
RIGHT
NETWORK INTERFACE
ASSY 565-516 OR 566-793
MODEM
MEDIA
ASSY
MOTHER
BOARD
ASSY
565-275
TB2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L
+
L
-
0
V
2
PHONE JACK
OR
TELEPHONE
TERMINATION
BLOCK
0V 2
L -
L +
EARTH
EARTH
0V 1
R -
R +
TB2
4020
NETWORK
INTERFACE
ASSY
565-518
OR
566-826
MODEM
MEDIA
ASSY
LEFT PORT
"WIRED"
MEDIA ASSY
565-413
RIGHT PORT
TB1
"WIRED"
MEDIA
ASSY
565-413
LEFT
PORT
"WIRED"
MEDIA
ASSY
565-413
+
R
8
-
R
1
V
0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
TB1
RIGHT
MOTHER
BOARD
ASSY
565-274
NETWORK INTERFACE
ASSY 565-516
OR 566-793
4100
TB2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L
+
L
-
0
V
2
Figure Notes:
1. All wiring is 24 AWG twisted pair.
2. Connections between nodes can be made using unpowered (“dry”) copper wires or through powered (“wet”) leased lines.
3. Maximum cable distance between nodes when using short haul is 24 AWG twisted pair is 15,000 feet (4,572 m).
4. Long haul telephone circuits must be private leased lines for analog data, point-to-point, full duplex, two-wire line interface with RJ-11 termination (where no line conditioning or signaling are required).
5. Modem media board power (565-279/566-338): 180 mA. Maximum at 5 +/- 0.25 VDC.
6. Modem media boards operate only at 9600 bps, with an 8-bit protocol.
7. Refer to general wiring precautions in this document, as well as Field Wiring Specifications: document 900-082 for 4100; 900-242 for
4100ES. Refer to Test Specification 576-241 for instructions on how to communicate with the modem.
8. When using a service modem, connect to the 565-516 or 566-793 board using Cable 733-808 in shipping group 740-850. Use Cable
171-095 to connect the modem to a phone jack and/or a telephone termination block. Cut off one end of Cable 171-095 if connecting to a telephone termination block. Strip back the cable to connect the two center wires to the red and green wires in the block. Refer to Test Specification 576-241 for instructions on how to communicate with the modem. Place jumpers across 1-2 of P4 and 2-3 of P5.
9. When wiring leaves the building, 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protectors are required. One overvoltage protector is installed where wiring leaves the building; another is installed where wiring enters the next building.
10. Modem media assemblies have part number 565-279 or 566-338.
11. A network can support can support up to 98 physical bridge nodes. Only four modems are permitted per network.
Figure 4-17. Modem Media Wiring (Non-4100ES/4100U Only)
4-21
Chapter 4 Networking
Network Audio Wiring
Head-End Audio
Network
Configuration
A “Head End” audio network usually contains one node with an audio controller module
(4100-1210 Analog Controller Board or 4100-1211 [or -1311] Digital Controller Board), and may contain local analog or digital amplifiers. Some configurations may have an audio controller module located in a non-head end node; for example, an application with backup local audio in a non-head end node or an application with distributed microphones.
Typically, the other nodes only contain amplifiers, the audio riser interface (4100-0621 Analog
Audio Riser or 4100-0622 Digital Audio Riser), the 4100-0623 and the 4100-1341 Network
Audio Riser Controller Module.
The 4100-0623 Network Audio Riser Controller Module supports audio interconnections when connected to 4100-0621 Analog Audio Risers or 4100-0622 Digital Audio Risers. It is a version of the Basic TIC that doesn’t have an RUI input. It communicates via internal slave communications and is used to control audio riser interface modules in network nodes that are stand-alone fire alarm control panels.
Locations on the
Network Audio
Riser Controller
Module
Figure 4-18 shows the DIP switch, LED, and connector locations on the 4100-0623 Network
Audio Riser Controller Module.
SW1. Baud rate/device address
DIP switch (see
Appendix A)
LED1. Illuminates to indicate communication loss with the CPU
SW1
TMPR SW
24C INPUT
PRI
RUI
SHLD
SEC
TB2
TB3
LED4 LED5
4100
COMM
LOSS
RUI
G.F.
SEARCH
LED1
LED2
P3. Audio riser connector
P1
P3
AUDIO RISER CARD
Figure 4-18. Network Audio Riser Controller Module
4-22
Chapter 4 Networking
Network Audio Wiring (continued)
Card
Specifications
Table 4-6 lists the specifications for the 4100-0623 Network Audio Riser Controller Module.
Table 4-6. Network Audio Riser Controller Specifications
Electrical Specifications
Input voltage
Input Current
18-33 VDC
25 mA for Network Audio Riser Controller connected to a network node
Environmental Specifications
Operating Temperature
Humidity
32 o
F to 120 o
F (0 o
C to 49 o
C)
10% to 93% relative humidity at 90 o
F (32 o
C)
4-23
Chapter 4 Networking
Network Audio Wiring (continued)
Analog
Interconnections
Figure 4-19 is an illustration of Class A and Class B wiring from the analog audio controller to
risers connected to the Network Audio Riser Controller Module.
Note: Old legacy 0566-218 Analog Audio Controller was replaced due to component obsolescence. The replacement board is the 0566-1011 Analog Audio Controller. It is functionally equivalent to the legacy board.
1 10
S A A S A A
RISER 1
TB1
RISER 2
4100-1210
ANALOG
AUDIO
CONTROLLER
(566-218, -1011)
Node 1
Host Panel
DASHED
LINES ARE
FOR CLASS A
OPERATION
Node 1
4100-0623
AUDIO RISER
CONTROLLER
MODULE
Node 2
4100-0623
AUDIO RISER
CONTROLLER
MODULE
Node 3
4100-0623
AUDIO RISER
CONTROLLER
MODULE
HARNESS
733-997
P3
P2
4100-0621
ANALOG
AUDIO
RISER
(566-242)
TB1
1
RISER 2 RISER 1
SEC PRI SEC PRI
S S
10
HARNESS
733-997
P3
P2
4100-0621
ANALOG
AUDIO
RISER
(566-242)
TB1
1
RISER 2 RISER 1
SEC PRI SEC PRI
S S
10
HARNESS
733-997
P3
P2
4100-0621
ANALOG
AUDIO
RISER
(566-242)
RISER 2 RISER 1
TB1
1
SEC PRI SEC PRI
S S
10
Figure Notes:
1. Leave the 4.7 K, ½ W resistors (378-056; yellow/violet/red) on the “+” to “-” terminals of unused contacts.
2. All wiring is 18 AWG to 14 AWG, twisted-shielded pair.
3. Audio wiring is not to be mixed in the same jacket with other wiring (including other audio wiring).
4. AC voltage rating: 10 VRMS (maximum).
5. DC voltage rating: 1 VDC (maximum).
6. The maximum number of analog interface cards per audio riser is 31.
7. All wiring that leaves the building requires the 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protector at each entry or exit to the building.
8. The maximum wire distance is10,000 feet (3,048 meters).
9. Wiring must be free of all grounds.
10. Set audio input card jumpers as shown in Aux Audio Input Module Installation Instructions 579-160.
11. All riser wiring is supervised and power-limited.
Figure 4-19. Analog Audio Interconnections
4-24
Chapter 4 Networking
Network Audio Wiring (continued)
Digital
Interconnections for the 4100-1311
Digital Audio
Controller
Figure 4-20 is an illustration of Style 7 and Style 4 (Class B) digital wiring from the digital
audio controller to risers connected to the Network Audio Riser Controller Module.
Note: Old legacy 0566-409 Digital Audio Controller, 0566-407 DARIC, and 0566-833 MCC DARIC boards were replaced due to component obsolescence. The replacement boards are the 0566-1028 Digital
Audio Controller, 0566-1000 DARIC, and 0566-1001 MCC DARIC. They are functionally equivalent to the legacy boards.
DAR TO
PRIMARY
INPUT
TB2
4100-1311
DIGITAL
AUDIO
CONTROLLER
(566-409, -1028)
Node 1
NODE N
(STYLE 4
ONLY)
4100-0623
AUDIO RISER
CONTROLLER
MODULE
Node 2
4100-0623
AUDIO RISER
CONTROLLER
MODULE
Node 3
4100-0623
AUDIO RISER
CONTROLLER
MODULE
Host Panel
Ferrite Bead
(required on primary and secondary DAR)
HARNESS
733-997
P3
P2
4100-0622
DIGITAL
AUDIO
RISER
(566-407, -1000)
HARNESS
733-997
P3
P2
4100-0622
DIGITAL
AUDIO
RISER
(566-407, -1000)
HARNESS
733-997
P3
P2
4100-0622
DIGITAL
AUDIO
RISER
(566-407, -1000)
TB3 TB3 TB3
Loop wires once through the supplied ferrite beads as shown
DASHED
LINES ARE
FOR STYLE 7
OPERATION
NODE P
(STYLE 4
ONLY)
DAR TO
PRIMARY
INPUT
NODE Q
(STYLE 4
ONLY)
DAR TO
PRIMARY
INPUT
NODE R
(STYLE 4
ONLY)
Figure Notes:
1. All wiring is 24 AWG to 18 AWG , twisted-pair.
2. Maximum wire distance: 2,500 feet (762 meters) from digital audio controller primary to the digital audio riser card.
3. Maximum distance between subsequent nodes: 2,500 feet (762 meters).
4. Maximum line distance and capacitance between nodes:
18 AWG: 40 Ohms maximum , 0.05 uF maximum
24 AWG: 135 Ohms maximum, 0.055 uF maximum
5. All wiring that leaves the building requires the 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protector at each entry or exit to the building. A maximum of four overvoltage protectors are allowed. Each 2081-9044 adds 6 Ohms and 0.006 uF.
6. Wiring must be free of all grounds.
7. Maximum number of digital interface cards per digital audio riser: 31.
8. All riser wiring is supervised and power-limited.
9. Audio wiring is not to be mixed in the same jacket with other wiring (including other audio wiring).
10. In applications where no Digital Audio Controller is connected to the field wiring (such as a synchronized audio application or a
non-synchronized application with multiple network microphone s), all DAR interface cards are wired secondary to primary.
Figure 4-20. Digital Audio Interconnections (4100-1311 Digital Audio Controller)
4-25
Chapter 4 Networking
Network Audio Wiring (continued)
Distributed
Microphone
Interconnections
Figure Notes:
1. Leave the 4.7 K, ½ W resistors (378-056; yellow/violet/red) on the
“+” to “-” terminals of unused contacts.
2. All wiring is 18 AWG to 14
AWG, twisted-shielded pair.
3. Audio wiring is not to be mixed in the same jacket with other wiring
(including other audio wiring).
4. AC voltage rating: 10
VRMS (maximum)
5. DC voltage rating: 1 VDC
(maximum)
6. Maximum number of analog interface cards per audio riser: 31.
7. All wiring that leaves the building requires the
2081-9044 Overvoltage
Protector at each entry or exit to the building.
8. Maximum wire distance:
10,000 feet (3,048 meters).
9. Wiring must be free of all grounds.
10. Set audio input card jumpers as shown in Aux
Audio Input Module
Installation Instructions
579-160.
11. All riser wiring is supervised and
power-limited.
A Distributed Microphone is used between audio nodes in a network system where each node has its own local audio (its own Digital Audio Controller) but needs to be able to play the microphone channel from a separate node’s Digital Audio Controller.
For a distributed microphone application, the 4100-0622 Digital Riser Interface
(566-407, -1000) has a single digital to analog converter that can be set to convert any single channel of the Digital Audio Riser (DAR) stream to analog. This analog output is connected to a second Digital Audio Controller’s remote microphone input or to the microphone input of a
4100-1240 Input Option Card (566-037). DIP switches configure the channel selection and density.
Figure 4-21 is an illustration of the distributed microphone application wiring. Refer to the
Switches and Indicators section for switch settings to configure the distributed microphone channel output.
(566-409, -1028)
(566-407, -1000)
(566-409, -1028)
Figure 4-21. Distributed Microphone Interconnections
Reference for
MCC DARIC
Installation
For information of the installation of Multiple Digital Command Centre (MCC) Digital Audio
Riser Input Option Cards (DARICs) refer to the latest revision of document 574-844.
4-26
Digital Audio PDI Termination Plug
Overview A Digital Audio Riser Termination Plug (734-183) is provided with every Digital Audio
Controller or Digital Audio Riser Module. You must use this termination plug to properly terminate the Digital Audio Signal on the PDI.
Installing a Digital
Audio PDI
Termination Plug
To properly terminate the Digital Audio Signal on the PDI, you must install the termination plug into P7 of the Node’s last bay that has Digital Audio. The Digital Audio Controller should be the first item and the Digital Audio Termination Plug the last item in the Digital Audio PDI
Bay-to-Bay wiring. See Figure 4-22.
Place the Digital Audio PDI
Termination Plug into P7 of the
Node’s last bay with Digital Audio.
Figure 4-22. Installing a Digital Audio PDI Termination Plug
Introduction
Chapter 5
The System Power Supply (SPS)
This chapter describes how the system power supply (SPS) is installed and configured by the factory. Check the information in this chapter to make sure the SPS is installed correctly.
In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic
Page
5-1
Chapter 5 The System Power Supply (SPS)
SPS Specifications
Table 5-1 summarizes the specifications for the SPS.
Input/Output/
Battery
Specifications
Table 5-1. Input and Output Specifications
AC Input Specifications
SPS in Standard U.S./Canada FACP or
4100-5111/5112 SPS
4 A Maximum
120 VAC @ 60 Hz, nominal
SPS in Standard International FACP or
4100-5113 SPS
2 A Maximum
220/230/240 VAC @ 50 or 60 Hz
DC Output Specifications
All SPSs
SPS IDNet Output (see note)
Minimum: 19.9 VDC (Special Applications)
Maximum: 31.1 VDC
Ripple: 2 VDC p-p @ full load (9 A)
30 V or 35 V @ 1/2A; 36.75V maximum; 3,333 bits per second
Battery Charger Specifications
Input Voltage Range
Output Float Voltage
High Voltage Output
Output Current Limit
21-33 VDC
27.4 VDC ±500 mV @ 20 o
C, temperature compensated at -24mV to -36mV/×C (32 o
F to
120 o
F or 0 o
C to 49 o
C)
29.1 V @ 3.3 A
1.4 A (For 6.2 - 18 Ah battery)
3.3 A (Default; for 18-50 Ah battery- Canadian; for
18-110 Ah battery - U.S.)
Note:
•
•
The battery circuit is supervised.
When it is necessary to activate large numbers of output devices on IDNet peripherals (such as piezo sounders), the output voltage is increased to 35V to provide sufficient voltage at the end of line to activate the piezo. The higher voltage state is an alarm condition for the purpose of standby battery calculation. The 30V output is the normal condition and is used to prolong battery standby. The system
CPU will activate the boost feature when 10 LED, Piezo or other outputs are activated.
•
•
•
AC power must be provided to the 4100ES from a dedicated AC branch circuit. The AC input is supervised.
220/230/240 VAC SPS only: The service branch circuit breaker should be sized to handle at least 150 percent of the total required by all of the power supplies in the system. If more than a 13 A branch circuit is required then multiple dedicated branch circuits should be used instead.
The 4100ES is a configurable system. Each system must be evaluated for battery standby requirements based upon the configuration. 4100ES systems can be configured with multiple sets of batteries if necessary. A basic 4100ES system can achieve 24 hours standby with 12.7 Ah batteries.
For UL Listed systems, up to 110 Ah batteries may be used. For ULC Listed systems, up to 50 Ah batteries may be used. Refer to the Sales Engineering battery calculation tool for assistance.
5-2
Chapter 5 The System Power Supply (SPS)
SPS Specifications (continued)
SPS Current
Consumption
Table 5-2 summarizes battery standby capabilities for the SPS. Voltage assumed is 24 VDC,
which is the rated battery voltage for lead-acid type batteries.
Table 5-2. SPS Current Specifications
Standby Conditions
• No alarms (NACs normal)
• IDNet LED ON, no IDNet devices connected
Add to above for each additional set of 50 IDNet devices in standby, with IDNet at
30 V
Total current for fully loaded IDNet channel (250 devices) in standby
Current
175 mA
40 mA
375 mA
Current
Alarm Conditions
• 3 NACs ON
• IDNet LED ON, no IDNet devices connected
Add to above for each set of 50 IDNet devices in alarm, 20 LEDs ON
185 mA
80 mA
Add to above for each set of 50 IDNet devices in alarm, LEDs OFF 50 mA
Total current for a fully loaded IDNet channel (250 devices) in alarm, 20 LEDs ON 475 mA
•
•
Note:
Additional standby conditions: Trouble relay activated, power trouble LED on, IDNet LED on, battery charger off, auxiliary power load = 0 mA
Additional alarm conditions: Trouble relay activated, power trouble LED on, IDNet LED on, battery charger off, auxiliary power load = 0 mA, NAC alarm load = 0 mA, IDNet = 35 V
The Notification Appliance Circuits on the SPS are rated for Special Application and for
Regulated 24 VDC operation per UL864, 9th Edition.
When used with the Notification Appliances listed in Table I (Appendix I) or Table J
(Appendix J), each NAC is rated for 3A, and total SPS capacity is rated at 9A. This rating is the
UL864 Special Application rating. Appliances listed in Table I or Table J are synchronized per
UL864, between all NACs on the SPS, and any NACs on a SPS, RPS, or XPS within the same
4100ES system.
For use with Notification Appliances not listed in Table I or Table J, each circuit is rated for 2A maximum, with a total Notification Appliance load of 4A per SPS. This rating is the UL 864
Regulated 24 VDC rating. Synchronization of strobes and other appliances requires use of the associated, Listed, compatible Synchronization Module. Consult supplier of Notification
Appliances for synchronization limits and details.
Simplex Appliances (Table I) May not be mixed with Wheelock Appliances (Table J) on a single power supply. A 4100ES system with mix of appliances from Table I and Table J will not meet the UL 864 9th Edition requirement for Visual synchronization (10 milliseconds) between power supplies. Appliances listed in Table I will be consistently out of visual sync with appliances in Table J by about 30 milliseconds. Appliances listed Table I will be notably out of audible sync with appliances in Table J by a consistent (Wheelock leading by 1/2 second). In order to meet the requirements for visual and audible sync system wide, all appliances in the system must be exclusively from either Table I or Table J.
Non-pulsing, linear-type Notification Appliances, such as horns or bells may be used up to the full rating (3A / NAC, 9A total for the SPS).
5-3
Chapter 5 The System Power Supply (SPS)
SPS Configuration
Overview
This section contains information about SPS jumpers and DIP switches. Refer to Chapter 4 of
this document for information on setting the jumpers.
Jumper Settings P1: Earth connect jumper. Note that the P1 location is clearly designated on the PCB silk screen.
• Position 1 – 2: Enables Earth fault monitoring.
• Position 2 – 3: Disables Earth fault monitoring.
Only one power module should be set for earth fault monitoring for each location within a system. Normally, the SPS in the CPU bay is set to monitor for earth faults. If there is a second
SPS connected to the same set of batteries, that SPS should have earth fault monitoring disabled. Other power modules that can be set to monitor earth fault conditions are TPS, RPS and XBC. When located under common 0V with a TPS, the TPS should be set to monitor earth faults, and other co-located power modules should be set to disable earth fault monitoring.
P2: If the SPS IDNet outputs are being used, you may change P2 to configure the IDNet shield connection. Note that the P2 pin 1 location is towards P3.
• Position 1 – 2: Connects the shield to 0 V (default).
• Position 2 – 3: Connects the shield to earth ground.
P3: City Card and Relay Card operation. Note that the P3 pin 1 location is towards P2.
• Position 1-2: Install in position 1-2 only if a relay card 4100-6033 is installed and has relay
3 programmed for operation other than "Trouble"
• Position 2-3: (default) For City Card operation and for use with 4100-6033 if relay 3 is programmed for "activate on trouble" operation
Setting the Device
Address
Refer to Appendix A to set the device address for the SPS with DIP switch SW1.
5-4
Chapter 5 The System Power Supply (SPS)
SPS LED Indications
LEDs The SPS has the following LEDs:
LED1 (yellow). Illuminates when NAC 1 is ON or in Trouble.
LED2 (yellow). Illuminates when NAC 2 is ON or in Trouble.
LED3 (yellow). Illuminates when NAC 3 is ON or in Trouble.
LED4 (yellow). Illuminates to indicate a communications loss with the system CPU; normally off. If this LED is blinking, try re-loading the software to FLASH.
LED5 (yellow). Indicates IDNet status.
• Slow blink: Class A open circuit trouble.
• Fast blink: Short circuit trouble.
• On steady: No devices detected/ channel failure.
• Normally off.
LED6 (yellow). Indicates power supply status.
• Single blink: Positive earth fault.
• Double blink: Negative earth fault.
• Triple blink: Battery trouble.
• Quadruple blink: Charger trouble.
• On steady: Overcurrent fault.
• Normally off.
LED7 (green). Illuminates when the power supply is powered from the AC line. Off when the power supply is de-energized, or when it is using battery backup power.
5-5
Chapter 5 The System Power Supply (SPS)
Troubleshooting
Overview This section contains explanations of trouble messages that may appear on the 4100ES display when using the SPS. Heading text in the left margin shows the error message, while the paragraph next to it describes the likely cause of the message.
IDNet Power
Monitor Trouble
Extra Device
Class A Trouble
Earth Fault
Search
Short Circuit
There is no output voltage from the power supply.
Appears if one or more extra devices (i.e., devices that have not been configured for the IDNet channel) are one the system. Only one message appears, regardless of the number of extra devices found.
There is an open on the IDNet channel. A hardware reset is required to reset the trouble.
Comes up during the Earth Fault Search diagnostic function. Once the search is initiated, the front panel display indicates how far along the search process has progressed (10%, 25%…
75%), and then shows the results of the search. The result either identifies the offending circuit or indicates that the earth fault could not be found. SPS circuits (IDNet, NAC, and aux power) are searched. System alarm and trouble processing is suspended during the search.
Appears when a short is detected on the IDNet channel. This status clears automatically when the short circuit is removed.
Channel Fail Appears when each device on the IDNet channel has been configured, and when none of the devices are communicating on the channel. This message does not appear if there are no configured devices on the IDNet channel.
No Answer/Bad
Answer
Occurs when the 4100ES is put into a diagnostic mode and finds a device not responding, or responding unreliably. Refer to the ES Panel Programmer’s Manual (574-849) for information on how to perform this diagnostic.
Output Abnormal Occurs when 24 VDC is not present on TrueAlarm devices or when TrueAlarm sensor bases with relay driver outputs are not properly supervised or when isolator devices are in isolation mode.
5-6
Introduction
Chapter 6
4100ES SPS Field Wiring
This chapter shows how 4100ES devices are wired to notification appliances. Most of the connections shown herein are reverse-polarity NACs, IDNet circuits, and power circuits.
In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic
General Field Wiring Guidelines
SPS NAC Field Wiring Guidelines
SPS IDNet Field Wiring Guidelines
Page
6-1
Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring
General Field Wiring Guidelines
General
Guidelines
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Make sure these guidelines are accounted for before wiring:
All wires must be 18 AWG, or as the local code dictates.
Conductors must test free of all grounds.
All wiring must be done using copper conductors only, unless noted otherwise.
If shielded wire is used,
the metallic continuity of the shield must be maintained throughout the entire cable length.
the entire length of the cable must have a resistance greater than 1 Megohm to earth ground.
Underground wiring must be free of all water.
In areas of high lightning activity, or in areas that have large power surges, the 2081-9027 Transient
Suppressor should be used on monitor points.
Wires must not be run through elevator shafts.
Wires that run in plenum must be in conduit.
Splicing is permitted. All spliced connections must either be soldered (resin-core solder), crimped in metal sleeves, or encapsulated with an epoxy resin. When soldering or crimped metal sleeves are used, the junction must be insulated with a high-grade electrical tape that is as sound as the original insulating jacket. Shield continuity must be maintained throughout.
A system ground must be provided for earth detection and lightning protection devices. This connection must comply with approved earth detection per NFPA780.
Only system wiring can be run together in the same conduit.
6-2
Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring
General Field Wiring Guidelines (continued)
Power-Limited
Guidelines
Make sure these guidelines are accounted for before wiring for power-limited systems:
•
•
•
Non-power limited field wiring (AC power, batteries, City connection) must be installed and routed in
the shaded areas shown in Table 6-1.
Power-limited field wiring must be installed and routed in the non-shaded areas shown in Table 6-1,
with the exception of City wiring.
Excess slack should be kept to a minimum inside the back box enclosure. The wiring should be neatly dressed and bundled together using wire ties. Anchor power-limited wiring to tie points, as shown in
CONDUIT ENTRANCE
FOR POWER-LIMITED
WIRING
POWER-LIMITED
WIRING
CONDUIT ENTRANCE
FOR NON-POWER
LIMITED WIRING
NON-POWER LIMITED
WIRING
TIE POINT
(LOCATION MAY VARY)
•
•
Figure 6-1. Power-Limited Wiring
Tie the wiring located between bays to the internal wiring troughs, if applicable.
When powering remote units or switching power through relay contacts, power for these circuits must be provided by a power-limited power supply listed for fire-protective signaling use. An EOL relay must be used to supervise the auxiliary power circuit.
Continued on next page
6-3
Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring
General Field Wiring Guidelines (continued)
Power-Limited
Guidelines
• Auxiliary power only: Supervision must be provided if the auxiliary power circuit is to be wired as a power-limited circuit. In order to connect a circuit using power-limited wiring, the devices being powered must all be addressable, or a UL Listed EOL relay must be used to supervise the circuit.
Refer to Figure 6-2 for wiring directions for the EOL relay.
TO AUX POWER
Note: The 2098-9739 Relay is used as an example.
Other UL Listed 24VDC
EOL relays can be used, depending on the application.
RED
2098-9739
END OF
LINE RELAY
BLACK
YELLOW
IDC
LAST IDC
DEVICE
RESISTOR
Figure 6-2. The EOL Relay
6-4
Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring
Power Supply Wiring Distances
Overview
Before wiring from any type of power supply to notification appliances, check Table 6-1 and
Table 6-2 for wiring distances.
Class A NAC
Wiring Table
Table 6-1 lists the maximum distances from the NAC terminal block to the last appliance in a
Class A configuration, depending on wire gauge and current. Use Table 6-1 to calculate wire
distances for your application if you are using Class A wiring.
Table 6-1. Class A Wiring Distances
0.25 A
0.50 A
0.75 A
1.00 A
1.25 A
1.50 A
1.75 A
2.00 A
2.25 A
2.50 A
2.75 A
3.00 A
Alarm Current
@ 24 VDC
Max Distance with 18 AWG
Max Distance with 16 AWG
Max Distance with 14 AWG
Max Distance with 12 AWG
420 ft. (128 m) 667 ft. (203 m) 1,063 ft. (324 m) 1,691 ft. (515 m)
210 ft. (64 m) 334 ft. (102 m) 532 ft. (162 m) 845 ft. (258 m)
140 ft. (43 m)
105 ft. (32 m)
222 ft. (68 m)
167 ft. (51 m)
354 ft. (108 m)
266 ft. (81 m)
564 ft. (172 m)
423 ft. (129 m)
84 ft. (26 m)
70 ft. (21 m)
60 ft. (18 m)
53 ft. (16 m)
133 ft. (41 m)
111 ft. (34 m)
95 ft. (29 m)
83 ft. (25 m)
213 ft. (65 m)
177 ft. (54 m)
152 ft. (46 m)
133 ft. (41 m)
338 ft. (103 m)
282 ft. (86 m)
242 ft. (74 m)
211 ft. (64 m)
47 ft. (14 m)
42 ft. (13 m)
38 ft. (12 m)
35 ft. (11 m)
74 ft. (23 m)
67 ft. (20 m)
61 ft. (19 m)
56 ft. (17 m)
118 ft. (36 m)
106 ft. (32 m)
97 ft. (30 m)
89 ft. (27 m)
188 ft. (57 m)
169 ft. (51 m)
154 ft. (47 m)
141 ft. (43 m)
DC
Resistance
6 Ohms
3 Ohms
2 Ohms
1.5 Ohms
1.2 Ohms
1 Ohm
0.86 Ohm
0.75 Ohm
0.67 Ohm
0.60 Ohm
0.55 Ohm
0.50 Ohm
•
•
•
•
Max Distance = distance from SPS/RPS to last appliance.
This table is calculated at 49 degrees Centigrade (120 degrees Fahrenheit). If you are installing in locations that could be exposed to higher temperatures, refer to NEC Table 8.
Distances are based on a 3 V drop, and take into account the worst-case panel output voltage.
If circuit integrity wire is used instead of housing cable in a fire-rated enclosure, reduce wiring distances by 38 feet (12 m) for every 10 feet (3 m) of potential exposure.
6-5
Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring
Power Supply Wiring Distances (continued)
Class B NAC
Wiring Table
Table 6-2 lists the maximum distances from the NAC terminal block to the last appliance in a
Class B configuration, depending on wire gauge and current. Use Table 6-2 to calculate wire
distances for your application if you are using Class B wiring.
Table 6-2. Class B Wiring Distances
0.25 A
0.50 A
0.75 A
1.00 A
1.25 A
1.50 A
1.75 A
2.00 A
2.25 A
2.50 A
2.75 A
3.00 A
Alarm Current
@ 24 VDC
Max Distance with 18 AWG
Max Distance with 16 AWG
Max Distance with 14 AWG
Max Distance with 12 AWG
DC
Resistance
840 ft. (256 m) 1,335 ft. (407 m) 2,126 ft. (648 m) 3,382 ft. (1,031 m) 12 Ohms
420 ft. (128 m) 667 ft. (203 m) 1,063 ft. (324 m) 1,691 ft. (515 m) 6 Ohms
280 ft. (85 m) 445 ft. (136 m)
210 ft. (64 m) 334 ft. (102 m)
709 ft. (216 m)
532 ft. (162 m)
1,127 ft. (344 m)
845 ft. (258 m)
4 Ohms
3 Ohms
168 ft. (51 m)
140 ft. (43 m)
120 ft. (37 m)
105 ft. (32 m)
267 ft. (81 m)
222 ft. (68 m)
191 ft. (58 m)
167 ft. (51 m)
425 ft. (130 m)
354 ft. (108 m)
304 ft. (93 m)
266 ft. (81 m)
676 ft. (206 m)
564 ft. (172 m)
483 ft. (147 m)
423 ft. (129 m)
2.4 Ohms
2 Ohms
1.71 Ohms
1.5 Ohms
93 ft. (28 m)
84 ft. (26 m)
76 ft. (23 m)
70 ft. (21 m)
148 ft. (45 m)
133 ft. (41 m)
121 ft. (37 m)
111 ft. (34 m)
236 ft. (72 m)
213 ft. (65 m)
193 ft. (59 m)
177 ft. (54 m)
376 ft. (115 m) 1.33 Ohms
338 ft. (103 m) 1.2 Ohms
307 ft. (94 m)
282 ft. (86 m)
1.09 Ohms
1 Ohm
•
•
•
•
Note:
Max Distance = distance from SPS or RPS to last appliance.
This table is calculated at 49 degrees Centigrade (120 degrees Fahrenheit). If you are installing in locations that could be exposed to higher temperatures, refer to NEC Table 8.
Distances are based on a 3 V drop, and take into account the worst-case panel output voltage.
If circuit integrity wire is used instead of housing cable in a fire rated enclosure, reduce wiring distances by 38 feet (12 m) for every 10 feet (3 m) of potential exposure.
6-6
Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring
SPS NAC Field Wiring Guidelines
Guidelines Review the following guidelines for NACs before you begin NAC field wiring.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
All wiring is 18 AWG (minimum) to 12 AWG (maximum).
All wiring is supervised and power-limited.
The maximum alarm current is 3 A per circuit. The supervisory current is 2.03 mA at
24 VDC.
The nominal voltage rating is 24 VDC, 2 V p-p ripple (maximum).
The total available current from the SPS is 9 A, unless it is used for REGULATED
24 VDC notification appliances, where the SPS/RPS is rated for 4Amps notification. Any current used for card power by modules plugged into the PDI, as well as any auxiliary 24 VDC current, must be deducted from the total available current.
Terminal designations “+” and “-” are for the alarm state.
All 4901-, 4903- and 4904- series appliances are Special Application with SPS. SPS is rated 9A, 3A per circuit. SPS regulated rating per UL864 is 4A maximum per SPS. Compatible TrueAlert nonaddressable appliances for NACs are:
- 4901-series Horn
1
- 4903-series A/V
1
- 4903-series S/V
1
- 4904-series V/O
1
- 4906-Multi-Candela-series A/V, V/O, S/V, and others
1
- 49CMT-series, Multi-Tone
1, 2
- 49CMTV-series, Multi-Tone/Multi-Candela
1, 2
1
A maximum of 70 appliances can be supported per circuit.
2
Each 49CMT and 49CMTV series appliance counts as 2.7 regular appliances and no more than 25 49CMT or 20 49CMTV-series appliances may be placed on one circuit.
6-7
Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring
SPS NAC Wiring
Class A NAC
Wiring
To connect the SPS to reverse-polarity, non-addressable notification appliances using Class A
wiring, read the following instructions and refer to Figure 6-3.
1. Route wire (between 12 and 18 AWG) from the “B+”, “B-”, and SHIELD outputs on TB2 of the SPS to the appropriate inputs on a peripheral notification appliance. Use NAC1, NAC2, or NAC3.
2. Route wire from the first appliance to the next one. Repeat for each appliance.
3. Route wire from the last appliance to the A+ and A- inputs on the same NAC circuit of TB1 of the SPS.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each NAC output you want to use.
5. Leave the 10 K, ½ W, brown/black/orange resistor (378-030) on each unused circuit. The circuit must connect “B+” to “B-” terminals. No external end-of-line resistor is needed for circuits in use.
BLK
RED 12 AWG to 18AWG
TYPICAL
APPLIANCE
IMPORTANT: Conductors must test
free of all grounds.
RED BLK
TYPICAL
APPLIANCE
Leave the 378-030 EOL
Resistor (10 K Ohm, ½ W; brown/black/orange) on unused circuits
RED BLK
Ferrite beads required for RF immunity to CE specified levels.
Use kit 4100-5129.
3
2
1
P1
NAC2 NAC3
B+ B- A+ A-
NAC1
B+ B- A+ A-
NAC1
LED1 LED2
B+ B- A+ A-
NAC1
LED3
Figure 6-3. Class A NAC Wiring
6-8
Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring
SPS NAC Wiring (continued)
Class B NAC
Wiring
To connect the SPS to appliances using Class B wiring, read the following instructions and
1. Route wire (between 12 and 18 AWG) from the B+, B-, and SHIELD outputs on TB2 of the
SPS to the appropriate inputs on a peripheral notification appliance. Use NAC1, NAC2, or
NAC3.
2. Route wire from the first appliance to the next one. “T” tapping is not allowed. Repeat for each appliance.
3. Route wire from the last appliance to the EOLR harness (10K ohm, 1/2W: P/N 733-894,
PID# 4081-9008).
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each NAC output you want to use.
5. Leave the factory installed EOL Resistor (10 K Ohm, ½ W; brown/black/orange) on each unused circuit. The circuit must connect “B+” to “B-” terminals.
IMPORTANT: Conductors must test
free of all grounds.
R E D
R E D
12 AWG to 18AWG
Ferrite bead required for RF immunity to CE specified levels. Use kit 4100-5129.
3
2
1
P1
R E D
4081-9008 EOL Harness
10K 1/2W (133-894)
E D
TYPICAL
APPLIANCE
E D
TYPICAL
APPLIANCE
B L K
NAC2
Leave the factory installed
EOL Resistor (10 K Ohm, ½
W; brown/black/orange) on unused circuits
NAC3
B+ B- A+ A-
NAC1
LED1
B+ B- A+ A-
NAC1
LED2
B+ B- A+ A-
NAC1
LED3
Figure 6-4. Class B Wiring
•
•
Note:
Notification appliances are rated per individual nameplate label.
Maintain correct polarity on terminal connections. Do not loop wires under terminals.
6-9
Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring
SPS IDNet Field Wiring Guidelines
IDNet Wiring Up to 250 IDNet initiating devices are supported on the SPS IDNet channel. The SPS supports both Class A and Class B wiring.
Class A wiring allows IDNet appliances to communicate with the SPS even in the event of a single open circuit somewhere in the loop. Class A wiring requires that two wires are routed from the SPS to each IDNet appliance, and then back again to the SPS.
Class B wiring allows “T” tapping, and therefore requires less wiring distance per installation than Class A. Additionally, Class B wiring does not require end-of-line resistors, because each
IDNet appliance communicates directly to the SPS.
Guidelines Make sure these guidelines are accounted for before installing the cards.
• For Style 4 operation:
- The maximum distance to any device is 2500 feet (762 m) for 126-250 devices, or 4000 feet (1220 m) if 125 or fewer devices are used.
- “T” taps are allowed.
- The maximum total wire allowed is 10,000 feet, or 0.58uF.
- Maximum allowed line-to-line capacitance (“+” to “-” terminals) is 0.58 uF. For
applications with shielded wire, be sure that the total capacitance from line to line plus the shield to either line is no more than 0.58 uF.
• For Style 6 operation, the maximum loop distance is 2,500 feet (762 m). “T” taps are not allowed.
• Use supplied ferrite beads with the SPS. Loop wires once through the supplied ferrite
Figure 6-5. Loop Wiring as Shown
6-10
Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring
SPS IDNet Wiring
Class A Wiring 1. Route wire (between 12 and 18 AWG) from the B+, B-, and SHIELD outputs on TB1 of the
SPS to the appropriate inputs on a peripheral IDNet appliance.
2. Route wire from the first IDNet appliance to the next one. Repeat for each appliance.
3. Route wire from the last IDNet appliance to the A+ and A- inputs on TB1 of the SPS.
IMPORTANT:
x
Max. allowed wire capacitance is .58uF.
Maximum distance to any device is 2500 feet (126-250 devices) or 4000 feet (up to
125 devices)
x
Class A wiring must consider the above limits under worst-case fault conditions.
Neither the "A" or "B" terminals may exceed the distances noted above.
Ferrite beads required.
IDNet
DEVICE
IDNet LOOP
(CLASS A / STYLE G)
B+ B- SHLD A+ A-
IDNet
3
2
1
P1
Figure 6-6. Class A Wiring
6-11
Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring
SPS IDNet Wiring (continued)
Class B Wiring 1. On TB1, jumper B+ to A+, and jumper B- to A-.
2. Route wire (between 12 and 18 AWG) from the A+, A-, and SHIELD outputs on TB1 of the
SPS to a junction box. Begin “T” tapping at the junction box. The maximum distance between the SPS and an IDNet appliance is 2,500 feet (762 m). The maximum wiring
distance for any IDNet circuit is 10,000 feet (3,048 m) or 0.58 uF.
Figure 6-7 shows Class B wiring.
IDNet LINES TO DEVICES
(CLASS B / STYLE 4)
Ferrite bead required.
IMPORTANT:
x
Max. allowed wire load is 10,000 feet
total or .58uF. Maximum distance to any device is 2500 feet (126-250
devices) or 4000 feet (up to 125 devices)
B+ B- SHLD A+ A-
IDNet
3
2
1
P1
Figure 6-7. Class B Wiring
6-12
Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring
SPS Auxiliary Power Wiring
Guidelines • All wiring is 18 AWG and 12 AWG.
• All wiring is power-limited.
• When a NAC is configured as an auxiliary power circuit, no end-of-line resistor is used.
• Auxiliary power may be taken from the dedicated auxiliary power tap or from an unused
NAC.
• If auxiliary power is taken from NAC terminals, the NAC must be configured as an auxiliary power point type in the 4100 Programmer.
• Remove end-of-line resistors from NACs when used for auxiliary power.
• External wiring from the dedicated auxiliary power tap is not supervised unless an end-ofline relay is wired coil to auxiliary power, and Normally Open contacts are monitored by a system power point. Relay current must be considered as part of the load. When NACs are used as aux. power taps, they are supervised for overcurrent or short-circuit faults.
• All wiring that leaves the building requires overvoltage protection. Install module
2081-9044 wherever wire enters or exits the building. A maximum of four 2081-9044
Modules may be connected to one channel.
• Voltage rating: 24 VDC (nominal), 2 V P-P ripple (maximum).
• The following devices are compatible with 24VDC aux. power:
- 2088-series relays and door holders
- 2098-series four-wire smoke detectors
- 2190-series monitor and signal ZAMs
- 4090-series IDNet ZAMs
- 4098-series four-wire smoke detectors and duct detectors
- 2190-9039 Printer
- 4190-9050/9051 4-20 mA ZAMs
- 4603-9101 LCD Annunciator
• The total auxiliary current available is 5 A. The total current available for the entire SPS is
9A (special application) or 4A regulated 24VDC, including NAC, auxiliary, and card power.
6-13
Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring
SPS Auxiliary Power Wiring (continued)
Wiring The SPS can connect to auxiliary power appliances via the dedicated auxiliary power tap
(TB3). If more power is needed, any of the three NAC outputs can be used for auxiliary power.
12 AWG to 18 AWG
AUXILIARY
POWER
AUXILIARY
POWER
AUXILIARY
POWER
TB2 B+ B- A+ AB+ B- A+ AB+ B- A+ A-
Ferrite bead
Required for RF immunity to CE specified levels.
Use kit 4100-5129.
Devices
Dedicated auxiliary power screw terminal
(configured in the
Programmer)
SPS
NAC points must be reconfigured as auxiliary power output points in the programmer
Primary
TB1 TB2
4090-9117
ISOLATOR
24V
0V
To SPS/
RPS
TB1 TB2
4090-9117
ISOLATOR
Class A aux power wiring requires the use of 4090-9117 IDNet Power Isolators, as shown above. AUX POWER
0V 24V TB3
12 AWG to 18 AWG
AUXILIARY
POWER
Figure Notes:
1. Maximum allowed NAC current consumption (aux power plus NACs): 9A (Special Application) or 4A regulated 24V dc.
2. Maximum per NAC: 3 A
3. Maximum allowed auxiliary power current consumption: 5A (total supply).
4. Maximum per auxiliary output: 2 A
5. Class A wiring is possible only if a 4090-9117 Power Isolator is used.
6. International systems require ferrite beads. Use kit 4100-5129.
Figure 6-8. Auxiliary Power Wiring
Return
6-14
Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring
SPS Auxiliary Relay Wiring
Guidelines The SPS includes one on-board, programmable relay.
• All wiring must be between 18 AWG and 12 AWG.
• When power through auxiliary contacts provided by the SPS, wiring is power-limited.
• When power through auxiliary contacts is not provided by the SPS, use an in-line fuse
(208-165). If the power source is not power-limited to the requirements of UL864, wiring is to be segregated to the non-power-limited spaces of the cabinet.
• The relay circuit is not supervised.
• The relay circuit is rated to switch 2 A at 30 VAC or 30 VDC, resistive load.
• Relay contacts are Form C dry contacts. Suppression is provided to Earth. Do not switch voltages greater than rating, or damage may result.
Wiring
Figure 6-9 shows SPS auxiliary relay wiring.
TB2 B+ B- A+ AB+ B- A+ AB+ B- A+ A-
Dedicated auxiliary relay terminal block
SPS
NO C NC TB4
12 AWG to 18AWG
NORMALLY
CLOSED
COMMON
NORMALLY
OPEN
Figure 6-9. Auxiliary Relay Wiring
6-15
Introduction
In this chapter
Chapter 7
EPS with IDNet 2
This chapter describes how the EPS with an IDNet 2 card is installed and configured by the factory. Check the information in this chapter to make sure the EPS is installed correctly.
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic
Page
7-1
Chapter 7 EPS with IDNet 2
EPS Specifications
Card
Specifications
IDNAC
Terminals
LEDs
Trouble Scroll
Button
Address
Switch
RUI+ Earth
Detect
Table 7-1. Card Specifications
)$.!# )$.!# )$.!# !58
Auxiliary/
NAC
A
B
C
D
E
CH1
CH2
CH3
COM
IDNET 2
4 Pin Harness
Card Power /
Comms
Connection to PDI
IDNet 2
Card
Battery Disconect
Jumper
Connection to Bridge
Operating
Conditions
Connection to
Batterries
AA+ B-
LOOP 2
B+
AA+ B-
LOOP 1
B+
City Card Connection
Figure 7-1. EPS Card Layout
Earth Detect Jumper
32 o
F - 120 o
F (0 o
C-49 o
C)
Up to 93% relative humidity at 90 o
F (32 o
C), non-condensing.
Internal
Battery
Charger
AC Input Specifications:
Note: Maximum circuit breaker is 20A.
Electrical
Specifications
DC Output Specifications: 29 V @ 9 A
Up to 5A normal standby (AUX, "Card Power" and Backplane Power). Any nonalarm current must be subtracted from 9A alarm current.
Standby – No alarms, SLCs normal: 135 mA / Alarm - 12A @ 24V DC Input
(battery standby)
With IDNet 2: 235 mA
Per IDNet/IDNAC device: 0.8 mA
Charges up to 50 Ah (ULC-S527) or 115 Ah (UL-864 Listing) sealed lead-acid batteries connected to the power supply.
High Voltage Output: 29 V
Output Current Limit: 3.3 A
120 V, 50/60 Hz, 4.6 A
220/230/240 V, 50/60 Hz, 2.3 A
IDNAC SLCs 29.5V maximum @ 3A per circuit; 4,000 bits/second
Earth Fault Earth fault detection is 10k minimum to any circuit.
SNAC wiring fault Detection
Short circuit detection is 5k ohms maximum for SNAC. Open circuit detection is
15k.
Battery
Standby
(sealed leadacid batteries)
Battery standby requirements are dependent on system configuration. The
4100ES can support up to 115 Ah batteries (UL) and 50 Ah batteries (ULC).
With 115 Ah batteries, a system could be configured to draw 3.8A for 24 hours, followed by 15 minutes at 9.375A. Or a configuration with 0.375A for 24 hours and 5 minutes alarm at 9.375 would require 12.7 Ah batteries or larger. Refer to
Sales Engineering Calculation Tool for specific configurations.
7-2
Chapter 7 EPS with IDNet 2
EPS Configuration
Setting the EPS
Address
55
56
57
58
59
60
51
52
53
54
47
48
49
50
43
44
45
46
39
40
41
42
35
36
37
38
31
32
33
34
27
28
29
30
23
24
25
26
19
20
21
22
15
16
17
18
11
12
13
14
7
8
9
10
3
4
5
6
Address SW 1-2 SW 1-3
1
2
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
The DIP Switch SW2 is used to set the EPS address as identified in the Panel Programmer job
(see the section on Programming for more information). From left to right, these switches are designated as SW2-1 through SW2-8. The function of these switches is as follows:
• SW2-1 .
This switch sets the baud rate for the internal 4100 communications line running between the card and the
4100 CPU. Set this switch to ON.
ON
Most Significant Bit
Least Significant Bit
• SW2-2 through SW1-8 .
These switches set the card’s address
within the FACP. Refer to Table 7-2 for a complete list of
the switch settings for all of the possible card addresses.
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(DIP Switch shown is set at address 31)
You must set these switches to the value assigned to the module by the Panel Programmer.
Table 7-2. EPS Card Addresses
Figure 7-2. DIP Switch SW2
SW 1-4 SW 1-5 SW 1-6 SW 1-7 SW 1-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Address SW 1-2 SW 1-3 SW 1-4 SW 1-5 SW 1-6 SW 1-7 SW 1-8
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
91
92
93
94
87
88
89
90
83
84
85
86
79
80
81
82
75
76
77
78
71
72
73
74
67
68
69
70
61
62
63
64
65
66
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
7-3
Chapter 7 EPS with IDNet 2
EPS Configuration (continued)
Earth Connect
Jumper
The EPS Earth Fault Enable/Disable jumper allows you to enable or disable Earth Fault detection.
• To enable the function: Place the jumper block on pins 1 and 2
• To disable the function: Place the jumper block on pins 2 and 3
Battery
Disconnect
Jumper
P18
Function Enabled
3 2 1
Function Disabled
Figure 7-3. Earth Connect Jumper Positions
Earth Fault detection is set to active on one EPS per battery location. A battery location is any cabinet connected to the master 4100 communications channel without a TIC. A transponder cabinet is another battery location. Only ONE earth fault circuit should be active on all power supplies (EPS, TPS, SPS, RPS) within a battery location. Disable earth fault detection on all other power supplies at a battery location. Any system that includes one or more EPS MUST have earth detection from an EPS.
Jumper P16 selects Low Battery operation.
• Jumper in Top position (pins 2-3) will cause panel shutdown when batteries are depleted.
• Jumper in Bottom position (pins 1-2) will allow panel to continue operating.
For S527 compliance, jumper must be installed to top position of P16.
Note: When jumper is set to pins 2-3, EPS will not power-up from battery.
Shut Down
When
Depleted
3
2
P16
1
Continue
Operation
When Depleted
Figure 7-4. Battery Disconnect Jumper Positions
7-4
Chapter 7 EPS with IDNet 2
EPS IDNet 2 Configuration
Setting the
Address
The DIP Switch SW1 is used to set the IDNet 2 address as identified in the Panel Programmer job (see the section on Programming for more information). From left to right, these switches are designated as SW1-1 through SW1-8. The function of these switches is as follows:
• SW1-1 .
This switch sets the baud rate for the internal 4100 communications line running between the card and the
4100 CPU. Set this switch to ON.
ON
Most Significant Bit
Least Significant Bit
• SW1-2 through SW1-8 .
These switches set the card’s address
within the FACP. Refer to Table 7-3 for a complete list of
the switch settings for all of the possible card addresses.
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(DIP Switch shown is set at address 31)
You must set these switches to the value assigned to the card by the Panel Programmer.
Figure 7-5. DIP Switch SW1
Table 7-3. 4100-3109 Card Addresses
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
57
58
59
60
53
54
55
56
49
50
51
52
45
46
47
48
41
42
43
44
37
38
39
40
33
34
35
36
29
30
31
32
25
26
27
28
21
22
23
24
17
18
19
20
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
5
6
7
8
2
3
4
Address SW 1-2 SW 1-3 SW 1-4 SW 1-5 SW 1-6 SW 1-7 SW 1-8
1 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Address SW 1-2 SW 1-3 SW 1-4 SW 1-5 SW 1-6 SW 1-7 SW 1-8
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
89
90
91
92
85
86
87
88
81
82
83
84
77
78
79
80
73
74
75
76
69
70
71
72
65
66
67
68
61
62
63
64
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
7-5
Chapter 7 EPS with IDNet 2
Connections
Connection to the
Power
Distribution
Module
The EPS is powered by the Power Distribution Module (PDM). The PDM takes power directly from a dedicated AC line and the two backup batteries, and distributes power to each bay in the cabinet.
To connect the EPS to the PDM using Harness 734-257:
1. Ensure that the PDM is connected to an incoming 120 VAC power source. Keep the AC wires to the right side of the cabinet, in the non-power-limited area, and at least one inch away from all other wires.
2. Connect the harness connector to the PDM.
3. Connect the separate Red and Black wires (with Yellow female terminations) to Plugs P2
(Black) and P3 (Red) on the EPS.
4. Connect the White and Black wires, which terminate together in a White snap-on connector, to the bulkhead connector at the bottom of the EPS assembly.
Bottom view of the EPS assembly
*220/230/240 V PART NUMBERS
APPEAR IN ITALICS.
Bulkhead connector
FERRITE
BEAD
120 VAC
50, 60 Hz, 4.6 A
120 V
NEUTRAL
HARNESS
(734-257)
(734-258)*
BATTERY
HARNESS
FUSED AT 20 A
GROUND
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
BACK BOX
GROUND
SCREW
PDM
(566-246)
(or 566-248; see below)*
EPS
P2
P3
BLACK WIRE
RED WIRE
Second bulkhead connector here in
220/ 230/240 V version
120 V TO TRANSFORMER
THROUGH BULKHEAD
CONNECTOR
HARNESS 733-015
TO 24 V BATTERY
566-248
PDM TERMINAL
BLOCK
50/60 Hz
2.3 A
Figure 7-6. PDM/Battery Connections
7-6
Chapter 7 EPS with IDNet 2
Troubleshooting
LED Trouble
Indicator
Overview
The code produced by the lit indicator LEDs corresponds to a trouble that is either occurring on
the System or on the SLC Channels. See Table 7-4 for the LED definitions.
See Table 7-5 and Table 7-6 for the LEDs and their codes.
Table 7-4. The 8 EPS indicator LEDs.
LED:
A, B, C, D, E
These 5 yellow LEDs are used to signal various trouble conditions on the EPS and its SLC. See the troubleshooting section for
LED system codes.
LEDs
Trouble
Scroll
Button
LED:
CH1, CH2, CH3
These LEDs report any troubles on the corresponding SLC channels.
LED COMM Indicates a 4100 Comms trouble.
A
B
C
D
E
CH1
CH2
CH3
COM
Scroll Push
Button (SW1)
The “Trouble Scroll” button to is used to scroll through multiple troubles, since only one trouble can be displayed at a time.
Figure 7-7. LED Location
System Trouble
LED Codes
System troubles are indicated by LEDs A to E.
Table 7-5. System Trouble LED Codes
A B C D E Description:
No Trouble: There are no troubles detected on the system.
AC Fail: The AC power is disconnected but the battery is working.
Low Battery: The battery charge is under 22 V.
Battery Cutout: The Battery charge is below 20V. At this point if jumper
P16 is set to “battery disconnect when depleted” the system will shut down.
Depleted/Missing Battery: If jumper P16 is not set to “battery disconnect when depleted” this trouble will appear when the battery charge is below 20 V. This code will also appear if the system cannot detect the battery.
Charger Trouble: There is a trouble with the battery charger.
Card Overcurrent: The EPS module is drawing too much current.
Negative Earth: The circuit is shorted to ground on the negative wire.
Positive Earth: The circuit is shorted to ground on the positive wire.
Negative Earth on RUI+: The RUI circuit is shorted to ground on the negative wire
Positive Earth on RUI+: The RUI circuit is shorted to ground on the positive wire.
City Circuit 1 Trouble: The trouble configured on the City Card’s circuit one has bee triggered.
City Circuit 2 Trouble: The trouble configured on the City Card’s circuit two has bee triggered.
AuxNAC Open: Depending on the chosen configuration, either is the
Aux circuit or the NAC circuit is open.
AuxNAC Short: Depending on the chosen configuration, either is the
Aux circuit or the NAC circuit is experiencing a short circuit.
AuxNAC Overcurrent: Depending on the chosen configuration, either is the Aux circuit or the NAC circuit drawing too much current.
Unassigned.
Unassigned.
7-7
Chapter 7 EPS with IDNet 2
Troubleshooting (continued)
SLC Channel
Trouble LED
Codes
SLC Channel troubles are indicated by LEDs A to E, as well as LEDs CH1, CH2, and CH3.
The channel LEDs, CH1, CH2, and CH3 indicate the channel which is experiencing the trouble. For example, if the CH1 LED is lit, the trouble is occurring on SLC channel 1.
The lettered LEDs, A to E, describe the trouble.
CH1 CH2 CH3 A
Table 7-6. SLC Channel Trouble LED Codes
B C D E
Description:
IDNAC Channel Fail: The channel is not responding.
IDNAC Short Circuit: There is a short circuit on the channel.
IDNAC Duplicate Device: There are 2 devices on the channel that have the same address.
IDNAC Missing device: There is a device programmed on the channel that it cannot detect.
IDNAC Extra Device: The channel is detecting the address of a device that has not been programmed.
IDNAC Wrong Device: The channel is detecting a device that had been programed as the wrong
“type”.
IDNAC Controller Fail: The channel can no longer detect the controller.
IDNAC Address Out of Range: There is a device with an unsupported address on the channel.
IDNAC Isolator Trouble: An isolator on the channel is open.
IDNAC Overcurrent: A device on the Channel is drawing too much current.
IDNAC Earth Trouble: There is a positive or a negative earth fault on the channel.
Unassigned
Unassigned
7-8
Chapter 7 EPS with IDNet 2
Troubleshooting (continued)
Trouble Messages
Table 7-7 explains the EPS trouble messages that may appear on the FACP display.
Table 7-7. EPS Trouble Messages
Message
AC Fail
Low Battery
Depleted/Missing
Battery
Card Overcurrent
Definition
AC power is not present or is too low for proper system operation
The battery voltage is below the 24 V nominal level by 10% or more.
The battery is either below 20 V or completely undetected.
Charger
Extra Device
Earth Fault Search
Short Circuit
Channel Fail
The EPS is drawing more current than it should. Check for faults on the circuit.
The battery charger is either defective or being heavily loaded by batteries. Read charger current at front panel, if charger current is approximately 3 A, batteries are likely loading the charger. Remove battery connection and measure the output of the EPS. If the output is
27.6 (or close, temperature dependent), there is a possibility of depleted batteries or a bad set of batteries. Allow batteries to charge or replace them if they do not take a charge.
Appears if one or more extra devices (i.e., devices that have not been configured for the IDNAC channel) are one the system. Only one message appears, regardless of the number of extra devices found.
Comes up during the Earth Fault Search diagnostic function. Once the search is initiated, the front panel display indicates how far along the search process has progressed (10%, 25%…75%), and then shows the results of the search. The result either identifies the offending circuit or indicates that the earth fault could not be found. EPS circuits (IDNet,
IDNAC, and aux power) are searched. System alarm and trouble processing is suspended during the search.
Appears when a short is detected on the IDNAC channel. This status clears automatically when the short circuit is removed.
Appears when each device on the IDNet channel has been configured, and when none of the devices are communicating on the channel. This message does not appear if there are no configured devices on the
IDNAC channel.
7-9
Introduction
In this chapter
Chapter 8
EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring
This chapter describes the EPS wiring. This includes the wiring of the IDNet 2 card.
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic Page
8-1
Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring
EPS Wiring Overview
General Wiring
Guidelines
• Conductors must test free of all grounds.
• All wiring must be done using copper conductors only, unless noted otherwise.
• If shielded wire is used:
- the metallic continuity of the shield must be maintained throughout the entire cable length.
- the entire length of the cable must have a resistance greater than 1 Megohm to
earthground.
• Underground wiring must be free of all water.
• In areas of high lightning activity, or in areas that have large power surges, the 2081-9027
Transient Suppressor should be used on monitor points.
• Wires must not be run through elevator shafts.
• Splicing is permitted. All spliced connections must either be soldered (resin-core solder), crimped in metal sleeves, or encapsulated with an epoxy resin. When soldering or crimped metal sleeves are used, the junction must be insulated with a high-grade electrical tape that is as sound as the original insulating jacket. Shield continuity must be maintained throughout.
• A system ground must be provided for earth detection and lightning protection devices. This connection must comply with approved earth detection per NFPA780.
• Only system wiring can be run together in the same conduit.
Power-Limited
Guidelines
• Non-power limited field wiring (AC power, batteries, City connection) must be installed and
routed in the shaded areas shown in Figure 8-1.
• Power-limited field wiring must be installed and routed in the non-shaded shown in Figure
8-1, with the exception of City wiring.Excess slack should be kept to a minimum inside the
back box enclosure. The wiring should be neatly dressed and bundled together using wire ties. Anchor power-limited wiring to tie points.
• Tie the wiring located between bays to the internal wiring troughs, if applicable.
• When powering remote units or switching power through relay contacts, power for these circuits must be provided by a power-limited power supply listed for fire-protective signaling use.
Conduit Entrance for
Power-Limited Wiring
Conduit Entrance for
Non-Power Limited
Wiring
Power-Limited Wiring
Non-Power Limited
Wiring (Route in
Shaded Area Only)
Tie Point
(Location
May Vary)
Figure 8-1. Power-Limited Wiring Guidelines
8-2
Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring
EPS Class B IDNAC Wiring
Wiring Overview The EPS has three SLCs for power and communication wiring.
Each SLC powers and communicates with up to 127 IDNAC devices. The EPS is wired to compatible devices and appliances, such as the TrueAlert ES and TrueAlert Addressable lines
(both multi and fixed candela), using Class B circuitry.
Class B wiring allows “T” tapping. EPS wiring is inherently supervised due to individual device level communications. End-of-line resistors are not required.
IDNAC Wiring
Guidelines
Review the following guidelines for IDNACs before you begin the field wiring.
• Only IDNAC and other compatible devices are allowed on the SLCs.
• Maximum of 127 devices or 139 unit loads per channel. The maximum number of visuals that can be synchronized on one circuit is 127.
• Maximum of six isolators between any appliance and SLC terminals. Maximum 12 isolators per SLC.
• Maximum 30 devices connected directly to any isolator terminal pair.
• The required wire is UTP (Unshielded Twisted Pair). This wiring must have a capacitive rating of less than 60 pF/ft and a minimum 3 twists (turns) per foot.
• All wiring is 18 AWG to 12 AWG.
• All wiring is supervised and power-limited.
• The maximum alarm current is 3 A per circuit.
• Maximum cable load is 10,000 feet (3,048 m) per channel. Maximum wire length from panel to any device is 2,500 feet (762 m).
• The nominal voltage rating is 29 VDC.
• The total available current from the EPS is 9 A.
• All visible appliances wired from an EPS are synchronized to appliances on SPS, XPS,
TPS, 4009A, 4009T and other EPS within the system. Appliances wired from TrueAlert
Adapter (4905-9816) are not synchronized to other system appliances.
IDNAC Speaker
Wiring
Application
Guidelines
Note: TrueAlert ES speaker appliances supervise connected audio circuits for open-circuit conditions and report those troubles to the host FACP through the EPS. They can also detect short circuit conditions, but the EPS reports such events as an open circuit. The panel reports these conditions as AUDIO
WIRING TROUBLE. The amplifier electronics and power supply of a connected audio NAC must still supervise that circuit for short circuit conditions and earth faults.
Do not mix TrueAlert ES speakers with conventional speakers on an audio NAC.
IDNAC wire length limitations dictate the maximum audio NAC wire run length between a
TrueAlert ES speaker and the connected 4100ES amplifier. The maximum IDNAC wire run length from the EPS to a device, with a Repeater extension is 8,000 feet. Because the maximum distance between the amplifier and the EPS is 2500 feet over RUI/RUI+, the total allowable distance between the amplifier and the TrueAlert ES device speaker is 10,500 feet.
This distance may be further restricted by the Speaker Circuit Wiring Distance Tables of the connected amplifier.
Continued on next page
8-3
Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring
EPS Class B IDNAC Wiring (continued)
IDNAC Speaker
Wiring
Application
Guidelines
CLASS B Audio Wiring: Connect a maximum of 127 IDNAC speakers to Class B wired audio
NAC. A Class B wired audio NAC connected to TrueAlert ES speakers can employ T-Tap and
Wire Branch wiring topologies.
Do not connect an End-Of-Line Resistor to a class B wired audio NAC connected to
TrueAlert ES speakers.
CLASS A Audio Wiring: Connect a maximum of 70 TrueAlert ES speakers to a Class A audio
NAC. Speakers must be wired in a standard Class A loop fashion.
Except as noted above, audio NAC wiring connected to TrueAlert ES speakers must follow the requirements of the connected 4100ES amplifier.
Ferrite Beads Ferrite beads must be used for Class B wiring.
1. Install the ferrite bead close to the EPS field wiring terminals for lowest radiated emissions (before the wires leave the box).
2. Loop the wires through the bead as shown.
Figure 8-2. Ferrite Bead Installation
8-4
Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring
EPS Wiring Tables
Class B Wiring
Tables
Use the following tables to calculate the load.
TrueAlert ES Speakers and Speaker/Visible appliances must use Table 8-4 in place of Table
8-2.
Maximum wiring distance is the shorter of the distance limits as calculated by alarm current voltage drop or by reaching the communications distance limit.
Table 8-1. UTP Wiring Limit Based on
Alarm Current
Distance to the Last Appliance
Alarm
Current
20
AWG
18
AWG
16
AWG
14
AWG
12
AWG
0.050
4000 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft
0.100
2644 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft
0.150
1763 ft 2802 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft
0.200
1322 ft 2102 ft 3342 4000 ft 4000 ft
0.250
1058 ft 1681 ft 2674 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft
0.300
881 ft 1401 ft 2228 ft 3542 ft 4000 ft
0.350
755 ft 1201 ft 1910 ft 3036 ft 4000 ft
0.400
661 ft 1051 ft 1671 ft 2657 ft 4000 ft
0.450
588 ft 934 ft 1485 ft 2362 ft 3756
0.500
529 ft 841 ft 1337 ft 2125 ft 3380
0.750
353 ft 560 ft 891 ft 1417 ft 2254 ft
1.000
264 ft 420 ft 668 ft 1063 ft 1690 ft
1.250
212 ft 336 ft 535 ft 850 ft 1352 ft
1.500
176 ft 280 ft 446 ft 708 ft 1127 ft
1.750
151 ft 240 ft 382 ft 607 ft 966 ft
2.000
132 ft 210 ft 334 ft 531 ft 845 ft
2.250
118 ft 187 ft 297 ft 472 ft 751 ft
2.500
106 ft 168 ft 267 ft 425 ft 676 ft
2.750
3.000
96 ft 153 ft 243 ft 386 ft 615 ft
88 ft 140 ft 223 ft 354 ft 563 ft
Wiring distance must not exceed 4000 ft
Table 8-3. Ohms per 1000 ft
Gage
20 AWG
18 AWG
16 AWG
14 AWG
12 AWG
Ohms/1000 ft
11.347
7.137
4.488
2.8230
1.7750
Table 8-2. UTP Wiring Limit Based on Communication
7.58
6.97
6.45
6.00
5.60
5.24
4.92
4.75
14.54
12.96
11.38
10.14
9.12
8.28
4.64
4.38
4.15
3.94
3.74
3.56
3.40
50
55
60
63
30
35
40
45
10
15
20
25
1
5
85
90
95
65
70
75
80
Line
Impedance
(Ohms)
Devices
Distance to the Last Appliance
20
AWG
18
AWG
16
AWG
14
AWG
12
AWG
1252 ft 2038 ft 3241 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft
1142 ft 1815 ft 2887 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft
1003 ft 1595 ft 2536 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft
893 ft 1420 ft 2258 ft 3590 ft 4000 ft
804 ft 1278 ft 2033 ft 3231ft 4000 ft
730 ft 1160 ft 1845 ft 2934 ft 4000 ft
668 ft 1061 ft 1688 ft 2683 ft 4000 ft
614 ft 977 ft 1553 ft 2469 ft 3928 ft
568 ft 904 ft 1437 ft 2285 ft 3634 ft
528 ft 840 ft 1336 ft 2124 ft 3378 ft
493 ft 784 ft 1247 ft 1982 ft 3152 ft
462 ft 734 ft 1168 ft 1856 ft 2952 ft
434 ft 690 ft 1097 ft 1744 ft 2774 ft
419 ft 665 ft 1058 ft 1682 ft 2675 ft
409 ft 650 ft 1034 ft 1643 ft 2613 ft
386 ft 614 ft 976 ft 1552 ft 2468 ft
366 ft 581 ft 924 ft 1469 ft 2337 ft
347 ft 551 ft 877 ft 1394 ft 2217 ft
330 ft 524 ft 833 ft 1325 ft 2107 ft
314 ft 499 ft 794 ft 1262 ft 2006 ft
299 ft 476 ft 757 ft 1203 ft 1913 ft
3.24
3.10
100
105
286 ft
273 ft
454 ft
435 ft
723 ft
691 ft
1149 ft
1099 ft
1827 ft
1748 ft
2.97
2.85
2.73
2.58
110
115
120
127
262 ft 416 ft 662 ft 1052 ft 1673 ft
251 ft 399 ft 634 ft 1009 ft 1604 ft
241 ft 383 ft 609 ft 968 ft 1539 ft
228 ft 362 ft 576 ft 915 ft 1456 ft
Wiring distance must not exceed 4000 ft
Note: Although the required wire for IDNAC circuits is twisted pair (controlled impedance) wiring, some applications will wish to take advantage of existing wiring that is not twisted pair. This is only allowed if both conductors of the IDNAC circuit reside in the same metal conduit, and only under certain conditions. Check with your local sales office before using wiring that is not twisted pair.
Continued on next page
8-5
Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring
EPS Wiring Tables (Continued)
95
100
105
110
75
80
85
90
115
120
127
60
63
65
70
40
45
50
55
20
25
30
35
10
15
1
5
Table 8-4. UTP Wiring Limit for Speakers and Speaker/Visible devices based on Communication
Devices
20
AWG
1218 ft
1028 ft
853 ft
715 ft
603 ft
548 ft
501 ft
461 ft
427 ft
397 ft
370 ft
347 ft
326 ft
314 ft
307 ft
290 ft
275 ft
261 ft
248 ft
236 ft
225 ft
215 ft
206 ft
197 ft
189 ft
181 ft
Distance to the Last Appliance
18
AWG
1936 ft
1634 ft
1356 ft
1137 ft
959 ft
871 ft
797 ft
733 ft
678 ft
631 ft
588 ft
551 ft
518 ft
500 ft
488 ft
461 ft
436 ft
414 ft
394 ft
375 ft
357 ft
341 ft
326 ft
313 ft
300 ft
288 ft
16
AWG
3079 ft
2599 ft
2156 ft
1807 ft
1525 ft
1385 ft
1266 ft
1165 ft
1078 ft
1002 ft
935 ft
876 ft
823 ft
794 ft
776 ft
733 ft
694 ft
658 ft
626 ft
596 ft
568 ft
543 ft
519 ft
497 ft
476 ft
457 ft
14
AWG
4000 ft
4000 ft
3428 ft
2873 ft
2424 ft
2201 ft
2013 ft
1853 ft
1714 ft
1593 ft
1487 ft
1393 ft
1308 ft
1262 ft
1233 ft
1165 ft
1103 ft
1046 ft
994 ft
947 ft
903 ft
862 ft
825 ft
790 ft
757 ft
726 ft
171 ft 272 ft 432 ft 687 ft
Wiring distances must not exceed 4000 ft
1960 ft
1852 ft
1753 ft
1663 ft
1581 ft
1505 ft
1436 ft
1371 ft
1311 ft
1256 ft
1204 ft
1155 ft
1092 ft
3201 ft
2946 ft
2726 ft
2534 ft
2365 ft
2215 ft
2081 ft
2007 ft
12
AWG
4000 ft
4000 ft
4000 ft
4000 ft
3855 ft
3500 ft
8-6
Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring
EPS Wiring to Devices
Class B Wiring to
IDNAC Devices
To connect the EPS to appliances using Class B wiring:
1. Route the wire from the “+” and the “-”outputs on the EPS IDNAC terminal blocks (TB1,
TB2 or TB3) to the appropriate inputs on a peripheral notification appliance.
2. Route wire from the first appliance to the next one. “T” tapping is allowed. Repeat for each appliance.
3. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each IDNAC output you want to use.
Note: Notification appliances are rated per individual nameplate label. Maintain correct polarity on terminal connections.
IDNAC
Device
IDNAC
Device
IDNAC
Device
IDNAC
Device
IDNAC
Device
+ + - -
IDNAC1
Ferrite
Bead
+ + - -
IDNAC2
IDNAC
Device
+ + - -
IDNAC3
4009 IDNAC
Repeater
Dual Class A
Isolator (DCAI)
-05
Figure 8-3. Class B Wiring
Using a 4009 IDNAC Repeater extends the possible wiring distance and increases the current capacity of an IDNAC channel. Each IDNAC repeater has a capacity of 3A, and regenerates the IDNAC signal. Models 4009-9601 (platinum enclosure) and 4009-9602 (red enclosure) are compatible with the EPS. Refer to installation instructions 579-1019 for wiring details. All
IDNAC devices wired to the IDNAC repeater are synchronized to IDNAC devices wired to other EPS within the system.
To wire an IDNAC as a Class A circuit, one or more DCAI modules (4100-6103) is required.
Each DCAI includes 2 circuits, Class A, with fault isolation. Refer to 579-1029 for wiring details and installation instructions. Synchronization of audible/visible devices is maintained with the use of DCAI.
TrueAlert ES Speakers and Speaker/Visible appliances wired in a Class A circuit must use
Table 8-4 here in place of Table 4 in publication 579-1029 (4100 ES/4007 ES Installation
Instructions; 4100-6103 DCAI Card). The wiring limit distances shown in this table apply to maximum wiring loop length. The final maximum loop length is the shorter of this value or the value from Table 8-1.
8-7
Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring
EPS Wiring to Devices (continued)
Calculating Class
B wiring with
Isolators
When using Isolators, the maximum wire distance of each of these SLC branches from panel to
any device is the smaller of the values obtained from Table 8-2, and the Equation 1. See Table
Equation 1: Maximum SLC Wire Branch Length Based on Appliance Alarm Current Load
Distance (feet) = 6V - (.1 ohm * number of isolators on branch * branch alarm amps)
2 * (resistance per foot) * (branch alarm amps)
• Add the alarm loads of all the devices on an SLC wire branch and apply to Equation 1.
• Add the unit loads for all devices on an SLC wire branch and the number of isolators and
Maximum wire resistance protected by 1 isolator is 1.5 ohm (total, both wires).
.
Wire the devices as instructed in the “Class B Wiring to IDNAC Devices” section.
TO OTHER
DEVICES
TO OTHER
DEVICES
4905-9929
ISOLATOR
PORT
2
PORT
1
4905-9929
ISOLATOR
PORT
2
PORT
1
APPLIANCE APPLIANCE APPLIANCE APPLIANCE APPLIANCE
4905-9929
ISOLATOR
TO OTHER
DEVICES
PORT
2
PORT
1
PORT
1
PORT
2
4905-9929
ISOLATOR
Ferrite
Bead
+ + - -
IDNAC1
+ + - -
IDNAC2
+ + - -
IDNAC3
TO OTHER
DEVICES
Figure 8-4. Class B Wiring With Isolators
8-8
Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring
EPS Auxiliary Power Wiring
AUX/ NAC
Terminal
The AUX/NAC terminal block is located on the top right corner of the EPS.
Through the ES Panel Programmer, this point can be configured as either a 24V Auxiliary
(AUX) power or as a simple reverse polarity Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC).
IDNAC1
+ + - -
+AUX-
Auxiliary Power
Terminal Block
IDNAC1 IDNAC2 IDNAC3 AUX
Figure 8-5. AUX/NAC Terminal
Table 8-5. AUX/NAC Wiring Specification
Voltage rating:
24V Special Application
Rating: 2 A, maximum
Wiring gage:
18 AWG (min.) to 12 AWG (max.)
733-894
10K EOLR
TYPICAL APPLIANCES
NAC -
NAC+
Wiring Notes:
1. All wiring from the AUX/NAC is power limited.
2. Conductors must test free of all grounds and stray voltages before connection to appliances and panel.
IDNAC1
+ + - -
IDNAC2
+ + - -
IDNAC3
+ + - -
+AUX-
Figure 8-6. Simple NAC Wiring
3. Terminate Class B NACs as shown using 733- 894. For Canadian applications, mount end-of-line resistor to
TEPG-US Model 431537 EOL plate in accordance with ULC-S527.
4. If circuit is terminated with a 10k EOLR, at the terminals, remove this resistor before wiring.
5. If wiring is routed outside the building, use of a listed secondary protector is required. Use Simplex 2081-
9028 or 2081-9044. A protector must be installed at each building exit/entrance. Each 2081-9028 adds
0.2 ohms wiring resistance. 2081-9044 adds 6 ohms wiring resistance, and will greatly reduce wiring distance.
Table 8-6. NAC Wiring Limits
Alarm Current 20 AWG 18 AWG 16AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG Line Resistance ( Ohms )
0.25
617 ft 981 ft 1560 ft 2480 ft 3944 ft 14.00
0.50
0.75
1.00
1.25
308 ft
206 ft
154 ft
123 ft
490 ft
327 ft
245 ft
196 ft
780 ft 1240 ft 1972 ft
520 ft 827 ft 1315 ft
390 ft
312 ft
620 ft
496 ft
986 ft
789 ft
7.00
4.67
3.50
2.80
1.50
1.75
103 ft
88 ft
163 ft
140 ft
260 ft
223 ft
413 ft
354 ft
657 ft
563 ft
2.33
2.00
2.00
77 ft 123 ft 195 ft 310 ft 493 ft 1.75
Note: This Chart indicates the maximum distance for 1/4 -2A loads. Wiring distance is from the panel terminals to the last appliance. Use of a 2081-9044 protector reduces wiring distance.
Note: Output of AUX or NAC is 24V nominal. Minimum voltage is 19.5 @ full load and minimum battery; maximum is 31.5V at light load, high AC line. Aux Loads include 4601-9101 Annunciator, 4100-96xx series Annunciators, 4090 series of IDNet ZAMs and IAMs and any Listed device operating within the output limits of the AUX. Calculate wiring loss for actual devices used. Compatible Appliances include
4904 series of free-run strobes, 4901 series non-smartsync horns, 4098 series TrueAlarm Sounder
Base, 4090-9005 and -9006 SRP and 4009 NAC extenders, used in reverse-polarity activation mode.
8-9
Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring
IDNet 2 Card Wiring
Wiring Overview Each output from the IDNet 2 card can be wired as either an isolated Class A circuit or as two isolated Class B circuits.
Class A wiring provides an alternate communication path that allows communication to all devices to be maintained when a single open circuit fault occurs. Class A wiring requires two wires to be routed from the IDNet 2 Primary Terminals (B+, B-) to each device, and then back to the IDNet 2 Secondary Terminals (A+, A-). Wiring is in/out, “T” tapping is not allowed.
Class B wiring allows “T” tapping. IDNet 2 wiring is inherently supervised due to individual device level communications. End-of-line resistors are not required.
Wiring
Parameters
Table 8-7 identifies the IDNet 2 card wiring parameters that must be considered when
installing this card. For additional wiring information see the applicable installation documentation, or contact your authorized Simplex Product Supplier.
Table 8-7. IDNet 2 Card Wiring Parameters
Wiring Capacitance Parameters
Parameter
Maximum Supported Channel Capacitance;
Total of both loops
Value
The sum of line-to-line capacitance, plus the capacitance of either line-to-shield (if shield is present) = 0.6 µF (600 nF)
Capacitance between IDNet SLCs wiring
(between wires of the same polarity; plus to plus, minus to minus)
1 µF maximum (this is for multiple IDNet loops)
Wiring Distance Limits (see note below)
Channel Loading Class B Wiring, Total Channel Wiring Parameters, Including T-Taps
Class A Wiring, Total Channel Wiring
Parameters
Up to 125 devices
126 to 250 devices
Up to 125 devices
126 to 250 devices
Total Loop Resistance
18 AWG (0.82 mm
2
)
50 Ω maximum 35 Ω maximum
12 500 ft (3810m)
50 Ω maximum
4000 ft (1219 m) per loop, 12 500ft
(3810m) total
35 Ω maximum
2500ft (762 m) per loop, 10 000ft
(3048m) total
16 AWG (1.31 mm
2
)
14 AWG (2.08 mm
2
) 12 500 ft (3810m)
5000 ft (1524 m) per loop, 12 500ft
(3810m) total
2500ft (762 m) per loop, 10 000ft
(3048m) total
12 AWG (3.31 mm
2
)
Notes: Maximum wiring distance is determined by either reaching the maximum resistance, the maximum capacitance, or the stated maximum distance, whichever occurs first. Class A maximum distances are to the farthest device on the loop from either “B” or
“A” terminals. For Class B wiring, the maximum distance to the farthest device is limited to the stated Class A wiring distances.
Shielded wire is not required. Twisted wire is recommended for improved noise immunity.
Note: External wiring must be shielded (for lightning suppression) and 2081-9044 Overvoltage
Protectors must be installed at building exit and entrance locations.
Wiring Considerations using 2081-9044
Overvoltage Protectors
(2081-9044 is UL listed to
Standard 1459, Standard for Telephone Equipment)
Capacitance: Each protector adds 0.006 μ F across the connected line.
Resistance: Each protector adds 3
Ω
per line of series resistance; both IDNet lines are protected; 6 Ω per protector will be added to total loop resistance.
Maximum distance of a single protected wiring run is 3270 ft (1 km).
Refer to document number 574-832: 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protector Installation
Instructions for additional information.
8-10
Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring
IDNet 2 Card Wiring (continued)
Class A Wiring To wire the Loop terminals as a Class A circuit:
1. Set the jumper assigned to the loop to the “A” position, as shown in
• Loop A= Jumper P1 on the IDNet 2 card
• Loop B= Jumper P2 on the IDNet 2 card
• Loop C= Jumper P1 on the first IDNet Loop cards
• Loop D= Jumper P1 on the second IDNet Loop card
"
!
"
!
2. Shielded wire is not recommended. If shielded wires are present, cut and tape off the shield to prevent it from coming in contact with other components.
Figure 8-7. Class A
Jumper Setting
3. Route the wiring from the Primary Terminals (B+, B-) to the corresponding inputs on the first device.
4. Route wiring from the first device to the next as in/out. See Figure 8-8. Repeat for each
device.
5. Route the wiring from the last device to the panel.
6. Connect the wiring to the corresponding Secondary Terminals (A+, A-).
Devices
18 to 12 AWG
1 2 1 2
1 2
+
IDNet 2 Card
Figure 8-8. IDNet 2 Class A Wiring
Class A wiring notes:
1. If no remote isolators or isolator bases are on the loops, device addressing can be assigned without concern for sequence.
2. If remote isolators or isolator bases are on the loops, the required addressing approach is to start from the “B” side and assign each successive isolator a higher address than the isolator it
proceeds.
8-11
Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring
IDNet 2 Card Wiring (continued)
Class B Wiring When wiring the loop for Class B circuits, both the B+, B- and A+, A- terminals are available for parallel connections. Within the IDNet 2 circuitry, A+ is connected to B+, and A- is connected to B- so circuits can stem from either one. Additionally, two wires can be connected to each screw terminal.
To wire the Loop terminals as a Class B circuit:
1. Set the jumper assigned to the loop to the “B” position, as shown in
• Loop 1 = Jumper P1 on the IDNet 2 card
• Loop 2 = Jumper P2 on the IDNet 2 card
• Loop 3 = Jumper P1 on the left IDNet Loop card
• Loop 4 = Jumper P1 on the right IDNet Loop card
"
!
"
!
2. Route wiring from the Primary Terminals (B+, B-) to the corresponding inputs on the first device.
Figure 8-9. Class B
Jumper Setting
It is possible to add up to 4 circuits per IDNet loop on the terminal block
when using Class B wiring. See Figure 8-10 for the diagram.
3. Route wiring from the first device to the next as in/out as shown in
Figure 8-10. Repeat for each device.
Devices
1
Different Circuit Configurations
1
2
2
3
4 B+, B-
Terminals
B+
IDNet CIRCUIT A
BA+ A-
1
TB1
B+ B- A+ A-
2 Circuit Configuration
B+ B- A+ A-
4 Circuit Configuration
Note: For Class B wiring only, up to 4 parallel wiring “T”
taps may be made at the output terminal blocks
Figure 8-10. IDNet 2 Class B Wiring
Class B wiring Notes:
1. If no remote isolators or isolator bases are on the loops, device addressing can be assigned without concern for sequence.
2. If remote isolators or isolator bases are on the loops, the required addressing approach is to start at the output and assign each successive isolator a higher address than the isolator it proceeds. For
Class B wiring only, the “A” output and “B” output per loop are connected together in parallel for
wiring convenience.
8-12
Introduction
In this chapter
Chapter 9
PC Software Connections
The service port on the CPU daughter card allows the 4100ES panel to connect to a PC’s running important utilities, such as diagnostics, programming, CPU firmware downloading, and channel monitoring.
The panel can also connect to a remote PC through the 4100-9832 Service Modem or through the Ethernet.
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic
Ethernet Service Port and Serial Service Port
Page
9-1
Chapter 9 PC Software Connections
Software Modes
Software Modes There are three basic software modes that the service port or service modem can be used to connect to:
• Service and Diagnostics Mode
• Data Transfer Interface Mode
• Master Bootloader Interface Mode
Each mode is described below.
Service and Diagnostics Mode:
This is the default functionality when a PC is connected to the FACP. On a PC, this mode provides application startup messages, an ASCII interface to a UI command set for diagnostics, and event reporting. A pre-configured terminal emulator is part of the 4100ES software and can be launched from the programmer. The connection to a PC is made either through the serial port, through the service modem, or through the Ethernet port.
Option 1 Option 2 serial download cable
Laptop/PC running terminal emulation software
4100 Panel (with CPU modem card) running application
Modem
Laptop/PC running terminal emulation software
Figure 9-1. Service and Diagnostic Interface
Data Transfer Interface Mode:
In this mode, the ES Panel Programmer is enabled. This allows for slave downloading, as well as downloading a configuration and audio messages to the FACP, and uploading a configuration or history log from the FACP. Connection to a PC is made through the serial port, through the service modem or through the Ethernet port.
Option 1 Option 2
Laptop/PC running
Programmer software serial download cable
4100 Panel (with CPU modem card) running application
Modem
Laptop/PC running
Programmer software
Figure 9-2. Data Transfer Interface
Continued on next page
9-2
Chapter 9 PC Software Connections
Software Modes (continued)
Software Modes Master Bootloader Interface Mode:
This interface should be used when the Master executable is not functioning. It downloads the
Master CPU Exec firmware and the CFG.TXT file to the CPU using the serial port.
serial download cable
4100 Panel running Bootloader
Figure 9-3. Bootloader Interface
9-3
Chapter 9 PC Software Connections
Ethernet Service Port and Serial Service Port
Ethernet Service
Port Overview
(0566-719 only)
The Ethernet service port J1 on the CPU card (0566-719) is used to connect the panel to a local
PC. See Figure 9-4 for the port location.
SERVICE PORT (P5)
(for a serial connection)
DISPLAY PORT (P6)
SERIAL NUMBER
CHIP
ETHERNET PORT
(J1) RJ45 TYPE
CONNECTOR TO CPU
MOTHERBOARD (P9)
Figure 9-4. CPU card ports
The Ethernet service port connects to the front panel Ethernet connection through a standard straight (non-crossover) Ethernet Patch Cable. The service technician should connect his PC to the CPU card through this front panel connection with a standard straight Ethernet cable (see
Figure 9-5). If this connection is not available, you may plug directly into the CPU Card
connector J1 to the PC with a standard straight Ethernet cable.
Front Panel
Ethernet Service Port
Serial Service
Port Overview
Emergency Op
Figure 9-5. Front Panel Ethernet Service Port
The Serial Service Port P5 on the CPU card (0566, 149, 0566-692 and 0566-719) can also be
used to connect the Panel to a local PC. See Figure 9-4 for the port location.
To use this port, the technician must connect the serial service port cable on the PC directly to the serial Service Port (P5) on the card.
9-4
Introduction
In this chapter
Chapter 10
MNS/ECS Application
This chapter covers the configuration of a 4100ES system to operate as a mass notification system (MNS).
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic
Application of 4100ES as a UL2572 Mass Notification System
Page
10-1
Chapter 10 MNS/ECS Application
Application of 4100ES as a UL2572 Mass Notification System
General
Information
A 4100ES system with Basic Voice option 4100-9620 (analog) or 4100-9621 (digital) can be configured for operation as a Mass Notification System (MNS). Configuration of the system is to be done per UL2572, taking into account any special requirements resulting from a Risk
Analysis.
Hierarchy of
Operator
Interfaces
The 4100ES main user interface serves as the primary local control unit for the in-building
MNS, called the Autonomous Control Unit. It is an “authorized personnel” operator interface, that can take control of the paging and messaging features of the 4100ES system.
The ACU serves as the primary control station in the MNS, and as such has the highest priority among all operator interfaces attached to the 4100ES system, including network interfaces such as a TrueSite Workstation. The hierarchy of operation is specified by UL2572 as:
• Autonomous Control Unit (ACU)
• Local Control Unit (LOC)
• Central Command Station (CCS)
A Local Control Unit (LOC) is an in-building operator interface for authorized personnel to initiate messages and signaling in an emergency situation. An example of an LOC is a 4100
Remote Annunciator, configured with remote microphone and LED/Switch modules for activation of the paging and emergency message features of the 4100ES.
A Central Command Station (CCS) is a networked user interface, such as TrueSite
Workstation. These units can activate signaling over a local in-building or campus network. A
CCS is provided with a microphone, which may be a remote microphone, such as 4003-9803 wired from a 4100ES fire alarm node in the system. Another possibility would be a 4100-1244 remote microphone in a transponder bay installed into a console at the CCS location.
Alternately, a 4100ES may be rack-mounted as part of the command console, and the master microphone would be available for this function.
The hierarchy of the operator interfaces is programmed using Custom Control. For example, the ACU could have a switch programmed to be a priority 3, an LOC switch could be programmed as priority 4 and a CCS could have a switch programmed as priority 5. Refer to the ES Panel Programmer’s Manual (574-849) for detailed information about programming switch priority and writing custom control.
If transfer of control is required, LED/Switch points must be programmed to activate and to indicate the transfer of control to each desired location. These switches would be programmed at different priorities and the LEDs would indicate the status of control.
Refer to document 900-249, 4100 Upgrade Audio Enhancement Guide for details on how to configure an audio system with multiple command centers.
When any unit is in control, an LED must indicate the active control at each location. If a higher priority service takes control from a lesser priority service, that should be indicated by extinguishing the LED or indicator for the lesser priority service and lighting the LED or indicator for the greater priority service.
For example, if the LOC takes control, the CCS must be locked out from taking control and an indicator at the CCS must show that the LOC is in control. If the ACU then takes control from the LOC, the indication must change at both the LOC and CCS that the ACU now has control.
In this case, both the LOC and CCS must be locked from taking control.
10-2
Chapter 10 MNS/ECS Application
Application of 4100ES as a UL2572 Mass Notification System, Continued
Priority of Signals A Mass Notification System is often a combination of fire alarm and other signals. As such, it may receive signals that affect life safety that are other than fire alarm signals. Any signal that indicates a danger to Life Safety, including fire alarm, is the highest priority. The highest priority could also include intruder alert, tornado warning, or other signals as determined by the
Risk Analysis.
If multiple signals are received simultaneously, the priority of signals is:
1. Signals associated with life safety
2. Signals associated with property safety
3. Supervisory signals and trouble signals associated with life and/or property safety
4. All other signals
In the 4100ES system, signal priority can be selected by assignment of point type and further by custom control. Refer to the ES Panel Programmer’s Manual (574-849) for detailed information about programming input point priority and writing custom control.
Overriding Fire
Alarm Signals
An MNS/ECS system must have the capability to override any other notification signals. When the 4100ES is used as a combination fire alarm/MNS, the system programming determines which signal has priority. Just as an Evacuation Message has higher priority than an Alert
Message, system programming gives priority to MNS functions over other alarm functions.
In the event that a fire alarm signal is overridden by the MNS signal, and the MNS signal is then “silenced”, the building occupants need to be assured that the evacuation system is still functioning.
During the period the mass notification system has seized control of audible and/or visible notification appliances of a fire alarm, but before the mass notification relinquishes control, an audible and visible signal shall be actuated by the notification appliances at least once every thirty seconds, unless there is an active signal present, to be recognized by the usual building occupants.
With a 4100ES system, use Custom Control equations. A single flash and a short beep of audible and visible appliances meets this requirement. Alternately, an appropriate prerecorded message may be played. For example, a message instructing occupants to “shelter in place” may be played after a live microphone message. Risk Analysis by the AHJ should guide the appropriate pre-recorded messages. Switches for activation of special messages should be marked so as to be identifiable during an emergency by trained personnel.
Custom Control equations for the “chirp/flash” of audible and visible appliances are suggested below.
10-3
Chapter 10 MNS/ECS Application
Application of 4100ES as a UL2572 Mass Notification System, Continued
Timing Equations [INPUTS]
STATUS ON
P711 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAS PAGING - MASS PAGING HAS PRIORITY
CYCLE CONSTANT 3 25
A272 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI =9,9
P714 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | TIMER FOR PAGING STROBE
[END OUTPUTS]
Appliance Control
Equations
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
P714 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | TIMER FOR PAGING STROBE
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI =9,9
SIG903 | SIGB | RVISUAL | TRUEALERT ZONE 4 - ALL VISUAL DEVICES
TRACK ON PRI =9,9
SIG901 | SIGB | SSIGNAL | TRUEALERT ZONE 2 - ALL AUDIBLE DEVICES
UPLAYQ CHL4 =4 VOLUME = NOEFFECT NORESET NOFLUSH SPK =L260 TRK = NONE
PRI =9,9
PRINT PANEL "MASS NOTIFICATION ACTIVE"
USILENCE CHL4 PRI =9,9
[END OUTPUTS]
Public Accessible
Panic Switches
Some applications call for panic switches that are accessible to the public. Panic switches are input devices used to signal a non-fire emergency, and could be used to trigger events and/or announcements in the building. If these switches are installed in public areas of a building they would typically not automatically trigger a Mass Notification event. Instead, they would trigger the Command Center to investigate the signal and make the appropriate announcement.
A variety of devices can be connected to a Simplex 4100ES via an individual addressable module (IAM). The IAM should be programmed as a priority 2 device, or other non-fire alarm point. The IAM may be used to monitor any contact type initiating device. Use a contact-type initiating device listed to ANSI/UL 2017.
The Command Center may also use security cameras and/or intercom capabilities to allow them to make a more rapid response and a Mass Notification announcement if necessary.
10-4
Chapter 10 MNS/ECS Application
Programming and Configuration
Programming the
4100ES to Meet
MNS
Requirements
The programming for an MNS is not special; it can be accomplished using priority, modes, and
Custom Control. Any technician who has attended training and become a certified 4100ES Fire
Alarm Technician should be capable of programming the 4100ES for MNS combined with Fire
Alarm service.
Program a key for the reset of MNS panic switch alarms. The key mode should be type “PBT”, with the reference address of P216. The adjacent LED should be programmed to track the status of the reset window timer, illuminating for the duration of the reset cycle. The reset window timer is A214.
MNS requires that dedicated LEDs be programmed for any MNS-specific service. It is appropriate to use Priority 2 for MNS alarms. Pri 2 could also be used to indicate another alarm, such as CO. In a case of multiple Pri 2 alarms, LEDs must be added for each type of service. Program these LEDs to track the state of the points involved in that service.
Figure 10-1. Supervisory and Trouble LEDs for both MNS and Fire
MNS can also have Supervisory inputs, which should still be programmed as Supervisory in order to activate the sounder and the Supervisory indicator. A dedicated LED for each type of service must also be programmed. For example, a fire supervisory would light a dedicated fire supervisory LED, as well as the general supervisory LED. An MNS supervisory would light a dedicated MNS supervisory LED as well as the general supervisory LED. This is to comply with a UL2572 requirement for an indication of each type of service without activating any controls.
The same requirement holds when there are MNS specific points. They should light the general trouble LED and sound the piezo. They should also be programmed such that an LED tracks the trouble status of MNS points and a separate LED tracks the trouble status of fire alarm points.
Minimum
Configuration for
LOC and ACU
The minimum configuration for LOC and ACU is listed below.
Controls
Indicators
Table 10-1. Minimum Configuration for LOC and ACU
• MNS Reset
• MNS Alarm activation
• MNS Take Command/Relinquish Command
• CO Reset
• MNS Supervisory LED
• MNS Trouble LED
• CO Alarm LED
• ACU in Control LED
• CCS in Control LED
• LOC in Control LED
10-5
Chapter 10 MNS/ECS Application
Programming and Configuration, Continued
Access and
Security
Information for the 4100ES
System
Voice Control
Centers
Communications Security: Level 1
Stored Data Security: Level 0
Physical Security: Level 1
Access Control: Level 1
The primary solution for controlling and activating voice messages on a Simplex fire alarm network is utilizing the standard 4100ES LED and Switch user interface along with a microphone for live voice announcements.
In the example below the operator first selects the destination for a message on the left and then selects the audio source or pre-recorded message to play on the right.
Configuration
Limitations
Figure 10-2. Voice Message Configuration Example
In a system with multiple voice command centers a take control button with an in-control indicator would also be appropriate to configure on your annunciator with microphone.
The 4100ES and 4120 network support a variety of programmable options for utilizing prioritization and request/cancel procedures for taking control of the system. This feature prevents operators from interfering with each other in a system with multiple command centers.
In some cases different colored peripherals or boxes are specified for Mass Notification.
Contact sales engineering for information on meeting these requirements.
A 4100ES is not UL Listed for Background Music/General Paging or Security when configured for MNS, because the UL testing did not include these services in the test scope.
Note: The TrueSite Workstation is not listed for UL 2017 operation. The TSW functionality must be limited to remote annunciator active when used for MNS operations.
10-6
Chapter 10 MNS/ECS Application
Programming and Configuration, Continued
Amber Strobes The 4100ES is compatible with the amber strobes listed below:
• 4906-9205, -9206, -9207 (addressable, visible only, “ALERT” lettering)
• 4906-9107, -9108 (non-addressable, visible only, “ALERT” lettering)
• 4906-9208, -9211 (visible only, with both an amber and a clear lens strobe, respectively marked “ALERT” and “FIRE”)
Other models of Simplex brand strobes are available with “ALERT” instead of “FIRE”. Refer to the installation instructions for each power supply for complete lists of compatible appliances.
MNS Wiring The 4100ES field wiring is “power-limited”, with the exception of AC input, battery and the
City Circuit option module wiring. For MNS, the term “power limited” has been replaced by the NEC term “class 2”. Wherever this document uses the UL864 term “power limited”, it can be taken to mean class 2. Any wiring deemed “power limited” for UL864 is deemed “class 2” for MNS.
10-7
Overview
Appendix A
The Device Configuration DIP Switch
Addressable cards include a bank of eight DIP switches. From left to right (see Figure A-1) these switches are designated as SWx-1 through SWx-8. The function of these switches is as follows:
• SWx-1. This switch sets the baud rate for the internal 4100 communications line running between the card and the CPU. Set this switch to ON.
• SWx-2 through SWx-8. These switches set the card’s address within the 4100 FACP.
Refer to Table A-1 for a complete list of the switch settings for all of the possible card addresses.
Note: You must set these switches to the value assigned to the card by the ES Panel Programmer.
4100 Comm. Baud Rate.
Switch (SWx-1)
Must Be Set to ON
DIP Switches SWx-2 through
SWx-8 set the Card Address.
Figure shows an Address of 3.
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4
Figure A-1. DIP Switch SWx
5 6 7 8
A-1
Appendix A
The Service Port
Overview
Table A-1. Card Addresses
Address SW 1-2 SW 1-3 SW 1-4 SW 1-5 SW 1-6 SW 1-7 SW 1-8 Address SW 1-2 SW 1-3 SW 1-4 SW 1-5 SW 1-6 SW 1-7 SW 1-8
1 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
2 ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON 62 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
4 ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON 64 OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON
6 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON 66 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON
8
10
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
68
70
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
12 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 72 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON
13 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF 73 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF
14 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON 74 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
16 ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON 76 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
17 ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF 77 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF
18 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON 78 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON
19 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 79 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
20 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON 80 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON
21 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 81 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF
22 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON 82 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON
23 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 83 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF
24 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 84 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON
26 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON 86 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON
27 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 87 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
28 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON 88 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON
29 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 89 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF
30 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 90 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON
31 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 91 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
32 ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON 92 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON
33 ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 93 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
34 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 94 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
35 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 95 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
36 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 96 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON
38 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 98 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON
40 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 100 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON
41 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 101 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF
42 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 102 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON
43 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 103 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF
44 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 104 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON
45 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 105 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF
46 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 106 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
47 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 107 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF
48 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 108 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON
49 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 109 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF
50 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 110 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON
51 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 111 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
52 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 112 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
53 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 113 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
54 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 114 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON
55 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 115 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
56 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 116 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON
57 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 117 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF
58 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 118 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON
59 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 119 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
60 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON
A-2
Appendix B
Installing 4100 FACP Components (Non-4100ES/4100U)
Introduction 4100 back boxes are available in one, two, and three-bay sizes. Each can be equipped with a solid or glass door. This chapter describes how to mount all types of non-4100ES/4100U back boxes to a wall, and how to mount system electronics bays into the boxes.
This chapter describes every installation procedure that applies directly to the FACP as well as each step of the host panel installation.
Before beginning the installation, review the next few pages to get a sense of the types of bays and modules that make up the FACP.
In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic
Step 2. Mounting Electronics Bays to Back Boxes
Step 4. Interconnecting Master Controller Bay Cards
Step 5. Installing Motherboards into Expansion Bays
Page
B-1
Appendix B
Introduction to FACPs
Overview 4100 FACPs are back boxes that contain the master controller, operator interface, universal power supply (UPS), backup batteries, and any additional modules that the panel requires. The
FACP is the central hub (often referred to as a host panel) of a standalone or MINIPLEX fire alarm system. In a networked system, the FACP can be connected to other system FACPs, so that each host panel is a node on the network.
Master Controller
Bay
Every FACP contains a master controller bay. The master controller bay consists of the master controller motherboard, the universal power supply (UPS), the operator interface, and four open motherboard slots.
In a standalone or MINIPLEX system, the master controller motherboard is supplied with a master controller daughter card attached to it. In a networked system, a network interface card is attached as a second daughter card to the master controller motherboard.
Figure B-1 is an illustration the master controller bay.
MASTER CONTROLLER
DAUGHTER CARD
NETWORK / RS-232 DAUGHTER CARD
WITH MEDIA CARD
OPTIONAL MOTHERBOARDS
UNIVERSAL POWER
SUPPLY (UPS)
MASTER CONTROLLER
MOTHERBOARD
Figure B-1. Master Controller Bay (4100)
B-2
Appendix B
Introduction to FACPs (continued)
Master
Motherboards and Controllers
The 4100 master motherboard and controller is the central memory and control point for the
4100 system. It mounts in the leftmost side of the master controller bay.
The figures below are illustrations of the three types of master controller motherboards. They are commonly referred to as Universal Transponder (UT) motherboards, because they can be used across different types of older Simplex fire alarm systems.
Note: See “Step 3. Configuring Modules,” later in this chapter, for information on configuring switches and jumpers.
FIELD WIRING
TERMINAL BLOCK (TB1)
UT MASTER
CONTROLLER
CONNECTOR (J3)
POWER/COMM BUS
CONNECTOR (J1)
2120 COMM/RS-232
CARD CONNECTOR (J2)
RESRV
24C
PIEZO
GND
CTS
RCV
RTS
XMIT
FIELD WIRING
TERMINAL BLOCK (TB1)
TB1
P5
INTERNAL COMMS
CONNECTOR (P2)
POWER/COMM BUS
CONNECTOR (P1)
SYSTEM POWER
CONNECTOR (P3)
FIELD WIRING
TERMINAL
BLOCK (TB2)
Figure B-2. UT Motherboard (565-161)
UT MASTER
CONTROLLER
CONNECTOR (J2)
POWER/COMM BUS
CONNECTOR (J3)
CITY CONNECT
JUMPERS (P4)
2120 COMM/RS-232 CARD
CONNECTOR (J1)
P6
JW1
P2
P1
J1
CITY CONNECT JUMPERS
P4
P3
P7
P8
GND3
GND4
BACK
NC
C
NO
T
B
L
-
NC
+
NO
C
I
T
Y
FRONT
RESRV
24C
PIEZO
GND
CTS
RCV
RTS
XMIT
INTERNAL COMMS
CONNECTOR (P2)
POWER/COMM BUS
CONNECTOR (P1)
SYSTEM POWER
CONNECTOR (P3)
FIELD WIRING
TERMINAL
BLOCK (TB2)
Figure B-3. UT Motherboard with City Connection (565-213)
FIELD WIRING
TERMINAL
BLOCK (TB1)
UT MASTER
CONTROLLER
CONNECTOR (J2)
POWER/COMM BUS
CONNECTOR (J3)
CITY CONNECT
JUMPERS (P4)
2120 COMM/RS-232 CARD
CONNECTOR (J1)
RS-232 / NETWORK
JUMPERS (P5, P6, JW1)
POWER/COMM BUS
CONNECTOR (P1)
RS-232 / NETWORK
JUMPERS (P7, P8, JW2)
INTERNAL COMMS
CONNECTOR (P2)
SYSTEM POWER
CONNECTOR (P3)
FIELD WIRING
TERMINAL
BLOCK (TB2)
Figure B-4. UT Motherboard with City Connection (565-274)
Continued on next page
B-3
Appendix B
Introduction to FACPs (continued)
Master
Motherboards and Controllers
The figures below are illustrations of the two UT master controllers.
Note: See “Step 3. Configuring Modules,” later in this chapter, for information on configuring switches and jumpers.
PROGRAMMER PORT (P1) SYSTEM TROUBLE
LED (LED1)
MASTER DISPLAY
PORT (P6)
P1
MODEM
P2
P3
LED1
P6
MODEM JUMPER (P2)
BATTERY BACKUP
JUMPER (P3)
FLASH EPROM
JUMPER (P5)
P7
MASTER DISPLAY
JUMPER (P7)
RESET BUTTON
(SW1)
UT MASTER
CONTROLLER
565-333 H
P5
SW1
Not used (P8)
EDGE CONNECTOR TO
565-161 MOTHERBOARD (P4)
P4
Figure B-5. UT Master Controller (565-333)
PROGRAMMER PORT (P1) SYSTEM TROUBLE
LED (LED1)
MASTER DISPLAY
PORT (P4)
LED1
P6
P1
MODEM
P2
P7
P3
BATTERY BACKUP
JUMPER (P2)
FLASH EPROM
JUMPER (P3)
P5
EDGE CONNECTOR TO
565-161 MOTHERBOARD (P5, P6))
RESET BUTTON
(SW1)
UT MASTER
CONTROLLER
565-333 H
SW1
P4
Figure B-6. UT Master Controller (565-148)
B-4
Appendix B
Introduction to FACPs (continued)
Universal Power
Supply (UPS)
The power supply controller card contains the switches and jumpers for configuring the power
supply, as shown in Figure B-7.
Note: See “Step 3. Configuring Modules,” later in this chapter, for information on configuring switches and jumpers.
POWER
HARNESS
“A” TAP OUTPUT
(P14)
SWITCHER
PORT (P9)
“B” TAP OUTPUT (P15)
OUTPUT
CONNECTIONS
(TB2)
EARTH DETECT
JUMPER (P16)
OUTPUT (P17)
CURRENT-LIMIT
RESISTOR 2 FOR
“C” TAP CHARGER
OUTPUT (P11)
CURRENT-LIMIT
RESISTOR 2 FOR
“B” TAP CHARGER
OUTPUT (P12)
AUDIO
CONTROLLER
INTERFACE (P8)
BATTERY/NO
BATTERY
JUMPER (P6)
ADDRESS
CONFIGURATION
DIP SWITCH (SW2)
UPS
CONFIGURATION
DIP SWITCH (SW1)
RETURN (P1)
RETURN (P2) RETURN (P3)
COMM PORT
(P4)
Figure B-7. Universal Power Supply
PMSI PORT (P5)
B-5
Appendix B
Introduction to FACPs (continued)
Operator Interface Shown below is the operator interface which is available for the 4100. The Operator Interface is used to obtain alarm, supervisory, trouble and other status via the Liquid Crystal Display and
LEDs. Control functions are accessed using dedicated keys.
FIRE
ALARM
SYSTEM IS NORMAL
12:35:15 am MON 29 JAN 96
PRIORITY 2 SYSTEM SYSTEM SIGNALS
ALARM SUPERVISORY TROUBLE SILENCED
POWER
ON
Additional CPU
Bay Modules
ALARM
ACK
ALARM
ACK
SUPV
ACK
ACKNOWLEDGE
TBL
ACK
ALARM
SILENCE
Figure B-8. Operator Interface
SYSTEM
RESET
The master controller bay can be equipped with many additional types of modules. The cards listed below are limited to the CPU bay only.
• 4100/4120-0139 Service Modem Card. Master controller mezzanine card: Provides a connection to remote PCs for diagnostics and programming purposes.
• 4100/4120-6014 Modular Network Interface Card (NIC). A daughter card that mounts to the CPU motherboard. Performs 4100 networking operations. May be installed with the
4100-6056 Wired Media Card, the 4100-6057 Fiber Media Card, and/or the 4100-6055
Modem Media Card.
Expansion Bays An FACP always has one master controller bay, and may have one or two expansion bays as well. Expansion bays contain a variety of additional modules that the system might require.
Expansion bays are always below the master controller bay.
MASTER
CONTROLLER
BAY
TWO-BAY
CABINET
EXPANSION
BAY
Figure B-9. Master Controller and Expansion Bays
B-6
Appendix B
Introduction to FACPs (continued)
System Power The FACP is powered primarily by the universal power supply (UPS), which in turn takes power directly from the AC mains and the two backup batteries.
MASTER
CONTROLLER
TO BATTERY
UPS
POWER
AND
COMM
TO AC
MAINS
BATTERY BATTERY
Figure B-10. Power and Comm Lines
B-7
Appendix B
Step 1. Mounting Back Boxes
Overview There are one-bay, two-bay, and three-bay back boxes. The one-bay back box is typically used as a standalone master controller cabinet, while the two and three-bay cabinets may contain any combination of modules.
• Back boxes are usually shipped in large containers separate from the system electronics. If system electronics containers are shipped with the back box containers, store the system electronics containers in a safe, clean, and dry location until the back box installation is completed, and you are ready to install the system electronic bays.
• All back box PIDs are listed in Chapter 1.
Specifications
Table B-1 lists the specifications for the back boxes.
4100-2002/2012
2975-9192/9193
2 Bay 125 lb.
(57 kg)
4100-2003/2013
2975-9194/9195
3 Bay 185 lb.
(84 kg)
Table B-1. Back Box Specifications
PID
Number
Description
4100-2001/2011
2975-9190/9191
Size Weight
1 Bay 55 lb.
(25 kg)
Box
20-¾ in.
(527 mm)
36-¼ in.
(921 mm)
Height
52-
1
/
8 in.
(1,324 mm)
39-
1
Trim
23-½ in.
(597 mm)
/
8 in.
(994 mm)
55 in.
(1,397 mm)
Door
Width
Box
26-
3
/
8 in.
(670 mm)
25-¾ in.
(654 mm)
26-
3
/
8 in.
(670 mm)
25-¾ in.
(654 mm)
26-
3
/
8 in.
(670 mm)
25-¾ in.
(654 mm)
Rough Opening
Height
21-¼ in.
(540 mm)
36-¾ in.
(933 mm)
52
5
/
8 in.
(1,337 mm)
Width
26 ¼ in.
(667 mm)
26 ¼ in.
(667 mm)
26 ¼ in.
(667 mm)
Make certain that you have the necessary hardware before you begin the installation procedure.
The Back Box Mounting Hardware Kit should have all of the items listed in Table B-2.
Table B-2. Contents of the Back Box Mounting Hardware Kit
Part Number Description
268-010
490-011
426-033
Lockwasher
(No. 8 )
Washer
Screw (No. 8
Torx,
5
/
16 in.)
Quantity per back box
1-Bay Box 2-Bay Box 3-Bay Box
6 8 10
6
6
8
8
10
10
B-8
Appendix B
Step 1. Mounting Back Boxes (continued)
Installing the
Back Box(es)
Install the back box as shown in Figure B-11. Use the holes in the back box to secure it to the
wall.
• For mounting to a wooden wall structure, the back box must be attached with
four 1-½-inch-long (38 mm) lag bolts and four ½-inch-diameter (13 mm) washers.
• The enclosure must be level and plumb when installed. The front surface of the back box must protrude at least three inches from the wall surface for semi-flush back box
installations (refer to Table B-1 and the “Rough Opening” section of the table for semi-
flush installations).
Figure B-11. Back Box Installation Diagram
Figure Notes:Figure B-11 notes:
1. The dimensions shown are typical for all surface and semi-flush installations.
2. Use a suitable punch when conduit is required and no knockout is present.
3. Box mounting:
• Minimum 5 inches from an obstruction on the hinged side of the box to permit at least 90 degree angle when the door is open.
• Minimum distance of 3 ¼ inches (83 mm) between boxes.
• Maximum distance of 10 inches (254 mm) between boxes.
4. Conduit A denotes internal panel interconnect harnesses and non power-limited wiring.
Conduit B denotes contractor wiring.
This area is reserved for non power-limited devices and circuits (for example, AC power, batteries, and city circuits). The non power-limited area is determined by the internal barriers, but is always below and to the right of these barriers. Do not use the upper right, right, or bottom knockouts for entrance of power-limited wiring.
6. When the two back boxes are mounted side-by-side, remove the hinge and the lock catch on the second back box (box on the right). Remount the hinges on the right side of the second back box.
Remount the lock catch on the left side of the second box. Mount the door
upside-down so the locks on both boxes are side-by-side.
B-9
Appendix B
Step 2. Mounting Electronics Bays to Back Boxes
Overview Before the system cards can be configured, the system electronics bays must be mounted to the
FACP back boxes. This section describes that process for the master controller cabinet and expansion cabinets.
Installing the
System
Electronics Bays
The system electronics bays for each back box are mounted on two rails. These rails are secured inside a cardboard shipping container when shipped from the factory.
Perform the following procedure to install the system electronics bays.
1. Remove everything from the electronics shipping container. To remove the 635-852 Battery
Terminal Block, unscrew the two 8-2 shipping screws that secure it to the container as
shown in Figure B-12. Save the two lockwashers and nuts.
2. Remove the 10-32 shipping studs that secure the vertical rails to the shipping container as
Figure B-12. Removing the Shipping Studs
Continued on next page
B-10
Appendix B
Step 2. Mounting Electronics Bays to Back Boxes (continued)
Installing the
System
Electronics Bays
3. Using the hardware provided (as referenced in Table B-2), insert a mounting screw in both
the top right and top left track support holes in the back box as shown in Figure B-13.
BACK BOX
MOUNTING SCREWS
Figure B-13. Inserting the Mounting Screws
4. Tighten the two mounting screws, but leave a 1/8-inch (3-mm) gap from the seated position of each screw.
5. Using the vertical rails as handles, carefully lift the system electronics bay assembly and the terminal block from the shipping container.
Continued on next page
B-11
Appendix B
Step 2. Mounting Electronics Bays to Back Boxes (continued)
Installing the
System
Electronics Bays
6. Install the system electronics bay assembly in the back box by carefully placing the rail
teardrop holes, located at the top of the rails, onto the two extended screws in the back box,
allowing the electronics bay assembly to hang from the screws. See Figure B-14.
Note: Make sure you do not pinch the terminal block wiring behind the rails as you mount the bay assembly in the back box.
BACK BOX
PREMOUNTED SCREWS
TEARDROP HOLES
NUT
LOCKWASHER
TERMINAL
BLOCK
SYSTEM ELECTRONICS
BAY ASSEMBLY
SCREW HOLES
Figure B-14. Installing the System Electronics Bay Assembly
7. Insert the remaining mounting screws through the screw holes in the rails.
8. Securely tighten all mounting screws. Refer to Table B-3 for the recommended torque.
Table B-3. Recommended Torque for Mounting Hardware
Screw / Nut Size
No.6
No.8
No.10
Recommended Torque
7.9 to 8.7 inch/ounces
(569 to 626 cm/grams)
16.1 to 17.8 inch/ounces
(1,159 to 1,282 cm/grams)
26.8 to 29.7 inch/ounces
(1,930 to 2,139 cm/grams)
Continued on next page
B-12
Appendix B
Step 2. Mounting Electronics Bays to Back Boxes (continued)
Installing the
System
Electronics Bays
9. Place the 635-852 terminal block on the two mounting studs on the right side of the back box
10. Secure the 635-852 Terminal Block using the two lockwashers and nuts that you set aside
in step 1. Use the torque recommendations listed in Table B-3 when securing the terminal
block.
At this point, the system is ready for system card installation.
CAUTION: Do not apply power to the system at this time.
For more detailed system installation instructions, refer to one of the following publications:
• 4100+/4120/UT System Cards Installation Instructions: FA4-21-305 (574-038)
• 4100+ Contractor Installation Instructions: FA4-21-202 (574-019)
• UT Contractor Installation Instructions: FA4-21-300 (574-901)
B-13
Appendix B
Step 3. Configuring Modules
Overview The master controller, UPS, and all other modules to be mounted in the FACP back boxes must be configured to operate correctly in the system via their DIP switch and jumper ports. This section describes the hardware configuration for the master controller and UPS, since they will always be used in the master controller bay.
Master
Motherboard
Configuration
The following settings apply to the master motherboard.
P4. City Connect jumpers.
• Local Energy: install jumpers 2, 5, 7, 9, 12, and 13.
• Reverse Polarity: install jumpers 1, 3, 7, 8, and 12.
• Shunt: install jumpers 1, 5, and 13.
• Form C: install jumper 13.
P5-P8, JW1, JW2. (565-274, 565-213 only) Used to enable RS-232/DC Comms or 4120
Network operation.
• If RS-232/DC Comms card is used on the motherboard: install jumpers P5, P6, P7, and P8.
• If a 4120 Network board is used on the motherboard: install jumpers JW1 and JW2.
565-333 Master
Controller
Configuration
If the 565-333 Master Controller is being used, use the jumper settings described below.
P2. Controls whether software downloads to the programmer port (P1) or to a service modem.
• Position 1 – 2: Use port P1.
• Position 2 – 3: Use the service modem.
P3. Controls whether RAM battery backup is enabled.
• Position 1 – 2: Enable RAM battery backup.
• Position 2 – 3: Disable RAM battery backup.
P5. Controls whether Flash EPROM writes are enabled.
• Position 1 – 2: Enable Flash EPROM writes.
• Position 2 – 3: Disable Flash EPROM writes.
P7. Makes the card compatible with a given master display.
• Position 1 – 2: Makes the card compatible with the 565-331 Master Display (5 V LCD).
Note that Rev B1 of the 565-331 Master Display will not work with this setting.
• Position 2 – 3: Makes the card compatible with the 565-173 and 565-331 Rev B1 Master
Displays (12 V LCD).
B-14
Appendix B
Step 3. Configuring Modules (continued)
565-148 Master
Controller
Configuration
If the 565-148 Master Controller is being used, use the jumper settings described below.
P2. Controls whether RAM battery backup is enabled.
• Position 1 – 2: Enable RAM battery backup.
• Position 2 – 3: Disable RAM battery backup.
P3. Controls whether Flash EPROM writes are enabled.
• Position 1 – 2: Enable Flash EPROM writes.
• Position 2 – 3: Disable Flash EPROM writes.
UPS
Configuration
IMPORTANT: Always configure the UPS as described below.
Note: ON = 0; OFF = 1.
DIP Switch SW1. Controls various UPS functions.
SW1-1. Set to 0. Used when the UPS must be retrofitted to for Intelligent Power Supply capabilities.
• Position 0: UPS acts like an Intelligent Power Supply in terms of messages sent to and received from the master controller.
• Position 1: UPS does not use Intelligent Power Supply functionality at all.
SW1-2. Set to 1 unless UPS B-tap is providing power to a 25-Watt Amplifier. Controls how the amplifier uses the backup battery.
• Position 0: Amplifier switches to battery backup when told to do so by the master controller.
• Position 1: Amplifier switches to battery backup upon loss of AC power.
SW1-3 through SW1-6. These switches work together to configure the UPS for different
types of batteries (or no batteries at all). Refer to Table B-4 to determine what settings
should be used.
Table B-4. UPS SW1 Battery Configurations
DIP Switch Position
3 4 5 6
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
UPS Configuration
Lead-acid battery
No battery charger
Audio (25 W Amp) and lead-acid battery
Audio (25 W Amp) without battery charger
NICAD battery
Audio (25 W Amp) and NICAD battery
Continued on next page
B-15
Step 3. Configuring Modules (continued)
UPS
Configuration
SW1-7. Controls battery charging current.
• Position 0: 50 Ah battery charging.
• Position 1: 110 Ah battery charging.
SW1-8. Not used.
DIP Switch SW2. Device address DIP switch. See Appendix A for details.
Use the following jumper settings to continue configuring the UPS.
P6. Battery backup configuration.
• Position 1 – 2: Normal configuration (battery backup).
• Position 2 – 3: No battery backup.
IMPORTANT: Do not use jumper P6 to bypass troubles from a temporarily disconnected battery.
P7. Amplifier shutdown selection.
• Position 1 – 2: Tap A shutdown enabled.
• Position 3 – 4: Tap B shutdown enabled.
• Position 5 – 6: Tap C shutdown enabled.
Appendix B
P16. Controls Earth Detect configuration.
• Position 1 – 2: Enable Earth Detect.
• Position 2 – 3: Disable Earth Detect.
Note: Jumpers P10, P13, and JW1 through JW7 are not field adjustable.
Configuring Other
Cards
Refer to 4100/4100+ Fire Alarm Universal Transponder (UT) Service Instructions
(FA4-51-207) to configure other cards that are located in master controller bays and expansion bays.
B-16
Appendix B
Step 4. Interconnecting Master Controller Bay Cards
Overview Each card has to be interconnected with every other card in the master controller bay. Read this section to ensure that cards are interconnected.
Interconnecting
Cards
Use the following instructions and Figure B-15 to interconnect master controller bay cards.
1. Use the 733-659 Harness to connect P14 on the UPS to P3 on the master controller
motherboard. Note that the P3 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
2. Use 733-672 Harness to connect P4 on the UPS to P2 on the master controller motherboard.
Like the P2 connector, P3 has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins.
3. If you are installing a new motherboard, orient the motherboard with the connector labeled
J1 on the right and the header labeled P1 on the left.
4. Slide the motherboard to the left until the pins are completely inserted in the connector of the previously installed motherboard.
5. Secure the motherboard to the chassis with four torx screws.
IMPORTANT: The leftmost board must always be the master controller motherboard.
733-659
P2
P3
P14
UPS P1
P4
J1 or
J3
733-672
Figure B-15. Master Controller Bay Interconnections
B-17
Appendix B
Step 5. Installing Motherboards into Expansion Bays
Overview This section describes how to interconnect motherboards in expansion bays, and how to connect the expansion bays electrically to the master controller bay.
Guidelines Up to eight 2 (51 mm) x 11 ½-inch (292 mm) motherboards can be installed in an expansion bay. Adhere to the following guidelines when installing a motherboard in an expansion bay:
• If a power supply is installed, it must be placed on the far right of the bay.
• Relay cards must be installed in the rightmost possible slots (just left of the power supply, if there is one). This is necessary to allow for the proper routing of non-power limited wiring (typically 120 VAC wiring), which could be connected to a relay module.
• If a 4100/4120-0155 SDACT or a 4100/4120-0153 CCDACT is installed in the bay, it must be installed in the far left or far right slot. Neither of these modules contains the J1 or
P1 connectors, which are used to distribute power and communications to adjacent modules.
Installing
Motherboards
Use the following directions and Figure B-16 to install a motherboard into an expansion bay.
1. Orient the motherboard with the connector labeled J1 on the right and the header labeled P1 on the left.
2. Match the connector on the previously installed motherboard with the pins on the motherboard you are installing. Slide the motherboard to the left until the pins are completely inserted in the connector of the previously installed motherboard. If you are installing the leftmost board, the pins will remain unconnected.
3. Secure the motherboard to the chassis with four torx screws.
The motherboard can be installed in any of the eight slots.
P1
J1 or
J3
Figure B-16. Installing the Motherboard in an Expansion Bay
4. If you are installing the leftmost motherboard, connect a 733-525 Power and
Communication Harness. Continue to the next topic to connect the harness.
B-18
Appendix B
Step 5. Installing Motherboards into Expansion Bays (continued)
Connecting the
733-525 Harness
If you need to connect a 733-525 Harness to a motherboard, refer to Figure B-17 and follow
these steps. Make sure to route the power and communication wiring on the left side of the bay.
1. Connect one end of the harness to a motherboard in an adjacent bay.
If the adjacent bay is a master controller bay, connect the harness to the P2 and P3
connectors of the master controller motherboard and continue to step 2.
If the adjacent bay is an expansion bay, connect the harness to the P2 and P3 connectors of the motherboard installed in the leftmost slot. (If a 4100/4120-0155 SDACT or a
4100/4120-0153 CCDACT occupies the leftmost slot, connect the harness to the
motherboard in the second slot from the left.) Connect the harness as follows: a.
Insert the harness connector with the blue wire into the P2 connector. Note that the P2 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
b.
Insert the harness connector with the white wire into the P3 connector. Note that the P3 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
Continued on next page
B-19
Step 5. Installing Motherboards into Expansion Bays (continued)
Appendix B
Connecting the
733-525 Harness
2. Connect the other end of the harness to the leftmost motherboard in the next bay, as described below. Make sure to route the wiring on the left side of the bay.
a.
Insert the harness connector with the blue wire into the P2 connector. Note that the P2 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
b.
Insert the harness connector with the white wire into the P3 connector. Note that the P3 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
733-659 Harness
Connector with
Blue Wire Goes to P2
(Blue = Top)
Connector with
White Wire Goes to P3
(White = Top)
733-672 Harness
733-525 Harness
Figure B-17. Power and Communication Wiring for Motherboards
B-20
Appendix C
Installing 4100 MINIPLEX Components (Non-4100ES/4100U)
Introduction
In this chapter
MINIPLEX remote interface cards (RICs) allow for data and power interconnections between the 4100 host panel and remote locations. This chapter describes the transponder installation procedure for all MINIPLEX systems in non-4100ES/4100U systems.
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic
Introduction to MINIPLEX Systems
Installing Modules into Back Boxes
Page
C-1
Appendix C
Introduction to MINIPLEX Systems
Overview The 4100 MINIPLEX Fire Alarm System uses transponder cabinets containing remote interface cards (RICs) to extend power and communication across large areas. MINIPLEX transponders allow the system to provide applications for up to 1000 monitor and/or control points and 2000 annunciator points (see note). Using 4100-style serial communications, up to
31 distributed MINIPLEX transponder locations are possible for initiating device circuit cards,
MAPNET II/ TrueAlarm addressable communications interfaces, notification appliance circuit cards, LED/switch controls, auxiliary relay control cards, power supplies, and audio amplifiers.
By selecting the required combinations of modules and mounting MINIPLEX transponders at the appropriate building locations, wire quantities are significantly reduced for all monitor and control functions. Since power for the local modules is provided from the local power supply, the wiring from the control panel need only be separate twisted, shielded pairs for data, voice, and telephone.
Notes:
•
•
One point consists of one LED or one switch on an LED/switch module, one LED driver output on a graphic driver, or one switch input on a graphic switch input module.
Up to 32 modules can be controlled by one MINIPLEX transponder.
• The 4100 0117 MINIPLEX Expansion Power Supply is available with a power-limited 8 A output.
Continued on next page
C-2
Introduction to MINIPLEX Systems (continued)
Overview
Figure C-1 is an outline of a MINIPLEX system.
Seventh floor
Seventh floor
Sixth floor
Sixth floor
Fifth floor
Fifth floor
Fourth floor
Fourth floor
Third floor
Third floor
Second floor
Second floor
MINIPLEX transponder with solid door
Legend:
Legend:
Speaker NAC
Speaker NAC
TrueAlarm sensors addressable circuits
Audio riser wiring, twisted pair
RUI communications wiring, twisted, shielded pair
MINIPLEX transponder with
LED/switch modules on door panel
ACKNOWLEDGE
ACKNOWLEDGE
Appendix C
First floor
First floor
FACP
FACP
Figure C-1. MINIPLEX System Design
C-3
Appendix C
MINIPLEX System Components
Overview The 4100 MINIPLEX system is comprised of a host panel containing everything required in a
standalone cabinet (see Chapter 3), plus:
• An RUI module in the master controller bay
• One or more remote MINIPLEX transponder cabinets
• A RIC II card in each transponder cabinet
This section describes each component in turn.
The RUI Card The RUI module consists of a motherboard and daughter card, which are used in the master controller bay of a MINIPLEX system to extend the length of communications wire to reach remote bays.
Figure C-2 is an illustration of the RUI card.
Transponder
Cabinets
Figure C-2. The Remote Unit Interface Card
The RUI card mounts onto a 562-799 or 562-856 Motherboard.
Communication wiring from the RUI module in the host panel extends to the RIC II card in a remote transponder cabinet. The transponder cabinet is simply a 2975-91xx Back Box with a
RIC II module in it, and can have one, two, or three bays.
C-4
Appendix C
MINIPLEX System Components (continued)
The Remote
Interface Card
(RIC)
Remote interface cards (RICs) in the transponder cabinets allow for data, power, and audio interconnections between the 4100 host panel and remote locations. They support RUI connections in Style 4 and Style 7 wiring configurations.
Figure C-3 illustrates the RIC circuit board.
PIEZO/MICROPHONE
TERMINAL BLOCK (TB2)
REMOTE MICROPHONE
CONNECTOR (P1)
TBL
PIEZO
CTRL
LED
CTRL
PTT+
PTT-
SHLD
GRN
WHT
TB2
LED1
COMMS TROUBLE LED
(LED 1):
Lights if there is a line short on either primary or secondary lines, or if both comms inputs are absent.
POWER/COMM
TERMINAL BLOCK (TB1)
HEADER CONNECTOR
(J1)
8
1
Figure C-3. The RIC II Card
+COMM
PRIM
+COMM
-COMM
-COMM
24C
24C
C-5
Appendix C
MINIPLEX System Guidelines
Overview The rules on this page apply exclusively to MINIPLEX systems. Review each guideline before installing a MINIPLEX 4100 system.
Guidelines • The MINIPLEX master control panel must be a 4100-8210 Voice and Sound Control
Panel.
• The Style 4 RUI card supports MINIPLEX transponders and 4602/4603 serial
annunciators on the same signaling line circuit.
• Up to 4 RUI cards in the 4100 Control Panel can be used for distributing transponder wiring in different directions or for supporting different wiring requirements (such as using a Style 7 RUI for serial annunciators).
• Up to 31 MINIPLEX transponders can be controlled from the 4100 Control Panel, and can be distributed as required among the RUI cards.
• “T” tapping is allowed for Style 4 communications only (Style 7 wiring does not support
“T” tapping).
• *Wiring from RUI cards is a minimum of 18 AWG twisted, shielded pair.
• The maximum wiring distance from the 4100 RUI card to a MINIPLEX transponder is
2500 feet (762 m). For Style 4 wiring, this can be extended to 10,000 feet (3 km) maximum if “T” tapping is used.
• Voice and telephone wiring for 4100-8210 systems is via separate twisted, shielded pairs.
• 4100U system cards are not compatible with 4100 miniplex transponders that are controlled by a 4100 RIC II card.
*The RUI+ has the same limitation as the RUI, except shielded wire is not required.
C-6
Appendix C
Installing Modules into Back Boxes
Overview This section contains guidelines and instructions for mounting the RUI and RIC II modules into 4100 back boxes.
• The RUI motherboard mounts into the CPU bay or, if necessary, an expansion bay.
• The RIC II mounts into expansion bays only.
Guidelines Review the following guidelines before installing a motherboard into a cabinet.
• If a power supply is installed in the bay, it must be installed on the far right of the bay and any relay modules must be installed in the slots immediately to its left.
• Relay cards must be installed in the rightmost possible slots. This is necessary to allow for the proper routing of non-power limited wiring (typically 120 VAC wiring), which could be connected to a relay module.
Installing the RUI
Motherboard
Mount the RUI motherboard (562-799 or 562-856) in a master controller bay as described below.
1. Orient the motherboard with the connector labeled J1 on the right and the header labeled P1 on the left.
2. Match the connector on the previously installed motherboard with the pins on the motherboard you are installing. Slide the motherboard to the left until the pins are completely inserted in the connector of the previously installed motherboard. If you are installing the leftmost board, the pins will remain unconnected.
3. Secure the motherboard to the chassis with four torx screws.
Figure C-4. Installing the RUI Motherboard in the CPU Bay
Note: RUI motherboards may also be installed in expansion bays.
C-7
Appendix C
Installing Modules into Back Boxes (continued)
Installing the RIC
II Motherboard
The RIC II motherboard is installed into a remote transponder cabinet (back box PID series
2975-91xx). Review the following guidelines before mounting RIC II motherboard.
• If a power supply is installed in the bay, it must be installed on the far right of the bay and any relay modules must be installed in the slots immediately to its left.
• Relay cards must be installed in the rightmost possible slots. This is necessary to allow for the proper routing of non-power limited wiring (typically 120 VAC wiring), which could be connected to a relay module.
• If a 4100/4120-0155 SDACT or a 4100/4120-0153 CCDACT is installed in the bay, it must be installed in the far left or far right slot. Neither of these modules contains the J1 or
P1 connectors, which are used to distribute power and communications to adjacent modules.
Use the following directions and Figure C-5 to install a RIC II motherboard into a transponder
cabinet.
1. The RIC II motherboard must be installed in the leftmost slot. Orient the motherboard with the connector labeled J1 on the right.
2. Secure the motherboard to the chassis with four torx screws.
The RIC II motherboard must be installed in the leftmost slot.
J1
RIC II
Figure C-5. Installing the RIC II Motherboard into a 4100 Expansion Bay
3. If you are installing the RIC II in a transponder cabinet with additional bays, you must
connect a 733-525 Power and Communication Harness. Continue to the next topic for instructions.
C-8
Appendix C
Installing Modules into Back Boxes (continued)
Connecting the
733-525 Harness
If you need to connect a 733-525 Harness to a motherboard, refer to Figure C-6 and follow
these steps. Make sure to route the power and communication wiring on the left side of the bay.
1. Connect one end of the harness to a motherboard in an adjacent bay.
If the adjacent bay is a master controller bay, connect the harness to the P2 and P3
connectors of the master controller motherboard and continue to step 2.
If the adjacent bay is an expansion bay, connect the harness to the P2 and P3 connectors of the motherboard installed in the leftmost slot. (If a 4100/4120-0155 SDACT or a
4100/4120-0153 CCDACT occupies the leftmost slot, connect the harness to the
motherboard in the second slot from the left.) Connect the harness as follows: a.
Insert the harness connector with the blue wire into the P2 connector. Note that the P2 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
b.
Insert the harness connector with the white wire into the P3 connector. Note that the P3 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
Continued on next page
C-9
Appendix C
Installing Modules into Back Boxes (continued)
Connecting the
733-525 Harness
2. Connect the other end of the harness to the leftmost motherboard in the next bay, as described below. Make sure to route the wiring on the left side of the bay.
a.
Insert the harness connector with the blue wire into the P2 connector. Note that the P2 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
b.
Insert the harness connector with the white wire into the P3 connector. Note that the P3 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
TO 24 VDC
RIC II
(565-233)
Connector with
Blue Wire Goes to P2
Connector with
White Wire Goes to P3
(OPTIONAL)
UNIVERSAL
POWER SUPPLY
733-672 Harness
733-525 Harness
Figure C-6. Power and Communication Wiring for the Transponder Cabinet (4100)
C-10
Appendix C
MINIPLEX Wiring
Overview The RIC must be connected to the host panel via RUI cabling. This section explains how to wire the two together, and how to set up a system with multiple transponders connected to the same host panel.
Wiring
Configurations
RUI cabling can be accomplished either through Class A or Class B wiring.
Class A wiring allows transponder cabinets to communicate with the FACP even in the event of an open circuit somewhere in the loop. Class A wiring requires that two wires are routed from the CPU motherboard to each RIC, and then back again to the CPU motherboard.
Class B wiring allows “T” tapping, and therefore requires less wiring distance per installation than Class A. Additionally, Class B wiring does not require end-of-line resistors, because each
RIC communicates directly to the CPU.
IMPORTANT: Make sure these prerequisites are accounted for before wiring:
• All transponder cabinets are installed within 2500 feet (762 m) of the FACP.
• Conductors test free of all grounds.
• All wires are between 12 and 18 AWG, or as the local code dictates.
Class A Wiring
Class B Wiring
To connect the RUI card to RICs using Class A wiring, read the following instructions and
refer to Figure C-7, on the next page.
1. Route wire between 12 and 18 AWG from the + (TB1-8) and - (TB1-6) terminals on the
COMMS “A” block of the 562-856/565-217 RUI card to the TB1-8 (+) and TB1-6 (-)
terminals on the 565-233 RIC.
2. Route wire from the first RIC to the next one. Repeat for each transponder cabinet within
2500 feet (762 m).
3. Route wire from TB1-7 (+) and TB1-5 (-) on the last RIC to + (TB1-4) and - (TB1-2) on the
COMMS “B” block of the 562-856/565-217 RUI card.
To connect the RUI card to RIC II cards using Class B wiring, read the following instructions
and refer to Figure C-7, on the next page.
1. Route wire between 12 and 18 AWG from the + (TB1-8) and - (TB1-6) terminals on the
COMMS “A” block of the 562-856/565-217 RUI card to the TB1-8 (+) and TB1-6 (-)
terminals on the 565-233 RIC.
2. Route wire from the first RIC to the next one. Repeat for each transponder cabinet within
2500 feet (762 m).
C-11
Appendix C
MINIPLEX Wiring (continued)
Wiring Illustration
Figure C-7 illustrates Class A and Class B wiring.
4100 MINIPLEX MASTER
T
B
1
562-856 W/565-217
RUI
COMMS "A" COMMS "B"
T
B
1
8
565-233
1
See
Note 1
+24 V
24 C
T
B
1
8
RIC 11
565-233
1
MINIPLEX
TRANSPONDER
MINIPLEX
TRANSPONDER
CLASS B
CLASS A
Figure C-7. MINIPLEX Wiring
Notes:
1. Power wiring is not shown. Connect the RIC II card to the UPS or expansion power supply in the transponder cabinet.
2. If a UPS is not provided in the transponder cabinet, then 24 VDC must be provided from the host panel.
3. Maintain correct polarity on terminal connections. Do not loop wires under terminals.
4. All wiring is supervised and power limited.
C-12
Overview
Using the Volt/
Ohm Meter
Appendix D
Checking System Wiring
This appendix contains instructions on how to use a volt/ohm meter to check system wiring.
When using the volt/ohm meter to check each circuit, make sure to adhere to the notes and instructions below.
•
•
•
Note:
• Ensure that no power is applied to the 4100 fire alarm panel and that all wiring is properly connected
(terminal blocks, LED/switch module ribbon cables, etc.).
Use the green grounding lug in the control panel for all measurements to ground.
Each circuit must test free of all grounds and extraneous (stray) voltages.
If there are problems removing all power from the fire alarm system, there is an alternate method of testing for stray voltage. The wires may be lifted from the panel and terminated with appropriate resistors. Use 3.3 Kohms across conductor pairs and 50 Kohms from any conductor under test to ground. All conductors must read less than 1.0V AC or DC.
Use the volt/ohm meter as described in the steps below to check each circuit type.
1. At the control panel, locate wires from each initiating device or indicating appliance circuit.
2. Check each circuit for extraneous voltage by setting the volt/ohm meter to AC. Place the meter probes so that the black probe is on the “-” wire and the red probe is on the “+” wire.
Meter readings must show less than 1.0 VAC.
3. Set the volt/ohm meter to DC and repeat step 2. The meter must read less than 1.0 VDC.
4. Test all conductors for voltage to ground. The meter must read no more than 1.0V AC or
DC.
5. Set the volt/ohm meter to OHMS and place the meter probes as described in step 2. Check the circuits using the resistance measurements in Table D-1. Locate and correct any
abnormal conditions at this time.
Note: If the reading indicates an open circuit in an initiating circuit, make sure the smoke
detector heads are properly mounted and seated. The circuit may be open if smoke detector power is not present, and if separately powered 4-wire devices are used.
6. Check all other system wiring to verify that each circuit is free of grounds and extraneous voltages.
D-1
Appendix D
Checking System Wiring
Meter Readings Table D-1 lists the correct meter readings for indicating appliances and initiating devices.
Table D-1. Acceptable Zone and Signal Circuit Meter Readings
Circuit Type Meter Reading
Class B/Style B Initiating Device (Zone) Circuit
From zone + to zone – (each zone)
From zone + to ground
3.3 K Ohms
Infinity
Infinity From zone - to ground
Class A/Style D Initiating Device (Zone) Circuit
From zone + to zone – (each zone)
From zone + to ground
From zone - to ground
From zone + OUT to + IN
Infinity
Infinity
Infinity
Less than 25 Ohms
From zone - OUT to - IN
Class B/Style Y Notification Appliance Circuit (each signal circuit)
Less than 25 Ohms
From + to ground
From - to ground
Infinity
Infinity
Resistance across circuit:
In one direction
In opposite direction
Class A/Style Z Notification Appliance Circuit (each signal circuit)
10 K Ohms
Less than 200 Ohms
From + to ground
From - to ground
From zone + OUT to + IN
From zone - OUT to - IN
Resistance across circuit:
In one direction
In opposite direction
Shielding
Infinity
Infinity
Less than 50 Ohms
Less than 50 Ohms
Infinity
Less than 200 Ohms
Shield to ground
Shield to -
Shield to +
MAPNET II Loops (ZAMs and IAMs)
From MAPNET II + to ground
From MAPNET II - to ground
Infinity
Infinity
Infinity
Infinity
Infinity
D-2
Appendix E
References to 4100ES Module Installation Instructions
Overview
PID
4100-0156
Table E-1. References to 4100ES module installation instructions
Description
8V DC CONVERTER
4100-0620 TRANSPONDER IF MODULE
4100-0621 ANALOG AUDIO RISER MODULE
4100-0622 DIGITAL AUDIO RISER MODULE
4100-0623 NETWORK AUDIO I/F MODULE
4100-0625 LOCAL MODE TPR IF
4100-0632 UTILITY BLOC, 16 TERMINALS
4100-0633 TRANSPONDER TAMPER SWITCH
4100-0634 POWER DIST MODULE 120V
4100-0635 POWER DIST MODULE 220V
4100-1210 ANALOG AUDIO CONTROLLER
4100-1240 AUX AUDIO INPUT MODULE
4100-1241 MESSAGE EXPANSION, 8 MINUTES
4100-1242 MESSAGE EXPANSION, 32 MINUTES
4100-1245 FLEX 50 NAC EXPANSION, 3 CLS B
4100-1246 FLEX 50 CLASS A ADAPTER
4100-1248 100W NAC EXPANSION, 6 CLASS B
4100-1249 100W CLASS A ADAPTER
4100-1252 AUDIO IF MODULE, SGL CHANNEL
4100-1253 AUDIO IF MODULE MULTI-CHANNEL
4100-1254 AUDIO IF 2 CHANNEL
4100-1255 AUDIO IF 3-8 CHANNEL
4100-1259 CONSTANT SUPV NAC 25V RMS A/B
4100-1259 CONSTANT SUPV NAC 25V RMS A/B -
Non-Alarm Audio Mode
4100-1260 CONSTANT SUPV NAC 70V RMS A/B
4100-1260 CONSTANT SUPV NAC 70V RMS A/B -
Non-Alarm Audio Mode
4100-1265 FAIL SAFE MICROPHONE MASTER
4100-1266 EXPANSION NAC CARD FOR EXP SIG
4100-1267 EXP SIG CARD CLASS A
4100-1268 EXP SIGCARD CONSTANT SUPV
4100-1269 FAIL SAFE MICROPHONE SLAVE
4100-1270 MASTER TELEPHONE, 3 NACS
4100-1271 REMOTE MASTER PHONE
4100-1272 EXPANSION PHONE CONTROLLER
4100-1273 PHONE CLASS A NAC ADAPTER
4100-1274 MICROPHONE MUX MODULE
4100-1276 8 RED PLUGGABLE LED MODULE
4100-1277 16 RED/YEL PLUGGABLE LED MOD
4100-1278 16 SW/16 RED/YEL PLUG LED
4100-1279 2” BLANK DISPLAY MODULE
4100-1280 8 SWITCH, 8 RED LED MODULE
579-172
579-175
579-175
579-175
579-175
579-168
579-168
579-168
579-168
579-515
579-515
Installation
Instructions
574-123
574-848
574-848
574-848
574-848
574-848
579-248
579-195
574-848
574-848
579-159
579-160
579-172
579-515
579-515
579-571
579-175
579-175
579-515
579-571
579-226
579-226
579-226
579-226
579-879
574-843
574-843
574-843
574-843
574-843
E-1
Appendix E
References to 4100ES Module Installation Instructions
Table E-1. References to 4100ES module installation instructions (Continued)
PID Description Installation
Instructions
574-843 4100-1281 8 SWITCH, 8 YELLOW LED MODULE
4100-1282
4100-1283
8 SW, 16RED/YEL LED MOUDLE
8 SWITCH, 16 YELLOW LED MODULE
4100-1284 8 SW, 16 RED/GREEN LED MODULE
4100-1285 16 SWITCH, 16 RED LED MODULE
4100-1286
4100-1287
4100-1290
4100-1291
4100-1292 REM PANEL MOUNT LCD ANUCIATOR (Backlight On)
4100-1292 REM PANEL MOUNT LCD ANUCIATOR (Backlight Off)
4100-1293
4100-1295
HOA MODULE 24SWI/24RED LED
24 SWITCH, 24 RED LED MODULE
4100-1288 64/64 LED/SWITCH CONTROLLER
4100-1289 EXPANSION 64/64 LED/SW MODULE
24 POINT I/O MODULE
REMOTE UNIT INTERFACE (RUI)
PANEL MOUNT PRINTER
HOA MODULE,NO TEXT,24SW/24LED
4100-1296 8 SW, 16 GREEN/ YELLOW LED MOD.
4100-1297 TFX PHONE CARD
574-843
574-843
574-843
574-843
574-843
574-843
574-843
574-843
579-183
579-213
579-265
579-265
579-249
574-843
574-843
579-862
4100-1298 4100U/4100ES MASTER FIREFIGHTER PHONE ASSEMBLY w/TFX Phone Card 579-862
4100-1311 AUDIO CONTROL BOARD - DIGITAL 579-159
4100-1312 50W AMP W/3 CLASS B NACS 25V
4100-1313 50W AMP W/3 CLASS B NACS 70V
4100-1314 100W AMP W/6 B NACS 120VAC 25V
4100-1315 100W AMP W/6 B NACS 120VAC 70V
579-173
579-173
579-174
579-174
4100-1316 100W AMP,6NAC,120VAC,25V-CAN
4100-1317 100W AMP,6NAC, 120VAC, 70V-CAN
4100-1318 100W AMP,6NAC,220/30/40VAC,25V
4100-1319 100W AMP,6NAC,220/30/40VAC,70V
4100-1320 BACKUP 100W AMP - 120VAC 25V
4100-1321 BACKUP 100W AMP - 120VAC 70V
4100-1322 BACKUP 100W AMP-120VAC 25V-C
4100-1323 BACKUP 100W AMP-120VAC 70V-C
579-174
579-174
579-174
579-174
579-174
579-174
579-174
579-174
4100-1324 BACK 100W AMP-220/240VAC,25V
4100-1325 BACK 100W AMP-220/240VAC,70V
4100-1311 AUDIO CONTROL BOARD - DIGITAL
4100-1312 50W AMP W/3 CLASS B NACS 25V
4100-1313 50W AMP W/3 CLASS B NACS 70V
4100-1314 100W AMP W/6 B NACS 120VAC 25V
4100-1315 100W AMP W/6 B NACS 120VAC 70V
4100-1316 100W AMP,6NAC,120VAC,25V-CAN
4100-1317 100W AMP,6NAC, 120VAC, 70V-CAN
4100-1318 100W AMP,6NAC,220/30/40VAC,25V
4100-1319 100W AMP,6NAC,220/30/40VAC,70V
4100-1320 BACKUP 100W AMP - 120VAC 25V
4100-1321 BACKUP 100W AMP - 120VAC 70V
4100-1322 BACKUP 100W AMP-120VAC 25V-C
4100-1323 BACKUP 100W AMP-120VAC 70V-C
4100-1324 BACK 100W AMP-220/240VAC,25V
4100-1325 BACK 100W AMP-220/240VAC,70V
579-174
579-174
579-159
579-173
579-173
579-174
579-174
579-174
579-174
579-174
579-174
579-174
579-174
579-174
579-174
579-174
579-174
E-2
References to 4100ES Module Installation Instructions (continued)
Appendix E
Table E-1. References to 4100ES module installation instructions (Continued)
PID Description
4100-1326 FLEX 50W AMP W/3 NACS - 25V
4100-1327 FLEX 50W AMP W/3 NACS - 70V
4100-1328 DIG.100W AMP,6NAC,120VAC,25V
4100-1329 DIG. 100W AMP,6NAC,120VAC,70V
4100-1330 DIG.100W AMP,6NAC,120VAC, 25V-C
4100-1331 DIG.100W AMP,6NAC,120VAC,70V-C
4100-1332 DIG100W AMP,6NAC,220VAC,25V
4100-1333 DIG100W AMP,6NAC,220VAC,70V
4100-1334 BACKUP DIG.100W AMP,120VAC,25V
4100-1335 BACKUP DIG.100W AMP,120VAC,70V
4100-1336 BACK DIG.100W AMP,120VAC,25V-C
4100-1337 BACK DIG.100W AMP,120VAC,70V-C
4100-1338 BCK DIG.100W AMP,220VAC,25V
4100-1339 BCK DIG.100W AMP,220VAC,70V
4100-1340 4100U/4100ES TFX AUDIO INTERFACE MODULE
4100-1361 FLEX 35W AMP W/3 NACS - 25V
4100-1341 Multiple Command Center Digital Audio Riser module
4100-1362 FLEX 35W AMP W/3 NACS - 70V
4100-1363 DIGITALFLEX 35W AMP, 3NACS-25V
4100-1364 DIGITALFLEX 35W AMP, 3NACS-70V
4100-3101 IDNET MODULE, UP TO 250 POINTS- Each IDNet Device (Add to
IDNet current) 4100-3101 with full channel - 250 IDNet devices
4100-3102 MAPNET MODULE, UP TO 127 PTS
Each MAPNET Device (Add to MAPNET current) 4100-3102 with full channel - 127 MAPNET devices
4100-3103 MAPNET/IDNET ISOLATOR MODULE
4100-3104 IDNET MODULE, UP TO 127 POINTS
4100-3105 IDNET MODULE, UP TO 64 POINTS
4100-3106 IDNET MODULE QUICK CONNECT 2
4100-3107 IDNET+ MODULE, UP TO 250 POINTS
Each IDNet Device (Add to IDNet+ current)
4100-3108 IDNet1+ MODULE
4100-3109 IDNET 2 MODULE, UP TO 250 POINTS - Two Isolated Loops per
IDNet Device (Add to IDNet Current)
4100-3110 IDNET 2+2 MODULE, UP TO 250 POINTS - Four Isolated Loops per
IDNet Device (Add to IDNet Current)
4100-3115 XA LOOP INTERFACE CARD (Master)
4100-3115 XA LOOP INTERFACE CARD (Slave)
4100-3202 4 RELAYS, 10 AMP CONTACTS
4100-3204 4 POINT 2 AMP AUX RELAY MODULE
4100-3206 8 POINT 3 AMP AUX RELAY MODULE
4100-5005 ZONE MODULE, 8 IDC, CLASS B
4100-5015 ZONE MODULE, 8 IDC, CLASS A
4100-5101 XPS POWER, 3 NACS, 120VAC
4100-5102 XPS POWER, 3 NACS, 220VAC
4100-5103 XPS POWER, 3 NACS, CANADA
4100-5111 X SPS PWR, IDNET, 3 NACS, 120V
Each IDNet Device (Add to IDNet current)
579-222
579-514
574-800
574-800
574-800
579-786
579-1014
579-1169
579-1169
579-513
579-513
579-220
579-220
579-220
579-205
579-205
574-772
574-772
574-772
574-246
Installation
Instructions
579-173
579-173
579-174
579-174
579-174
579-174
579-174
579-174
579-174
579-174
579-174
579-174
579-174
579-174
579-815
579-173
574-844
579-173
579-173
579-173
574-800
E-3
References to 4100ES Module Installation Instructions (continued)
Appendix E
PID
Table E-1. References to 4100ES module installation instructions (Continued)
Description
4100-5112 SPS POWER,3 NACS,120VAC CAN
4100-5115
4100-6052
4100-6055
4100-6056
4100-6057
4100-6060
4100-6061
4100-6062
4100-6063
4100-6064
4100-6066
4100-6069
4100-6080
4100-7150
4100-7151
4100-7152
Each IDNet Device (Add to IDNet current)
4100-5113 SPS POWER, 3 NACS, 220/240V
Each IDNet Device (Add to IDNet+ current)
XPS EXPANSION MODULE, 3 NACS
4100-5116 EXPANSION AUDIO SIGNAL CARD
4100-5120 TPS POWER, 3 CHANNELS, 120VAC
4100-5121 TPS POWER, 3 CHANNELS,CAN
4100-5122 TPS POWER, 3 CHANNELS, 240VAC
4100-5124 TPS CLASS A ADAPTER MOD
4100-5125 RPS POWER, 3 NACS, 120VAC
4100-5126 RPS POWER, 3 NACS, CANADIAN
4100-5127 RPS POWER, 3 NACS, 220VAC
4100-5128 BATTERY DIST TERM MODULE
4100-5130 4100U/4100ES TFX Voltage Regulator Module
4100-5152 POWER MODULE, 2A, 12 VOLTS
4100-5311 EPS POWER, 120V with IDNet 2 Card
4100-5313 EPS POWER, 240V with IDNet 2 Card
4100-5325 EPS POWER, 120V
4100-5327 EPS POWER, 240V
4100-6014 NETWORK IFC CARD, MODULAR
4100-6029 SMOKE MANAGEMENT APPLICATION GUIDE
4100-6030 SERVICE MODEM (566-276)
4100-6031 CITY MODULE W/DISCONNECT
4100-6032 CITY MODULE W/O DISCONNECT
4100-6033 ALARM RELAY
4100-6034 TAMPER SWITCH W/IDNET IAM
4100-6036 PHYSICAL BRIDGE, STYLE 4
4100-6037 PHYSICAL BRIDGE, STYLE 7
4100-6038 DUAL RS-232 IF CARD
4100-6045 DECODER MODULE
4100-6047 BUILDING NETWORK INTERFACE CARD
4100-6048 VESDA INTERFACE KIT
EVENT REPORTING DACT
DIAL-IN SERVICE MODEM (566-338)
NETWORK MEDIA CARD WIRED
NETWORK MEDIA CARD F/OPTIC
SAFELINC FP INTERNET INTERFACE
MODULAR NIC, REDUNDANT
TFX NETWORK INTERFACE
FIBER OPTIC MODEM LEFT PORT
FIBER OPTIC MODEM RIGHT PORT
4100U/4100ES TFX Addressable Loop Interface Card
BACpac Ethernet
DACT SIDE MOUNTED
MASTER UPGRADE, 2X40 LCD
MASTER UPGRADE, NO DISPLAY
LEGACY MSTR UPGRADE, W/ DSPLY
574-836
574-046
579-182
579-182
579-349
579-331
579-575
579-581
579-581
579-811
579-842
574-836
579-229
574-918
579-229
579-1015
579-1015
579-1015
579-182
574-465
579-194
574-839
574-839
574-839
574-195
579-184
579-184
579-221
574-037
579-949
574-050
Installation
Instructions
574-246
574-246
574-772
579-516
579-336
579-336
579-336
579-337
574-246
574-246
574-246
579-332
579-812
579-218
579-1015
E-4
References to 4100ES Module Installation Instructions (continued)
Appendix E
Table E-1. References to 4100ES module installation instructions (Continued)
PID Description Installation
Instructions
579-229 4100-7153 FP UPGRADE W/ Flexible User Interface, DOMESTIC
4100-7154 LEGACY MSTR UPGRADE W/Flexible User Interface, DOMESTIC 579-229
4100-7155 FP UPGRADE W/ Flexible User Interface, INTERNATIONAL 579-229
4100-7156 LEGACY MSTR UPGRADE W/Flexible User Interface, INTERNATIONAL 579-229
4100-7158 NXP Master Controller Upgrade w/o Display (Legacy 4100 to Rev 13 or higher)
579-943
4907-9001 TrueAlert Text Messaging Appliance 579-829
4100-9111
4100-9111
4100-9112
4100-9113
4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. DOMESTIC 120V; 250 Devices
4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. DOMESTIC 120V; 0 Devices
4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. CAN/ENG 120V; 0 Devices
PRECONF, CANADIAN FRENCH 120V; 0 Devices
4100-9114 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. W/ Flexible User Interface DOMESTIC
120V; 0 Devices
4100-9115 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. W/ Flexible User Interface CAN/ENG
120V; 0 Devices
574-848
574-848
574-848
574-848
574-848
574-848
4100-9116 PRECONF W/ Flexible User Interface, CANADIAN FRENCH 120V; 0
Devices
4100-9121 4100U/4100ES Preconfig.REDUNDANT 120V
574-848
579-331
4100-9122 4100U/4100ES Preconfig. w/ Flexible User Interface REDUNDANT 120V 579-331
4100-9131 MASTER CONTROLLER NO DISPLAY 574-848
4100-9132 MSTR CANADIAN ENG. NO DISPLAY
4100-9133 MSTR CANADIAN FRENCH w/o UI
4100-9141 NETWORK DISPLAY UNIT, DOMESTIC
4100-9142 NDU W/VOICE, DOMESTIC
574-848
574-918
579-269
579-269
4100-9143 NDU CANADIAN/ENGLISH
4100-9144 NDU CANADIAN/FRENCH
4100-9145 NDU W/VOICE CANADIAN/ENGLISH
4100-9146 NDU W/VOICE CANADIAN/FRENCH
4100-9151 NDU W/ Flexible User Interface, DOMESTIC
4100-9152 NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface, DOMESTIC
4100-9153 NDU W/Flexible User Interface CANADIAN/ENGLISH
4100-9154 NDU W/Flexible User Interface CANADIAN/FRENCH
579-269
579-269
579-269
579-269
579-269
579-269
579-269
579-269
4100-9155 NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface, CANADIAN/ENGLISH
4100-9156 NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface, CANADIAN/FRENCH
4100-9211 MSTR INTERNATIONAL w/DISPLAY (230V)
4100-9212 MSTR INTERNATIONAL w/Flexible User Interface (230V)
4100-9214 MSTR INTERNATIONAL w/Flexible User Interface, CHINA (230V)
4100-9213 MSTR INTERNATIONAL w/Flexible User Interface (120V)
4100-9222 Redundant Mstr w/ Flexible User Interface International (230V)
4100-9230 MSTR INTERNATIONAL NO DISPLAY (230V)
579-269
579-269
574-848
574-848
574-848
574-848
579-269
574-848
4100-9241 NDU INTERNATIONAL
4100-9242 NDU W/VOICE INTERNATIONAL
579-269
579-269
4100-9243 NDU W/Flexible User Interface INTERNATIONAL (230V) 579-269
4100-9244 NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface INTERNATIONAL (230V) 579-269
4100-9245 NDU w/ Flexible User Interface International (120V) 579-269
4100-9246 NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface INTERNATIONAL (230V) 579-269
4100-9311 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. DOMESTIC 120V; 250 Devices, EPS with IDNet 2 Card
574-848
E-5
References to 4100ES Module Installation Instructions (continued)
Appendix E
Table E-1. References to 4100ES module installation instructions (Continued)
PID Description
4100-9312 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. CAN/ENG 120V; 0 Devices, EPS with
IDNet 2 Card
4100-9313 PRECONF, CANADIAN FRENCH 120V; 0 Devices, EPS with IDNet 2
Card
4100-9314 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. W/ Flexible User Interface DOMESTIC
120V; 0 Devices, EPS with IDNet 2 Card
4100-9315 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. W/ Flexible User Interface CAN/ENG
120V; 0 Devices, EPS with IDNet 2 Card
4100-9316 PRECONF W/ Flexible User Interface, CANADIAN FRENCH 120V; 0
Devices, EPS with IDNet 2 Card
4100-9131 MASTER CONTROLLER NO DISPLAY, EPS with IDNet 2 Card
4100-9332 MSTR CANADIAN ENG. NO DISPLAY, EPS with IDNet 2 Card
4100-9342 NDU W/VOICE, DOMESTIC, EPS with IDNet 2 Card
4100-9352 NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface, DOMESTIC, EPS with
IDNet 2 Card
4100-9355 NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface, CANADIAN/ENGLISH, EPS with IDNet 2 Card
4100-9401 Remote Display Assembly w/ Flexible User Interface, RED, DOMESTIC
4100-9402 RDA w/Flexible User Interface, BEIGE, DOMESTIC
4100-9421 RDA w/Flexible User Interface, RED, CANADIAN/FRENCH
4100-9422 RDA w/Flexible User Interface, BEIGE, CANADIAN/FRENCH
4100-9441 RDA w/Flexible User Interface, RED, INTERNATIONAL
4100-9442 RDA w/Flexible User Interface, BEIGE, INTERNATIONAL
4100-9511 MSTR INTERNATIONAL w/DISPLAY (220,230, 240V), EPS with
IDNet 2 Card
4100-9512 MSTR INTERNATIONAL w/Flexible User Interface (220,230, 240V), EPS with IDNet 2 Card
4100-9513 MSTR INTERNATIONAL w/Flexible User Interface (120V), EPS with
IDNet 2 Card
4100-9531 MASTER CONTROLLER 1 LOOP– 220/230/240V, EPS with IDNet 2
Card
4100-9532 MASTER CONTROLLER 2 LOOP–220/230/240V, EPS with IDNet 2
Card
4100-9533 MASTER CONTROLLER 3 LOOP–220/230/240V, EPS with IDNet 2
Card
4100-9534 MASTER CONTROLLER 5 LOOP–220/230/240V, EPS with IDNet 2
Card
4100-9542 NDU W/VOICE INTERNATIONAL, EPS with IDNet 2 Card
4100-9600 BASIC TRANSPONDER
4100-9601 LOCAL MODE TRANSPONDER
4100-9607 FLEX UI REMOTE ANNUN
4100-9608 FLEX UI REMOTE ANNUN
4100-9609 FLEX UI REMOTE ANNUN
4100-9610 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR
4100-9611 REMOTE ANNUN EXTERNAL POWER
4100-9612 FLEX UI REMOTE ANNUN
4100-9613 FLEX UI REMOTE ANNUN
4100-9614 FLEX UI REMOTE ANNUN
4100-9620 BASIC AUDIO W/MIKE-ANALOG
4100-9621 BASIC AUDIO W/MIKE-DIGITAL
Installation
Instructions
574-848
574-848
574-848
574-848
574-848
574-848
574-848
579-269
579-269
579-269
579-687
579-687
579-687
579-687
579-687
579-687
574-848
574-848
574-848
574-848
574-848
574-848
574-848
579-269
574-844
574-844
579-271
579-271
579-271
579-271
579-271
579-271
579-271
579-271
748-589
748-589
E-6
References to 4100ES Module Installation Instructions (continued)
Appendix E
Table E-1. References to 4100ES module installation instructions (Continued)
PID Description Installation
Instructions
574-913 4100-9816 MASTER CLOCK INTERFACE KIT
4100-9832
4100-9833
SERVICE MODEM MODULE (566-276)
4020 RETRO-FIT KIT
4100-9854 4100 Module Legacy Bay Mounting Kit
4190-9018 FIBER MODEM AUDIO Exp BOARD
4905-9835 Temporal Code 4 Module
4907-9001 TrueAlert Text Messaging Appliance
574-046
579-229
579-913
579-581
579-840
579-829
Notes:
1. The current for all LED and Switch modules is included with the current for 4100-1288 and 4100-1289.
2. Amplifier standby current has two settings. The .085 A number is used if the System Option for
"Audio Power Conservation" is selected. This option shuts down the power stage when operating on secondary power (battery standby).
3. Add .8 mA (standby) / 1 mA (alarm) per device to calculate the current requirements for
4100-3101, 4100-3104, 4100-3105, 4100-3106 or 4100-3107 module.
4. Add 1.7 mA per device to calculate the current requirements for 4100-3102 MAPNET module.
E-7
GRAPHIC I/O (ASSY
562-789) LABELS TO BE
APPLIED TO 32 POINT
MOTHERBOARD (562-727)
8-POINT MONITOR CLASS B
(ASSY 562-731) LABELS TO BE
APPLIED TO CLASS B
MOTHERBOARD (562-856)
8-POINT MONITOR CLASS A
(ASSY 562-813) LABELS TO BE
APPLIED TO CLASS A
MOTHERBOARD (562-727)
MAPNET CHANNEL CLASS
A OR B LABELS TO BE
APPLIED TO 562-727
MOTHERBOARD AND
565-158 DAUGHTER CARD
MAPNET TRANSCEIVER (ASSY
562-926) LABELS TO BE
APPLIED TO 562-974
MAPNET POWER SUPPLY
RS-232/2120 INTERFACE BOARD
(ASSY 565-004) LABELS TO BE
APPLIED TO CLASS B
MOTHERBOARD (562-856) OR
TBI MOTHERBOARD (565-161
OR 565-213)
3 A AUX RELAY (ASSY
565-045) LABELS TO BE
APPLIED TO 32-POINT
MOTHERBOARD (562-727)
2 A AUX RELAY (ASSY
562-760) LABELS TO BE
APPLIED TO 32-POINT
MOTHERBOARD (562-727)
10 A AUX RELAY (ASSY
562-951) LABELS TO BE
APPLIED TO ASSY 562-952
.
Appendix F
Labels
Continued on next page
F-1
Labels, (continued)
AUDIO NAC LABELS
PHONE LABELS
FLEX 50 LABELS
SPS/RPS LABELS
XNAC LABELS
XPS LABELS
100 W
AMP
LABELS
Appendix F
F-2
Overview
In this chapter
Appendix G
Earth Fault Diagnostics
This appendix contains instructions on how to use the Earth Fault Search feature of the
4100ES diagnostics menus. The minimum Earth Fault detection level for the 4100ES is 10k ohms for all circuits.
Earth Fault Search is a diagnostic search of external field wiring that assists in locating circuits with earth faults. An earth fault occurs when an electrical circuit is shorted to ground.
Although most circuits operate with a single earth fault, multiple earth faults can disable communications. Because of this, earth faults must be located and repaired.
Earth Fault Search is conducted by the FACP. The diagnostic may be activated using either the front panel interface or the Computer Port Protocol (CPP), using a service port.
The 4100ES supports two types of Earth Fault Searches:
• Location Search. Searches all circuits at a location, such as a transponder or the main panel. For the purposes of Earth Fault Searching,
- A location is composed of a group of slaves connected to each other via 4100 Comm
(local RUI).
- The main panel is defined as all slaves local to the Master CPU.
- A transponder denotes all slaves associated with a single Transponder Interface Card
(TIC)/Local Mode TIC slave.
• IDNet Channel Search. Selectively enables channel isolators and repeaters to detect which segment of the channel wiring has a fault.
- Earth faults are detected by one of the following:
- A single designated power supply at a location. The power supply that detects the fault is designated via a jumper setting on the power supply slave. For any given location, only one power supply should detect earth faults.
- Each 4009 IDNet NAC Extender on an IDNet channel.
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic
Earth Fault Searching from the Front Panel
Page
G-1
Appendix G
General Guidelines
General
Guidelines
Review the guidelines below before initiating an Earth Fault Search.
• The Detect Earth Fault jumper must be installed at each SPS, RPS, TPS, IPS, or 4009T for earth fault detection to occur.
• Only one power supply per location is configured to detect earth faults.
• For more reliable earth fault searching:
- Use a Firefighter Telephone NAC for each telephone riser connection to a transponder.
- Use IDNet channel isolators to isolate channel faults to a specific segment of channel wiring.
- Set IDNet channel isolator addresses to the lowest IDNet device addresses, increasing with communication distance from the IDNet card.
• If an earth fault is suspected on the IDNet channel with multiple isolators, start an IDNet
Channel Search before doing a Location Search. If the Location Search is done first, it may not yield the correct location (this is a by-product of the extended amount of time required for the IDNet channel to initialize during a Location Search). Note: The 4009
IDNet NAC Extender has a common ground fault trouble that reports to the panel without running the Earth Fault Search.
• Earth Fault Search detects only one fault at a time. Multiple faults require fixing the first fault and then repeating the search.
• The FACP suspends normal operation for the duration of the Earth Fault Search.
• Location Earth Fault Searches optionally allow exclusion of auxiliary power circuits from the search, so that modules connected to the 24 V auxiliary outputs can remain in operation during the search.
• The option to exclude auxiliary power circuits does not apply to IDNet devices, because the entire IDNet communication channel is isolated during each search.
• During the search, all related troubles are suppressed and a single trouble pseudo-point is activated (P438).
• At the completion of the search, all slaves are restarted and normal panel operation resumes.
• Earth Fault Search is only supported by new 4100ES modules. 4100 Legacy (slot format) modules are not supported, with the following exceptions:
- MAPNET channel isolation during location search
- IPS for earth fault detection (not recommended). The Earth Fault Search may fail because the isolation circuits of some 4100ES slaves (such as the 4100ES telephone slave) do not support IPS.
IMPORTANT: The fire panel cannot provide fire protection during an
Earth Fault Search.
G-2
Appendix G
Earth Fault Searching from the Front Panel
Overview This section describes how to conduct an Earth Fault Search, from selecting the appropriate access code to correcting the fault.
Access Level
Selection
The panel must be at the appropriate access level (1, 2, 3, or 4) in order to run diagnostics. To get to the correct access level,
1. Press the Menu button. The following message comes up (press the Next or Previous
buttons, if necessary, to display it):
Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scroll
Change Access Level?
2. Press the Enter button. Now you are prompted to log in or log out.
1=Login 2=Logout
CURRENT ACCESS LEVEL = x
3. Press the "1" key on the numeric keypad to log in, so that the passcode prompt comes up.
Enter a Passcode followed by <ENTER>
4. Enter the passcode and press the Enter button. ACCESS GRANTED displays briefly on the
LCD, and then the display goes back to:
1=Login 2=Logout
CURRENT ACCESS LEVEL = y
You can now open the diagnostic menu as described in the next topic.
Starting the Earth
Fault Search
To start an Earth Fault Search,
1. If necessary, press the Menu button to access the menus.
2. Press the Previous or Next buttons until the diagnostic functions option appears:
Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scroll
Diagnostic Functions?
3. Press the Enter button. Then press Next or Previous buttons until the Earth Fault Search option appears:
Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scroll
Earth Fault Search?
Continued on next page
G-3
Appendix G
Earth Fault Searching from the Front Panel (continued)
Starting the Earth
Fault Search
4. Press the Enter button. The following options become available when you press the Next and
Previous buttons:
Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scroll
Location Search
Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scroll
IDNet Channel Search
Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scroll
Last Search Result
The search types are described below. When you have determined what kind of search to initiate, display its option (one of the three shown above) and press the Enter button. Each option has its own topic, below.
Search Option A:
Select Location
• If you select the Location Search menu item, a list of cards to search becomes available.
Use the Next and Previous buttons to scroll through the list.
• If you find a card that you suspect is connected to a circuit with an earth ground, press the
Enter button when that circuit is shown.
• Before you can start the search, the Aux Power Select option comes up.
1=Exclude 2=Include
Exclude AUXPWR circuits from search?
• The number you select, 1 or 2, determines whether the auxiliary power circuit on the selected board is searched for earth grounds. If you exclude the auxiliary power circuit from the search, the circuit will continue to operate normally.
• Press 1 (or just press the Enter button) to exclude the card's auxiliary power circuits from the search, or press 2 to remove auxiliary power circuits from normal operation and search them for earth grounds.
• Now you are prompted to start the search. When the location you want to search is shown and "Press <ENTER> to start search" displays, the search is ready to start. A sample is shown below.
CARD 1, SYSTEM POWER SUPPLY
Press <ENTER> to start search
Note: The FACP suspends normal operation for the duration of the search.
• Press the Enter button to start the search.
• As the search progresses, watch the display for an indication of how much of the search has been completed. The search can be aborted at any time if you press the Clear button.
Earth Search In-Progress, Please Wait...
Earth Search In-Progress, Please Wait...
40%
• Skip ahead to the "Completing the Search" topic.
G-4
Appendix G
Earth Fault Searching from the Front Panel (continued)
Search Option B:
Select Channel
• If you select the IDNet Channel Search menu item, a list of IDNet channels to search becomes available. Use the Next and Previous buttons to scroll through the list. When the
IDNet channel you want to search is shown and "Press <ENTER> to start search" displays, the search is ready to start. A sample screen is shown below.
IDNET CHANNEL M12
Press <ENTER> to select for search
Note: The FACP suspends normal operation for the duration of the search.
• Press the Enter button to start the search.
• As the search progresses, watch the display for an indication of how much of the search has been completed. The search can be aborted at any time if you press the Clear button.
Earth Search In-Progress, Please Wait...
Earth Search In-Progress, Please Wait...
40%
Skip ahead to the "Completing the Search" topic.
Search Option C:
Last Search
Result
This option simply displays the last Earth Fault Search result. If there has been no search since the last system startup, or if the last search was aborted, the panel displays "RESULT NOT
AVAILABLE."
Completing the
Search
When a Location or IDNet Channel Search completes, all of the following occurs:
• All slaves automatically reset.
• The FACP turns off the Earth Fault Search trouble pseudo-point.
• The panel displays the specific fault information.
The panel can only return one Earth Fault Search result at a time. If another fault exists, it can only be found via diagnostics after the first fault is cleared. Faults will continue to appear, one by one, until each one has been found and corrected.
IMPORTANT: Once you have been directed to an earth ground fault and corrected it, it is recommended that you restart the system (warm- or coldstart).
Continue to the next topic for a list of search results and their required actions.
G-5
Appendix G
Search Results
Overview There are several types of results that can display at the end of an Earth Fault Search. This section covers all types of results.
IMPORTANT: Once you have been directed to an earth ground fault and corrected it, it is recommended that you restart the system
(warm- or cold-start).
Non-Point Faults A non-point fault indicates a ground that cannot be traced to an addressable point (for example, a shield or an audio riser). The earth fault in this example is not occurring at the audio controller but somewhere in the riser:
CARD 17, ANALOG AUDIO CONTROLLER
AUDIO RISER 1 EARTH FAULT
Point Faults
Non-point faults can be displayed for each of the following items:
• Shield (Flex 50/100 W Amplifier)
• Audio Riser (Digital./Analog Audio Controller; Local Mode Transponder; may also annunciate as "DAR SECONDARY" (Digital Audio Riser Secondary) on transponder)
• Remote Mic 1 and Push-to-Talk line (Digital./Analog Audio Controller) (other remote mics are not supported)
• Channel Output (IDNet Card; MAPNET Interface Card)
• RUI Channel (Master Controller Card)
• Channel 1 to 3 (TrueAlert Power Supply)
A point fault indicates a ground at a specific addressable point. The example below is a location earth ground search result, where 3 is the card address, 10 is the point number, and 0 is the sub-point number (not used):
CARD 003, FLEX 50 AMPLIFIER
3-10-0 EARTH FAULT
Point faults can be found at any point in the system that connects to field wiring.
Some IDNet channel point fault examples are illustrated below.
Fault not cleared. The message below shows that an IDNet channel that has been isolated for fault detection still has the earth fault:
CARD 2, IDNET CARD (250 POINTS)
M1, EARTH FAULT SEARCH FAULT CLEAR FAIL
Fault between channel output and first isolator. The message below shows a fault between the IDNet channel output and the first isolator on the line:
CARD 2, IDNET CARD (250 POINTS)
M1, CHANNEL OUTPUT EARTH FAULT
Continued on next page
G-6
Appendix G
Search Results (continued)
Point Faults 4009 IDNet NAC Extender/TrueAlert Addressable Controller faults. The message below shows a fault detected on the 4009 IDNet NAC Extender before the repeater connected to that circuit is turned on:
CARD 2, IDNET CARD (250 POINTS)
M1-18, 4009A NAC EARTH FAULT
Conversely, the following example shows a fault detected after the repeater connected to that circuit is turned on:
CARD 2, IDNET CARD (250 POINTS)
M1-18, 4009A REPEATER EARTH FAULT
IDNet isolator fault. The message below shows a fault detected after the IDNet isolator was turned on:
CARD 2, IDNET CARD (250 POINTS)
M1-3, IDNET ISOLATOR EARTH FAULT
Fault Not Found If the message in the lower right corner of the LCD reads FAULT NOT FOUND (for a
Location Earth Fault Search) or FAULT CLEAR FAIL (for an IDNet Channel Earth Fault
Search), it means the search could not locate the fault, but it acknowledges that a fault exists.
There are three main possibilities behind this message:
• There are one or more internal wiring earth(s) in the system.
• There are system defects (hardware or software, such as a failed isolation circuit).
• An intermittent earth exists in the system (it occurs inconsistently and is therefore difficult to track via diagnostics).
• The cable to the service port may be grounded due to the remote PC's 3-prong plug. Use a non-grounded plug adapter to the remote PC to get rid of the earth ground.
• The fault is on an auxiliary output that was excluded from the search.
The problem may have to be found manually and then corrected in some of the above scenarios.
No Fault
Result Not
Available
If the message in the lower right corner of the LCD reads NO FAULT, it means the IDNet channel search could not locate any earth faults on that channel.
If the message in the lower right corner of the LCD reads RESULT NOT AVAILABLE, it means there is no result to view. This message comes up only when you have selected "Last
Search Result" on the menu.
G-7
Appendix G
Earth Fault Search Example
Earth Fault
Search Example
The illustration below shows a MINIPLEX system with one transponder that has three earth faults:
• SPS NAC on the SPS in the Main Panel
• RPS AUXPWR output on the RPS in Transponder 1
• IDNet channel in Transponder 1
SPS
SPS
NAC 2
Main
Panel
RPS
RPS
AUXPW R
RUI
Transponder
1
= Ground Fault
IDNet
Iso
1
Iso
2
Figure G-1. Earth Fault Example
The panel reports two earth faults, one for each power supply. The third fault is as yet unreported.
IDNet
Channel
M2
The example below shows the progression of events in finding and repairing the three faults.
They are presented as instructions to a technician who does not yet know about the third fault.
A. Find and repair the fault in the main panel.
1. After opening the Earth Fault Search diagnostic menu option, select Location Search.
2. .Select the SPS located in the Main Panel (this selects the Main Panel as the location for the search).
3. When prompted, select exclusion of AUXPWR circuits.
4. Start the search. (The panel turns on the earth fault search trouble pseudo-point and the
keypad inactivity utility pseudo-point to disable timeout during the search).
5. The search completes. The panel indicates that NAC 2 on the SPS has the earth fault. All slaves are reset (and the panel turns off the earth fault search trouble pseudo-point).
6. Repair the earth fault on NAC 2.
When this is done, the trouble from the SPS clears but the trouble from the RPS is still indicated.
Continued on next page
G-8
Appendix G
Earth Fault Search Example (continued)
Earth Fault
Search Example
B. Find and repair the indicated fault on Transponder 1.
1. Select Location Search.
2. Select the RPS located in Transponder 1 (this selects Transponder 1 as the location for the search).
3. When prompted, select exclusion of AUXPWR circuits.
4. Start the search. (The panel turns on the earth fault search trouble pseudo-point and the
keypad inactivity utility pseudo-point to disable timeout during the search).
5. The search completes. The panel indicates FAULT NOT FOUND because the fault is on the excluded AUXPWR circuit. All slaves in Transponder 1 are reset (and the panel turns off the earth fault search trouble pseudo-point).
6. Repeat the search but include the AUXPWR circuit this time.
7. The search completes. The panel indicates a fault on the AUXPWR point on the RPS. All slaves in Transponder 1 are reset (and the panel turns off the earth fault search trouble pseudo-point).
8. Repair the earth fault on AUXPWR.
Even though you have fixed the fault, the trouble from the RPS is still not clearing. Remember that the only two faults you could see at first were from the SPS and RPS. It is time to find and clear the next fault.
C. Find and repair the next indicated fault on Transponder 1.
1. Select Location Search.
2. Select the RPS located in Transponder 1.
3. When prompted, select exclusion of AUXPWR circuits.
4. .Start the search.
5. The search completes. The panel indicates a fault on IDNet Channel M2.
6. Start another search, this time an IDNet Channel Search on Channel M2.
7. When prompted, select exclusion of AUXPWR circuits.
8. The search completes. The panel indicates a fault on the IDNet channel between isolators 1 and 2.
9. Repair the earth fault. The trouble from the RPS is cleared.
G-9
Appendix H
Special Application NAC-Compatible Notification
Appliances and Accessories
Table H-1. Special Application NAC-Compatible Notification Appliances and
Accessories
P/N
4904-9343
4904-9170
4904-9173
4904-9175
4904-9181
4904-9182
4904-9185
4904-9333
4904-9344
4906-9101
4906-9103
4906-9102
4904-9168
4904-9171
4904-9176
4904-9177
4904-9178
4904-9183
4904-9331
4904-9342
4904-9345
4904-9174
4904-9180
4904-9184
4904-9346
4904-9169
4904-9172
4904-9332
4906-9105
4906-9106
4906-9113
4903-9356
4903-9359
4903-9150
4903-9153
H-1
DESCRIPTION
V/O 15CD RED FREE-RUN TNA
V/O 15CD WHITE FREE-RUN TNA
V/O 24VDC 15CD RED VER F/S
V/O 24VDC 15CD WHT VER F/S
V/O 24VDC 15CD RED HORIZ F/S
V/O 24VDC 15CD RED CEIL F/S
V/O 15CD RED SYNC TNA
V/O 15CD WHITE SYNC TNA
V/O 24VDC 15CD WHT PLAIN F/S
V/O 24VDC 30CD RED VER F/S
V/O 24VDC 30CD RED HORIZ F/S
V/O 24VDC 30CD RED CEIL F/S
V/O 24VDC 30CD WHT PLAIN F/S
V/O 75CD RED FREE-RUN TNA
V/O 75CD WHITE FREE-RUN TNA
V/O 75CD RED SYNC TNA
V/O 75CD WHITE SYNC TNA
V/O 110CD RED FREE-RUN TNA
V/O 110CD WHITE FREE-RUN TNA
V/O 24VDC 110CD RED VER F/S
V/O 24VDC 110CD WHT VER F/S
V/O 24VDC 110CD RED HOR F/S
V/O 24VDC 110CD RED CEIL F/S
V/O 110CD RED SYNC TNA
V/O 110CD WHITE SYNC TNA
V/O 15/30/75/110cd W/M RED TNA
V/O 15/30/75/110cd W/M WHT TNA
V/O 15/30/75/110cd C/M RED TNA
V/O WEATHERPROOF W/M RED
V/O WEATHERPROOF W/M WHT
V/O WEATHERPROOF W/M (CAN) RED
S/V 15CD RED 25/70V TNA
S/V 15CD WHITE 25/70V TNA
S/V 24VDC 15CD RED HORIZ F/S
S/V 24VDC 15CD RED VER F/S
Appendix H
Special Application NAC-Compatible Notification Appliances and Accessories
Table H-1. Special Application NAC-Compatible Notification Appliances and Accessories
(Continued)
P/N
4903-9193
4903-9148
4903-9194
4903-9197
4903-9357
4903-9360
4903-9358
4903-9361
4903-9198
4906-9151
4906-9153
4906-9154
4901-9820
DESCRIPTION
S/V 24VDC 15CD WHT HORIZ F/S
S/V 24VDC 30CD RED HORIZ F/S
S/V 24VDC 30CD WHT HORIZ F/S
S/V, 30CD, RND TNA
S/V 75CD RED 25/70V TNA
S/V 75CD WHITE 25/70V TNA
S/V 110CD RED 25/70V TNA
S/V 110CD WHITE 25/70V TNA
S/V 110CD, RND TNA
S/V 15/30/75/110cd W/M RED TNA
S/V 15/30/75/110cd W/M WHT TNA
S/V 15/30/75/110cd C/M WHT TNA
HORN 24VDC RED TNA
4009-9201
4009-9301
4009-9401
4903-9252
4903-9253
4903-9254
4903-9255
4903-9256
4903-9257
4903-9258
4903-9417
4903-9418
4903-9419
4903-9425
4903-9426
4903-9427
4903-9428
4903-9429
4903-9430
4903-9431
4903-9432
H-2
NAC EXTENDER 120VAC, IDNET
NAC EXTENDER, 240VAC, IDNET
4009 T/A ADDR CONTROLLER
A/V 24VDC 15CD RED HOR F/S
A/V 24VDC 30CD RED HOR F/S
A/V 24VDC 110CD RED HOR F/S
A/V 24VDC 15CD RED VER F/S
A/V 24VDC 110CD RED VER F/S
A/V 24VDC 15CD WHT HOR F/S
A/V 24VDC 30CD WHT HOR F/S
A/V 15CD RED SYNC TNA
A/V 75CD RED SYNC TNA
A/V 110CD RED SYNC TNA
A/V 15CD RED STD TNA
A/V 75CD RED STD TNA
A/V 110CD RED STD TNA
A/V 15CD WHITE SYNC TNA
A/V 75CD WHITE SYNC TNA
A/V 110CD WHITE SYNC TNA
A/V 15CD WHITE STD TNA
A/V 75CD WHITE STD TNA
Appendix H
Special Application NAC-Compatible Notification Appliances and Accessories
Table H-1. Special Application NAC-Compatible Notification Appliances and Accessories
(Continued)
P/N
4903-9433
4906-9127
4906-9129
4906-9128
4906-9130
4906-9131
4906-9132
4906-9143
4906-9201 - 9204
4906-9251 - 9254
4906-9227 - 9230
4906-9105 - 9106
4906-9131 - 9132
4906-9113 - 9143
DESCRIPTION
A/V 110CD WHITE STD TNA
A/V 15/30/75/110cd W/M RED
A/V 15/30/75/110cd W/M WHT
A/V 15/30/75/110cd C/M RED
A/V 15/30/75/110cd C/M WHT
A/V WEATHERPROOF W/M RED
A/V WEATHERPROOF W/M WHT
A/V WEATHERPROOF W/M (CAN) RED
MULTI-CANDELA
MULTI-CANDELA
MULTI-CANDELA
WEATHERPROOF
WEATHERPROOF
WEATHERPROOF
49CMTV-APPLW
1
49CMTV-WWF
1
49CMTV-WWF-BA
1
49CMTV-WRF
1
49CMTV-WRF-BA
1
49CMT-APPLW
1
49CMT-WWF
1
49CMT-WWF-BA
1
49CMT-WRF
1
49CMT-WRF-BA
1
4905-9815
MT HORN/STROBE
MT HORN/STROBE
MT HORN/STROBE
MT HORN/STROBE
MT HORN/STROBE
MT HORN
MT HORN
MT HORN
MT HORN
MT HORN
SMARTSYNC ADAPTER, TNA
4090-9005 SRP
4090-9006
4098-9772
SRP w/ENCLOSURE
SENSOR BASE WITH 520 Hz SOUNDER
4098-9773 CO SENSOR BASE WITH 520 Hz
SOUNDER
1
A maximum of thirteen 49CMT/49CMTV appliances per SmartSync NAC
H-3
Appendix I
EPS Compatible Appliances and Devices
EPS Compatible
Devices
The following devices are compatible with the EPS.
Table I-1. Compatible Devices
Addressable Appliance Description
4009 IDNAC Repeater
Dual Class A Isolator (DCAI)
TrueAlert Addressable Isolator+ module
Model Numbers
4009-9601 (platinum)
4009-9602 (red)
4100-6103
4905-9929
EPS Compatible
Appliances
The following appliances are compatible with the EPS.
Table I-2. Compatible Appliances
Addressable Appliance
Description
Audible Only Horn notification appliances
Audible/Visible notification appliances
Visible Only notification appliances
Speaker/Visible notification appliances
TrueAlert ES Appliances
Model Numbers
49AO-WRF
49AO-WRF-BA
49AO-WRS-BA
49AO-WWF
49AO-WWF-BA
49AO-WWS-BA
49AO-APPLC
49AO-APPLC-BA
49AV-WRF
49AV-WWF
49AV-WRF-BA
49AV-WRQ-BA
49AV-WRS-BA
49AV-WWF-BA
49AV-WWS-BA
49AV-APPLC
49AV-APPLC-BA
49AVH-APPLC
49AVH-APPLC-BA
49AVH-APPLCA
49AVH-APPLCA-BA
49AVH-APPLCB
49AVH-APPLCB-BA
49VO-WRF
49VO-WWF
49VO-WRA-A
49VO-WWA-A
49VO-WRA-BA
49VO-WRF-BA
49VO-WRQ-BA
49VO-APPLC
49VO-APPLC-BA
49VOH-APPLC
49VOH-APPLC-BA
49VOH-APPLCA
49VOH-APPLCA-BA
49MT-APPLW
1
49MT-WRF
1
49MT-WRF-BA
1
49MT-WRS-BA
1
49MT-WWS-BA
1
49MT-WWF-BA
49VO-WRS-BA
49VO-WWA-BA
49VO-WWF-BA
49VO-WWS-BA
1
49MTV-APPLW
2
49MTV-WWF
2
49MTV-WWF-BA
2
49MTV-WRF
2
49MTV-WRF-BA
2
49MTV-WRS-BA
2
49MTV-WWS-BA
2
49VOH-APPLCB
49VOH-APPLCB-BA
49VO-WRA-A-BA
49VO-WWA-A-BA
49VO-WWS-A-BA
TrueAlert Appliances
Model Numbers
4901-9850
4901-9853
4906-9227
4906-9228
4906-9229
4906-9230
4906-9201
4906-9202
4906-9203
4906-9204
-
4906-9251
4906-9253
4906-9254
Continued on next page
I-1
Appendix I EPS Compatible Appliances and Devices
EPS Compatible Appliances and Devices
ES Compatible
Appliances
Table I-2. Compatible Appliances (Continued)
Addressable Appliance
Description
TrueAlert ES Appliances
Model Numbers
Audible/Visible Weatherproof notification appliances
Visible Only Weatherproof notification appliances
LED Visible-Only Wall-Mount
LED Visible-Only High-Candela
Wall-Mount
LED Visible-Only Wall-Mount
Weatherproof
LED Visible-Only High-Candela
Wall-Mount Weatherproof
LED Audible/Visible Wall-Mount
LED Audible/Visible Wall-Mount
High-Candela
49AV-WRFO
49AV-WRFO-BA
49VO-WRFO
49VO-WRFO-BA
49VO-WRSO-BA
59VO-WRF
59VO-WRF-BA
59VO-WWF
59VO-WWF-BA
59VO-WRFAB
59VO-WRFH-BA
59VO-WWFH-BA
59VO-WRFABH-BA
59VO-WRFO
59VO-WRFO-BA
59VO-WWFO-BA
59VO-WRFABO
59VO-APPLWRH-O
59VO-APPLWWH-O
59AV-WRF
59AV-WRF-BA
59AV-WWF
59AV-WWF-BA
59AV-WRFAB
59AV-WRFH
59AV-WRFH-BA
59AV-WWFH-BA
59AV-WRFABH
59AV-WRFABH-BA
49AV-WWFO-BA
49AV-APPLW-CO
49VO-WWFO-BA
49VO-APPLW-CO
59VO-WRFAB-BA
59VO-WWFAB
59VO-WWFAB-BA
59VO-APPLWR
59VO-APPLWW
59VO-WWFABH-BA
59VO-APPLWRH
59VO-APPLWWH
59VO-WRFABO-BA
59VO-WWFABO-BA
59VO-APPLWR-O
59VO-APPLWW-O
59AV-WRFAB-BA
59AV-WWFAB
59AV-WWFAB-BA
59AV-APPLWR
59AV-APPLWW
59AV-WWFABH-BA
59AV-APPLWRH
59AV-APPLWWH
LED Audible/Visible Wall-Mount
Weatherproof
LED Audible/Visible Wall-Mount
High Candela Weatherproof
Audible-Only Wall-Mount
Audible-Only Wall-Mount
Weatherproof
59AV-WRFO
59AV-WRFO-BA
59AV-WWFO-BA
59AV-WRFABO
59AV-APPLWRH-O
59AV-APPLWWH-O
59AO-WRS
59AO-WRS-BA
59AO-WWS
59AO-WRSO
59AO-WRSO-BA
59AO-WWSO-BA
59AV-WRFABO-BA
59AV-WWFABO-BA
59AV-APPLWR-O
59AV-APPLWW-O
59AO-WWS-BA
59AO-APPLWR
59AO-APPLWW
59AO-APPLWR-O
59AO-APPLWW-O
Wall-Mount Speaker and Speaker/
Visible (and Backplate)
Ceiling-Mount Speaker and
Speaker/Visible
49SV-APPLW(-BA)
49HFV-APPLW(-BA)
49MP-SVWR
49MP-SVWW
49SO-APPLW(-BA)
49HF-APPLW(-BA)
49MP-SOWR
49MP-SOWW
49SO-APPLC(-BA)
49HF-APPLC(-BA)
49SV-APPLC(-BA)
49HFV-APPLC(-BA)
Plate 59AP-EUROBB
1
A maximum of thirty-two 49MT appliances per NAC
2
A maximum of twenty-one 49MTV appliances per circuit
49SVH-APPLC(-BA)
49HFVH-APPLC(-BA)
49HFVH-APLCA-BA
49HFVH-APLCB-BA
TrueAlert
Appliances
Model Numbers
-
-
I-2
Appliance
AS-241575W
AS-24MCW
AS-24MCC
AS-24MCWH
AS-24MCCH
ASWP-2475W, ASWP-2475C
ASWP-24MCWH
ASWP-24MCCH
ASA-24MCW, ASB-24MCW
ASA-24MCC, ASB-24MCC
HSR
HSRC
HSRCS
HSRS
HSW
HSWC
HSWCS
HSWS
HS4-241575W
HS4-24MCW
HS4-24MCWH
HS4-24MCC
NS-241575W
NS-24MCW
NS-24MCC
NS-24MCCH
ZNS-MCW
ZNS-MCWH
ZNS-24MCC
ZNS-24MCCH
Appendix J
Cooper Wheelock Appliances Compatible With 4100ES
Wheelock Protocol For Special Applications
Overview The tables in this appendix list Cooper Wheelock appliances compatible with 4100ES
Wheelock protocol for special applications.
Synchronizing
Horn Strobes
Table J-1. Synchronizing Horn Strobes
Description
AS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
AS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
AS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
AS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
AS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
AS Series WP Horn Strobe. 24VDC, 30Cd, Wall or Ceiling Mount
AS Series WP Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
AS Series WP Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
AS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount. Amber/Blue
AS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount. Amber/Blue
HN STR, Red , 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8CD, 5 Mount
HN STR, Red, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8 Cd, 5 Mount
HN STR, Silver red, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8 Cd, 5 Mount
HN STR, Silver Red, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8CD, 5 Mount
HN STR, White, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8CD, 5 Mount
HN STR, White, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8 Cd, 5 Mount
HN STR, Silver white, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8 Cd, 5
Mount
HN STR, Silver White, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8CD, 5 Mount
HS4 Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
HS4 Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
HS4 Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
HS4 Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
NS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
NS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
NS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
NS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
ZNS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
ZNS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
ZNS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
ZNS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
J-1
Appendix J
Compatible Appliances (continued)
Synchronizing strobes
Table J-2. Synchronizing strobes
Appliance Description
RSS-241575W
RSSP-241575W
RSS-24MCW, RSSP-24MCW
RSS-24MCWH, RSSP-24MCWH
RSS-24MCC, RSS-24MCCR
RSS-24MCCH, RSS-24MCCHR
RSSR-2415W, RSSR-2415C
RSSR-2475W, RSSR-2475C
RSSR-24110C
RSSA-24110W, RSSB-24110W,
RSSG-24110W, RSSR-24110W
RSSA-24MCC, RSSB-24MCC,
RSSG-24MCC, RSSR-24MCC
RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
RSSP Series Strobe. 12VDC or 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
RSS/RSSP Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
RSS/RSSP Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount (R=Round)
RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount (R=Round)
RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, 15Cd, Red, Wall or Ceiling Mount
RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, 75Cd, Red, Wall or Ceiling Mount
RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, 110Cd, Red, Ceiling Mount
RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, 110Cd, Wall Mount. Amber/Blue/Green/
Red.
RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount. Amber/Blue/
Green/Red.
RSSA-24MCCH, RSSB-24MCCH,
RSSG-24MCCH, RSSR-24MCCH
RSSPA-24MCC
RSSWPA-2475W
RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount. Amber/
Blue/Green/Red.
RSSP Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount. Amber
RSS Series WP Strobe. 24VDC, Wall Mount. Amber
RSSWPA-24MCCH,RSSWPB-24MCCH,
RSSWPG-24MCCH,RSSWPR-24MCCH
RSS Series WP Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount. Amber/
Blue/Green/Red.
RSSWP-2475W, RSSWP-2475C
RSSWP-24MCWH
RSSWP-24MCCH
STR
STRC
STRCS
STRS
STW
RSS Series WP Strobe. 24VDC, 30Cd, Wall or Ceiling Mount
RSS Series WP Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
RSS Series WP Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
STR, Red, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 12/24VDC, 8CD, 5 Mount
STR, Red, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 8 Cd, 5 Mount
STR, Silver red, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 8 Cd, 5 Mount
STR, Silver Red, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 12/24VDC, 8CD, 5 Mount
STR, White, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 12/24VDC, 8CD, 5 Mount
STWC
STWCS
STWS
ZRS-MCW
ZRS-MCWH
ZRS-24MCC
ZRS-24MCCH
STR, White, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 8 Cd, 5 Mount
STR, Silver white, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 8 Cd, 5 Mount
STR, Silver White, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 12/24VDC, 8CD, 5 Mount
ZRS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
ZRS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
ZRS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
ZRS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
J-2
Appendix J
Compatible Appliances (continued)
Appliances with synchronizing strobes
Table J-3. Appliances with synchronizing strobes
Appliance Description
(Only Strobe portion compatible with the 4008 Wheelock Protocol for Special Applications)
AMT-241575W,
AMT-241575W-NYC
AMT-24MCW
MT-241575W
MT-24MCW
MTWP-2475W, MTWP-2475C
MTWP-24MCWH
MTWP-24MCCH
MTWPA-2475W, MTWPB-2475W
MTWPG-2475W, MTWPR-2475W
MTA-24MCCH, MTB-24MCCH,
MTG-24MCCH, MTR-24MCCH
MTWPA-24MCCH, MTWPB-24MCCH,
MTWPG-24MCCH,MTWPR-24MCCH
ET70WP-2475W, ET70WP-2475C
ET70WP-24185W
ET70WP-24177C
ET70WPA-2475
CH70-241575W
CH70-24MCW
CH90-24MCC
CH70-24MCWH
CH90-24MCCH
E50-241575W
E50-24MCW
E50-24MCWH
E50A-24MCC, E50B-24MCC
E60-24MCW
E60-24MCWH
E60-24MCC
E60-24MCCH
E70-241575W
E70-24MCW
E70-24MCWH
E70-24MCC, E90-24MCC
E90-24MCCH
AMT Series Multi-Tone Horn Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
AMT Series Multi-Tone Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
MT Series MT Horn Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount.
MT Series Multi-Tone Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
MTWP Series MT Horn Strobe. 24VDC, 30Cd, Wall or Ceiling Mount
MTWP Series MT Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
MTWP Series MT Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling
Mount
MTWP Series Multi-Tone Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Wall Mount. Amber/
Blue/Green/Red
MT Series Multi-Tone Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall
Mount. Amber/Blue/Green/Red
MTWP Series Multi-Tone Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall
Mount. Amber/Blue/Green/Red
ET70WP Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, 30Cd, Wall or Ceiling
Mount
ET70WP Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, 185Cd, Wall Mount
ET70WP Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, 177Cd, Ceiling Mount
ET70WP Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Wall or Ceiling Mt. Amber
CH70 Series Chime Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
CH70 Series Chime Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
CH90 Series Chime Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
CH70 Series Chime Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
CH90 Series Chime Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
E50 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
E50 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
E50 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
E50 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mt. Amber/
Blue
E60 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
E60 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
E60 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
E60 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
E70 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
E70 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
E70 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
E70/E90 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
E90 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
J-3
Appendix J
Compatible Appliances (continued)
Table J-3. Appliances with synchronizing strobes (Continued)
Appliance
E60A-24MCC, E70A-24MCC,
E70B-24MCC, E90A-24MCC, E90B-24MCC
ET70-241575W, ET90-241575W
ET70-24MCW
ET70-24MCWH
ET70-24MCC, ET90-24MCC
ET70WPG-2475, ET70WPB-2475W
ET70WPG-2475W, ET70WPR-2475W
ET90-24MCCH
ET80-241575W
ET80-24MCW
ET80-24MCWH
S8-24MCC
S8-24MCCH
SA-S70-24MCW
SA-S90-24MCC
Description
E60/E70/E90 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling
Mount. Amber/Blue
ET70/ET90 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
ET70 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
ET70 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
ET70/ET90 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
ET70WP Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Wall or Ceiling Mt. Green,
Blue, Red
ET90 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
ET80 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
ET80 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
ET80 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
S8 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
S8 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
SA-S70 Series Amp-Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
SA-S90 Series Amp-Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling
Mount
Synchronizing horns
Appliance
AH-24
AH-24WP
HS-24
HNR
HNRC
HNRCS
HNRS
HNW
HNWC
HNWCS
HNWS
MIZ-24S
NH-12/24, NH-12/24R
ZNH
Table J-4. Synchronizing horns
Description
AH Series Horn. 24VDC
AH Series Weatherproof Horn. 12VDC or 24VDC
HS Series Horn. 24VDC
Horn, Red, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 5 Mount
Horn, Red, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24V, 3dB, 5 Mount
Horn, Silver red, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24V, 3dB, 5 Mount
Horn, Silver Red, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 5 Mount
Horn, White, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 5 Mount
Horn, White, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 5 Mount
Horn, Silver white, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 5
Mount
Horn, Silver White, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 5 Mount
MIZ Series Horn. 24VDC
NH Series Horn. 12/24VDC (R=Round)
ZNH Series Horn. 12/24VDC
J-4
Appendix J
Compatible Appliances (continued)
Coded audible appliances
Appliance
AMT-12/24, AMT-12/24-NYC
CH70, CH90
CSX10-24-DC, CSXG10-24-DC
MT-12/24, MT4-12/24
Table J-5. Coded audible appliances
Description
AMT Series Multi-Tone Horn. 12/24VDC, Wall or Ceiling
Mount
CH70/CH90 Series Chime. 24VDC, Wall or Ceiling Mount
CSX Series Bell. 24VDC, Wall Mount
MT Series Multi-Tone Horn. 12/24VDC, Wall or Ceiling Mount
Non-synchronizing appliances
Appliance
MB-G6-24, MB-G10-24
Table J-6. Non-synchronizing appliances
Description
MB Series Bell. 24V, Wall Mount
J-5
Appendix K
Audio Equipment Compatible with 520 Hz Low Frequency
Alarm
Overview The following audio system components have been tested by UL to meet the requirements in
UL464 Section 24.3 "Determination of low frequency signal format". These components have only been tested with Simplex speaker Notification Appliances and accessories. The only compatible signal is the "Horn [520 Hz]" added in revision D of the audio library, chipset 42.
Compatible Audio
System
Components
Table K-1. Compatible Audio System Components
Audio System Component Description
Basic Audio with Microphone
Analog Audio Controller Board
Digital Audio Controller Board
Analog Flex 35 and Flex 50 Amplifiers
Model Numbers
4100-9620
4100-9621
4100-1210
4100-1311
Digital Flex 35 and Flex 50 Amplifiers
Analog 100W Amplifiers
Digital 100W Amplifiers
Flex Amp Expansion NAC Board
Flex Amp Class A Adapter
100 Watt Expansion NAC Board
100 Watt Class A Adapter
Expansion Signal Card and Accessories
4100-1312
4100-1313
4100-1363
4100-1364
4100-1326
4100-1327
4100-1363
4100-1364
4100-1314
4100-1315
4100-1318
4100-1319
4100-1320
4100-1321
4100-1324
4100-1325
4100-1328
4100-1329
4100-1332
4100-1333
4100-1334
4100-1335
4100-1338
4100-1339
4100-1245
4100-1246
4100-1248
4100-1249
4100-1266
4100-1267
4100-5116
K-1
Appendix K Audio Equipment Compatible with 520 Hz Low Frequency Alarm
Compatible Audio Equipment (continued)
Compatible
Notification
Appliances
The list of compatible Simplex Speaker Notification Appliances and accessories is as follows.
Table K-2. Compatible Notification Appliances
Notification Appliance Description
Wall Mount Speaker Only
Ceiling Mount Speaker Only
Wall Mount Speaker Visible
Wall Mount ADDR Speaker Visible
Ceiling Mount ADDR Speaker Visible
Cover Accessories
Surface Mount Adapter Skirts
49XX Series Ceiling-Mount Speaker and Speaker/
Visible
49XX Series Wall-Mount Speaker and Speaker/Visible
Model Numbers
4902-9716
4902-9717
4902-9721
4906-9151
4606-9153
4906-9254
4906-9255
4906-9256
4906-9254
4906-9255
4906-9256
4905-9811
4905-9812
4905-9814
4905-9827
4905-9845
4905-9846
4905-9980
4905-9981
4905-9988
4905-9989
4905-9991
4905-9996
4905-9997
4905-9941
4905-9942
4905-9946
4905-9947
49SO-APPLC(-BA)
49SV-APPLC(-BA)
49SVH-APPLC(-BA)
49HFVH-APLCA-BA
49HF-APPLC(-BA)
49HFV-APPLC(-BA)
49HFVH-APPLC(-BA)
49HFVH-APLCB-BA
49SV-APPLW(-BA)
49SO-APPLW(-BA)
49HFV-APPLW(-BA)
49HF-APPLW(-BA)
K-2
Appendix K Audio Equipment Compatible with 520 Hz Low Frequency Alarm
Table K-2. Compatible Notification Appliances
Notification Appliance Description
49XX Series Dress Cover Accessories
Model Numbers
49SOC-CK
49SOC-CR
49SOC-CW
49SOC-WRBA
49SOC-WRBC
49SOC-WRBF
49SOC-WRFEU
49SOC-WRFIRE
49SOC-WRS
49SOC-WWBA
49SOC-WWBC
49SOC-WWBF
49SOC-WWFEU
49SOC-WWFIRE
49SOC-WWS
49SVC-CK
49SVC-CRALT
49SVC-CRBA
49SVC-CRBC
49SVC-CRBF
49SVC-CRFEU
49SVC-CRFIRE
49SVC-CRS
49SVC-CWALT
49SVC-CWBA
49SVC-CWBC
49SVC-CWBF
49SVC-CWFEU
49SVC-CWFIRE
49SVC-CWS
49SVC-WRALT
49SVC-WRBA
49SVC-WRBC
49SVC-WRBF
49SVC-WRFEU
49SVC-WRFIRE
49SVC-WRS
49SVC-WWALT
49SVC-WWBA
49SVC-WWBC
49SVC-WWBF
49SVC-WWFEU
49SVC-WWFIRE
49SVC-WWS
K-3
Appendix K Audio Equipment Compatible with 520 Hz Low Frequency Alarm
Compatible Audio Equipment (continued)
Audio Options
Alongside
Compatible
Equipment
The following equipment is not part of the signal path for the 520 Hz Low Frequency Alarm signal and therefore may be used along side compatible components of the audio system.
Table K-3. Audio Options That May Be Configured Alongside Compatible Equipment
Notification Appliance Description
Auxiliary Audio Input Board
Audio Operator Interface Modules
Expansion Bay
Audio Expansion Bay Harness Kit
Constant Supervision Modules
Message Expansion Board
Model Numbers
4100-1240
4100-1252
4100-1253
4100-1254
4100-1255
4100-2300
4100-2320
4100-1259
4100-1260
4100-1241
4100-1242
K-4
574-848
Rev. BD
© 2017 Johnson Controls. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision and are subject to change without notice. Additional listings may be applicable, contact your local Simplex® product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under
Simplex Time Recorder Co. Simplex, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
Download
Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Document public link
Advertisement
Key features
Advanced detection technology for early warning of fire
Flexible configuration options to meet specific application needs
User-friendly operation for easy system management
Modular design for customization and scalability
Complies with NFPA 72 and UL 864 standards for reliability and performance
Remote monitoring and control capabilities for added convenience and peace of mind
Frequently asked questions
The 4100ES Series complies with NFPA 72 and UL 864 standards for reliability and performance.
Yes, the 4100ES Series features flexible configuration options to meet the specific needs of your facility.
Yes, the 4100ES Series offers remote monitoring and control capabilities for added convenience and peace of mind.
